You are on page 1of 489

Radar/Chart Radar

User Guide

© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.
Part Number: 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide
Part Number: 65900010-6

Publication Revision: E
Software Version: 4.1

Before using the equipment, please read this manual.

© 2010 Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.
This publication and the information contained herein is and remains the intellectual
property of Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. Northrop Grumman Sperry
Marine B.V. provide a limited licence for the user to reproduce this material for their
own internal purpose and use, but not for distribution to third parties. Reproduction
of this material for resale or commercial gain is expressly prohibited. Northrop
Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. are not responsible for any loss or damage of any
nature or kind whatsoever that may arise from either the use of this publication or its
reproduction.

© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Intentionally Blank

65900010 ii

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Warning
ngs and Cautions

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
The features, functionality and capability which are described
d in
i this
manual are not necessarily present in all versions or configura
rations of the
VisionMaster FT system.

WARNING: Lethal Voltage Hazard

When access covers are removed, lethal voltages m may be
exposed. Some capacitors used in the equipment ta take several
minutes to discharge their stored voltages after swi
witch OFF;
this is a lethal voltage hazard. Always set the supply
ply switch-
fuse to OFF and remove the fuses, before removing g the access
covers of the equipment.

WARNING: Health Hazard

When cleaning the inside of the equipment, take car
are not to
inhale dust. The dust is a temporary health hazard,, depending
d
on individual allergies.

WARNING: Radiation Hazard

Keep outside the hazard zone around an antenna or open
waveguide radiating power. Refer to the table beloww for hazard
zones. When it is necessary to work on the Scannerer Unit, make
sure that radar is switched OFF, and that both the M
Mains
Isolator and the Scanner Control Unit are turned to
o the
t OFF
position.
Never look directly into an open waveguide.
Radar and other forms of RF radiation can cause Cardiac
Ca
Pacemakers to malfunction. If you use a Cardiac Pac acemaker
and suspect a malfunction, leave the vicinity of the
e radar
r
system immediately and seek medical advice.

Most countries accept that there is no significant radiation haz
azard at RF
2 2
power density levels of up to 100W/m (10mW/cm )

65900010 iii

Warnings and Cautions Radar/Chart Radar
ar User Guide

Hazard Zones
2 2 2
Antenna Length 100 W/m 50 W/m 10 W//m

1.2 m X-Band 1.7 m 8.5 m 17 m

1.8 m X-Band 1.05 m 5.25 m 10.5
.5 m
2.4 m X Band 0.75 m 3.75 m 7.5
5m
2.7 m S-Band 0.73 m 3.65 m 7.3
3m
3.7 m S-Band 0.55 m 2.75 m 5.5
5m

CAUTION: Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESSDs
Ds)

This equipment contains ESSDs. Take care not
no to
damage these devices by discharge of electro
rostatic
voltages.

iv 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Preface

PREFACE
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The structure of this manual and the design of the pages can help you to
find the information that you need. Consistent presentation techniques are
used throughout the manual, to make it easy to use.

Depending on the composition and configuration of your
installation, not all of the facilities presented in this User Guide may
be applicable to your system.

This manual is intended to be used by the VisionMaster FT operator and is
divided into the following Chapters and Annexes:
Chapter 1 - Overview
Chapter 2 - Getting Started with Radar
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation of Radar
Appendix A - Operational Functions in a Multi-
node System
Chapter 4 - Sensor Management
Chapter 5 - Presentation, Motion, Vector and Trail Modes
Chapter 6 - Navigation Tools
Chapter 7 - Alarms
Chapter 8 - Routes
Chapter 9 - Electronic Range and Bearing Lines
Chapter 10 - Targets
Chapter 11 - Radar
Chapter 12 - Charts
Appendix A - Chart Datum Codes
Chapter 13 - Brilliance
Chapter 14 - System

Annex A - Search and Rescue Detection
Annex B - Static Site
Glossary

Your system may include optional features that are not described in this
manual. For information on these optional features, refer to Optional
Features User Guide, 65900014.

65900010 v

Preface Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

NOTICE
Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.V. have a policy of continuous development.
This may lead to the equipment described in this manual being at variance with
equipment manufactured after its publication.

vi 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table of Contents

Table of Contents
PREFACE ................................................................................................ v

Chapter 1 Overview
Hardware Configurations ........................................................................... 1-1
Single System ............................................................................................ 1-2
Single System ............................................................................................ 1-2
Interswitched System ................................................................................. 1-4
Multi-Node System..................................................................................... 1-6
Dual Radar – Single System ...................................................................... 1-7
Dual Radar – Interswitched System .......................................................... 1-8
Product Types ............................................................................................ 1-9
Applicable Features .............................................................................. 1-9
Features common to all Product Types .............................................. 1-10
Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and
CAT 2 Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar ................................................. 1-13
Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C) ..... 1-14
Dual Radar Features ............................................................................... 1-15
Total Watch .............................................................................................. 1-16
Information on Sensor Inputs to the System ........................................... 1-17
Compass Input .................................................................................... 1-17
Log Input ............................................................................................. 1-17
Position Input ...................................................................................... 1-17

Chapter 2 Getting Started with Radar
System Controls......................................................................................... 2-2
Control Panel ........................................................................................ 2-2
Monitor Controls ................................................................................... 2-4
Power On/Off ........................................................................................ 2-4
System Start-Up......................................................................................... 2-5
Switching on the System ...................................................................... 2-5
Starting up the System at a Low Temperature ..................................... 2-6
Software Start-Up ................................................................................. 2-7
Setup Procedures ................................................................................. 2-8
System Security ......................................................................................... 2-9

65900010 vii

..........2-13 Online Help ...............................................................................2-11 Standby/Transmit Mode in Dual Radar ...................2-15 On-Screen Keyboard ..............................................................................................................................................3-2 Returning to Standby Mode .................................................................................................2-19 Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Radar Selecting Transmit Mode ........................2-13 Cursor Graphics ..............................................................3-15 Readout ...........................................................................................................................................3-6 Sub Menu Selection and Navigation Bar .....3-7 Cursor Readout .....................................................................................................................................................................................Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Standby Mode .........................................3-7 Navigating to previous sub menus..............2-11 Screen Layout for Widescreen Display ........................................................................................................................................................2-10 Transmit Mode .....................................................................3-16 Stabilisation Options ......................................................3-3 Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode Selection .....................................................3-4 Video On/Off Control .........................................3-14 Sensor Data Display ...............................2-12 Using the Cursor .3-4 Selecting Transmit Mode ................................................................2-18 System Shut Down ........................................................3-10 Range Scales ..........................................3-4 Status Area ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-5 Accessing Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions.................................................2-15 Accessing the Help Guide .....................................................................................3-15 Data Source ..............................................................3-15 Caption .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-13 Range Rings .......................................................................................2-16 Accessing Tool Tips ...........................................................2-17 Operator Messages ..........2-18 Operator Messages .................................................................................................................3-16 viii 65900010 ......2-18 Action Required Messages .....................................................................................................................................................................2-15 Accessing Context Sensitive Help ..............3-8 Position ....................3-16 Multi-node System ...........

............................................................................................................................................................Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents Off Centre..................................... Beam Line and Stern Line ............................................ 3-27 Dual Radar Interswitch Settings ......... 3-17 Panning ............................ 3-21 Centring the Video Display ................. 3-31 Enhanced Video Mode ................................................................................................ 3-28 Radar Transmission Pulse Length on Dual Radar ............. Pan and Goto ........ 3-26 Radar Settings ............................................................. 3-27 Radar Transmission Pulse Length............................................................................................................................................... 3-22 Own Ship Symbols................................................... 3-36 Synthetics Button ............... 3-21 Positioning the picture for Maximum View.. 3-35 Manual Fine Tuning Adjustment .............................. 3-21 Heading Line..................................................................... 3-38 Delay Countdown ................................................. 3-24 Minimised Symbol ....................................................................................................................... 3-24 Custom Symbol ... 3-18 Goto ........... 3-36 Radar Fine Tuning on a Dual Radar ........ 3-40 Trial Manoeuvre Vector ...................................................... 3-31 Manually Adjusting Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls ........................... 3-24 Outline Symbol ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-37 Coast Button ........................................................................................................................... 3-40 Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre ........................................................ 3-30 Video Processing Controls ........................ 3-29 AIS Input and Filter Button .............................................................................. 3-34 Radar Fine Tuning .. 3-30 CPA Button ........................................................................................................... 3-25 Predicted Vector .................................................... 3-33 Dual Radar Video Processing Controls ....................................................... 3-41 Trial CPA and TCPA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-17 Off Centring Own Ship ................................................................. 3-19 Centre & Maximum View Options .... 3-37 Trial Manoeuvre ...................... 3-25 Own Ship Vector ................................. 3-40 Display of Vectors .......................................................................................................... 3-41 65900010 ix ........................................................................ 3-38 Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters .................................. 3-28 Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database Selection ................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................4-5 SOG Source Values............................................................................................................................................................................................................... Motion.......5-6 True Motion ......................................4-13 Date and Time ......................... A-2 Database Synchronization ............................Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Watch Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3-46 Double Ended Ferry ..5-5 Channel 1 Video Origin .................................5-8 x 65900010 ...........5-6 Motion Mode Changing Automatically .5-5 Suppression of Channel 2 Video ..................................4-1 Sensor Data Source.............................................4-6 Position Values ................................................................................4-13 Chapter 5 Presentation...................................4-13 Wind Values .................................................................................................................................................5-6 Relative Motion ...5-6 Vector Modes ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ A-3 Chapter 4 Sensor Management Sensors Menu .......................................5-5 Motion Modes....................................3-42 Total Watch Features .....................................................................................4-3 Heading Source Values ...........5-2 Dual Radar Presentation.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................4-7 Depth Source Values .............................................................3-43 Safety Checking .........................4-2 Sensor Data Sources .......................................................... A-1 Automatic Transfer of Control ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................3-46 Autopilot Interface ...................................4-11 Rate of Turn Values ........................................4-11 Set and Drift Values ...........................................................................3-44 Multi-node Support.................................................................................................... Vector and Trail Modes Presentation Modes .....................................4-3 STW Source Values....3-47 Appendix A Operational Functions in a Multi-node System Station In Control .................................................................................................4-4 COG Source Values ...........................

............................ 6-2 Multi-node Support ................................... 6-6 Display Parallel Index Lines ....................................................... 6-24 Exporting Objects ............. 6-26 Creating LOPs ............................... 6-10 Multi-Node Support .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-13 Create Radar Maps ................................... 6-3 Adding PI Lines or deleting Sets ................................. 6-5 Editing PI Lines ................ 6-10 Maps .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-22 Importing and Exporting Objects ................................... 6-25 Multi-node Support ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-22 Displayed Maps and Types .......................................................................................................................... 6-3 Creating a new set of PI Lines ............................................. 6-30 Using a LOP Position Sensor ............ 6-24 Importing Objects. 6-13 Viewing and Editing Radar Maps ................................................................................ 5-12 Chapter 6 Navigation Tools Parallel Index Lines Description ........................ 6-10 Mapping ....................................................... 5-11 Trail Length Time ...... 6-4 Copying or Renaming PI Line Sets ..................................................... 6-25 Line of Position ....... 6-22 Radar Map Offset .................. 6-2 Edit Parallel Index Lines ......................................... 6-9 Mapping Features .................................................................................................... 6-26 LOP Fixes ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-11 Editing Maps ...................... 6-31 History Tracks ................................................................................. 6-32 Primary History Track ....................Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents Selecting the Vector Mode......................................................................... 6-32 65900010 xi ..................................................... 6-8 Importing and Exporting PI Lines.............................................. 6-21 Maps Display Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-10 Trails Mode .. 6-28 Editing LOPs ............................................................................................................................................... 5-8 Vector Time ......................................................................... 6-18 Deleting Radar Maps ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................6-49 Status ....................................................................................7-9 Permanent prompts ..........7-6 Alarm Buzzer............................................................................7-9 Temporary Prompts .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6-35 Display Settings Features ...............6-55 Chapter 7 Alarms Alarm Announcements ...................................................................................7-12 List of Alarms.....................................................................................................................6-43 Anchoring .......................................................................................................................................................................................6-53 Navigation Marks .......................7-9 Prompts Window ..................6-51 Man Overboard ..........................................................7-7 Alarms on a Multi-node System ..............................................7-8 Prompts ........................6-42 Grid ......7-4 Alarm Display .......................................................................................................................................7-6 Sort by Group.........................................................................................................7-6 Hide Acknowledged ...........................................................................................................................................6-37 Next Turn EBL ..................................................6-37 Ownship ....7-11 Picture Freeze .............6-44 Anchoring Description ...........7-10 Central Alarm Management ...................................................................................................................................................................7-13 xii 65900010 ......................................................7-2 Announcement Sources ............................................................................................................................................................................Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Secondary History Tracks ......................................................................................................................................................................................6-34 Parallel Cursor ............................................................................................6-33 Event Marks ..........7-9 Mute Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................7-3 Alarm Status.......7-1 Prompts ....... Warnings and Cautions ..........................................................................................................................................7-2 Alarm Status Indicator .....6-44 Anchoring Planning ...........................6-45 Display ......7-5 Viewing Announcement Details ...................6-37 Display Settings ..............................................................................................................

............................. 8-55 Importing and Exporting a Route .... 8-41 Monitoring Speed Planning .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-15 Dangers ................................................... 8-57 65900010 xiii ................. 8-29 Route ................................................ 8-5 Adding a Waypoint............. 8-50 Creating SAR Patterns ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-10 Waypoints Tab Folder...... 8-48 Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route ............................................................................ 8-9 Route Tab Folder ....................................................... 8-35 Critical Points .................................................................... 8-46 Temporary Route Plans ............. 8-40 Speed Planning............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-47 Creating and Editing a Temporary Route .......................................................................................................................................... 8-22 Route Editor Table ........... 8-49 Search and Rescue ............... 8-56 Importing Routes .............................................................................................. 8-9 Edit Route ... 8-4 Creating a Route ....................................... 8-41 Speed Planning Setup ............................................................................ 8-20 Critical Points .................................................................................................................... 8-51 External Routes ............ 8-47 Monitoring a Temporary Route ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-56 Exporting Routes .................................................................. 8-8 Editing a Route ......................... 8-54 Multi-node Support .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8 Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius ................................................................... 8-36 ETA Calculator ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-30 Dangers .................................................. 8-25 Monitoring a Route.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents Chapter 8 Routes Routes .................................. 8-5 Changing a Waypoint's Position ......................................................... 8-37 Route ETA .............. 8-3 Multi-node Support .............. 8-39 Required Speed ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-29 Monitor Route ..................... 8-7 Delete a Waypoint .........................................................................................................

...................................................................................10-3 Tracked Targets Capacity ........................10-8 AIS Target Alarm States ...10-5 AIS Rendering Conditions ..............................................10-19 Multiple Targets ................................................................10-3 Tracking Targets on a Dual Radar System .10-5 AIS Target Display Capacity .............................................................................................................................................................9-3 Changing the EBL Bearing ...................................................................................................................................9-7 Chapter 10 Targets Tracking Targets ............10-10 Lost Target .......................10-8 Multi-Node Support for AIS Targets.............................9-2 Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) .................................................................10-4 AIS Targets ......8-58 Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs) ..............................................................10-10 Target Monitoring Symbols ......................................................................................................................................10-20 Automatic Sorting of Targets ............................................................................................10-17 AIS Info ...........................10-16 Selected Target....................................................10-7 Active AIS Target Capacity ...................10-5 AIS Target States..........................................................9-4 Variable Range Marker (VRM)...............................................................................................................................................9-3 Changing the EBL Position .................................................................................................................................................................................................................10-10 CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions ......10-2 Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System ...............9-1 Off-Centring......................................................10-16 Target Data ............................Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Route Display Settings .............................10-21 Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets .............................................................................................................10-21 Selecting Targets for the User Folder ..............................9-6 Changing the VRM and EBL range .....................................10-11 Multi-Node Support ................................................................................................................................10-9 Target Monitoring .....9-6 Changing the VRM and EBL position ................................................... Carrying and Dropping an ERBL .......................................10-13 Selected Target Functions ......10-12 Echo Reference Target ..........................................................................................10-21 xiv 65900010 ............................................................................................................................................................

.................. 10-43 Closest Point of Approach & Bow Crossing Limits .............................................................................. 10-24 Other Target Display Functions ................................... 10-28 AIS Display .......................................................... 10-23 Past Position Dots .................................. 10-30 Target Count All Nodes ........................ 10-30 Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping ........ 10-27 Target Repair ......................................................................................................... 10-33 Using Test Targets ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-44 Collision Avoidance Criteria .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-22 Target Display ................. 10-38 Polygonal Acquisition Zones ................................. 10-23 Number of Targets .............. 10-41 Own Ship ....................................................................................... 10-23 Other .......................................................... 10-42 Limits and Settings...... 10-44 Lost Target Alarms .................................. 10-39 Own Ship AIS.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-34 Using Test Targets as a Training Exercise.................................................. 10-41 Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-37 Annular Acquisition Zones ..................... 10-31 Test Targets ..................... 10-46 65900010 xv ..................................................................... 10-23 Cancel All Targets ..............Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents Target Display ......................... 10-32 Moveable Test Targets .................................................................................................................................. 10-25 Cancelling Tracked Targets ....................................................................................................... 10-29 Filter Settings ........................ 10-29 AIS Input ........................ 10-23 Past Position Dots ............................... 10-29 Other ....................................................... 10-45 PADs .............................. 10-32 Fixed Test Targets ................................................... 10-22 Identification ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-35 Test Targets on Dual Radar ....................................................... 10-36 Acquisition Zones............................................................................................... 10-43 Target Association ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................11-5 Request for Display..................................................................................11-4 Interswitch .........................11-2 Pulse Length .............................................................................................................................12-3 Chart Overscale .....................................................................................................................................................................11-7 Communications Alarms ......................................................................................................................12-5 Chart Tools.........................................12-6 Tool Functions .........................................................................................................................................................................................................12-14 xvi 65900010 .12-12 Chart Permissions..........................................................................................................................................................12-2 Chart Types .......................12-7 Chart Match ..........................11-6 Radar Alarms ......................................................................................................................................11-3 Video ....................Transceiver ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................12-10 Chart Copy .............12-8 Installing VPF Charts ....................................................................11-7 Transceiver Alarms ........12-5 Chart One Presentation Library ................Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chapter 11 Radar Transceiver .............................................................................................11-7 Video Alarms..............................................................................11-4 Dual Radar – Video ..............................11-8 Sector Blanking ..........12-3 Factors affecting Chart Accuracy...............12-2 Chart Data on a Radar Display ..............................................11-5 Dual Radar – Interswitch...........................12-1 About Charts ...............................................................................................................................11-3 Tune ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................11-5 Status ..............................................................................................11-2 Operational Mode ..............................................................12-12 Chart Copy ...............................................12-2 Chart Rendering.......................................................................11-9 Sector Blanking on Dual Radar ..........................................................12-7 Chart Updates Summary .........................................11-3 Dual Radar ............................................................12-4 Larger Scale Available Prompt ...................................................................................11-9 Chapter 12 Charts Accessing Charts Menus .....................................................

............................................................................................................................... 12-30 Supported Chart Engines and Databases ................................ 12-56 Color Diagram ......................................................... 12-38 Create and Modify Chart Updates .............. 12-32 Legend Detail ...... 12-46 Chart Query ........ 12-28 Safety Depth and Height................Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents Chart Index ......................................................................... 12-29 Chart Databases .................................................... 12-32 Legend Select ................................................................................................ 12-51 Chart Dangers ..................................... 12-29 Changing Chart Depth/Height Values .......................................................................................................... 12-32 Legend Updates ............................................................ 12-36 Multi-node Support ..................................... 12-36 Manual Chart Update Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12-27 Chart Depths/Heights ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-49 Query Options ........................................... 12-31 Chart Legend ................................... 12-38 Display Chart Updates ................................................................................................... 12-19 Features .. 12-35 Manual Chart Update .. 12-17 Chart Settings .............................. 12-28 Shallow and Deep Contours .......................................................... 12-45 Importing or Exporting Chart Updates . 12-19 Chart Display Suppression .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-30 Enabling and Disabling Chart Databases .............................................................................. 12-37 Chart Layers ................. 12-48 Query Features .. 12-56 Chart 1 Catalog ...................................... 12-53 Danger Settings ................................................................................................................ 12-31 Official and Unofficial Chart Data ..................................... 12-54 Chart 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 12-52 Chart Dangers Information .................................... 12-49 Query Results .... 12-57 65900010 xvii ................................. 12-20 Symbology ................................................ 12-22 Chart Projections ........................................................................................................ 12-37 Edit Chart Update ..............................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................14-12 DataLog ................................................................................................14-9 Diagnostics ................................................Selection ............13-2 Multi-node Settings ....14-10 Report ......................14-5 View/Edit Profile .......................13-5 Chapter 14 System User Profiles...............................................................................................................................................................14-2 Create New Profile ...................13-2 Brilliance Groups .........................................................................................................................................................................13-3 Chart Symbols .....................14-30 Local Offset ..14-21 Database ........................................................................................14-3 Available Profiles ..............................................................13-1 Day and Night Modes ...................................................................................14-8 Diagnostic Functions .............Table Of Contents Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Appendix A Chart Datum Codes Chapter 13 Brilliance Brilliance Menu .....................14-15 Sensor Status .............................................................................................................14-2 Multi-Node Functionality ...............................................................................................................................Editing ..............14-5 View/Edit Profile .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-32 xviii 65900010 .....14-31 NAVTEX .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-21 Dual Radar – Diagnostic Functions ............................................................................................................................................14-24 Characteristics .........................................................................14-15 DataLog .......14-26 Service ...................................................................................................14-18 Connection Status..................................14-4 View/Edit Profiles .........................14-7 Options ......................................................14-19 Buzzer ...............................................13-4 Brightness Check ...............................14-9 Performance Monitor ...........14-22 Commissioning ......................................................14-27 Dual Radar – Commissioning Functions .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14-23 Authorization ..................

................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-32 NAVTEX Server .......................................... B-5 Target Based Range and Bearing ........................ A-3 Anti-clutter Rain Control........................................................................Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Table Of Contents NAVTEX Client ................................................................................................................................................................ A-2 Radar Bandwidth ......................................................... B-2 Features specific to a Static Site ............................................ B-2 Static Heading.................................................................................... A-4 Annex B Static Site Static Site Description ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... B-1 Static Site Features.......................................................................................................................... B-6 Glossary 65900010 xix ............................... B-4 Target Anchor Watch ........................... A-2 SART Range Errors .. A-1 Radar Range Scale ................. 14-34 Shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... A-3 Anti-Clutter Sea Control ............. 14-33 Weather Fax ......................................................................... 14-35 Annex A Search and Rescue Detection Introduction .......... B-3 Static Position ......... A-3 Detuning the Radar....................................................................... A-2 Radar Side Lobes ........................................................................................................................................... B-2 Features not available to a Static Site .................................................................. A-3 Video Gain .................................................................

.

antenna and turning unit (collectively known as a Scanner Unit). Navigation sensors provide data inputs to the console. • An interswitched system. • An interswitched system. where consoles. 65900010 1-1 . see Multi-Node System. Radar video and other radar/chart radar functionality is displayed on the console monitor. configured to specific product types. with a combination of dual radars and single radars. comprising one console connected to a transceiver. with each console connected via an Interswitch to separate Scanner Units. see Dual Radar Single System. • A multi-node system. see Interswitched System.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Chapter 1 Overview Hardware Configurations The VisionMaster FT system can be one of the following hardware configurations: • A single node system. see Dual Radar Interswitched System. see Single System. connected via a six way Interswitch to Scanner Units. and optional remote monitors can provide additional slave displays at any required location. are connected via a LAN. Traditional bridge equipment and most navigation sensors can be interfaced to the system. comprising one console connected to two Scanner Units. • A single node dual radar system.

Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Single System 1-2 65900010 .

There are two types of control panel: Basic and Enhanced. Console Assembly . Performance Monitor. The basic control panel only includes a trackball with left and right keys.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview 1 Scanner Assembly . Masthead (mounted as an integral part of the Scanner assembly) or Bulkhead (mounted as a separate unit below decks). If the system uses a bulkhead transceiver then the transceiver unit is not included in the Scanner assembly. 1 A Scanner assembly may also be referred to as a `Top Unit'. outputs data to the processor unit.supplied as a standalone 250 tabletop and 340 tabletop/deck mounted console (including pedestal). where the Monitor. The console assembly may also be supplied as a 19" Integrated Tabletop. includes a flat panel monitor Control Panel .a single PC running Windows XP operating system. Comprises an Antenna unit. The enhanced control panel includes the following additional group of controls: Rotary controls and Adjustment & Acknowledgement buttons. Transceiver. or a kit version for installation into an existing console suite. the performance Monitor Antenna is mounted on the Turning Unit. 6 or 8 ft aperture). Antenna Unit. The 250/340 console assembly includes the following modules: Input/Output (PCIO) Unit . Processor Unit . PCIO. If the system includes an integral transceiver then this also forms part of the Scanner Assembly.receives data inputs from the transceiver and external sensors. 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X-band (4. 65900010 1-3 . Processor and control panel are all contained in a single mechanical housing. a Turning unit and an optional Performance Monitor. Display Unit. Scanner Control Unit – for switching the scanner on and off – are supplied for S-band radars only. If fitted.

and can be selected as the master display. plus additional scanners and display configurations. two transceivers (A and B) with a two-way interswitch unit connected to two consoles. single-scanner/single-console configuration can be expanded by the introduction of an Interswitch Unit.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Interswitched System The basic. or as a slave display. The arrangement below shows two scanners (S band or X band). A 6-way interswitch unit is available for systems with a maximum of six scanners and six consoles. A console can be connected via the interswitch to any one of the scanner units. 1-4 65900010 .

65900010 1-5 . The controls available at a master display but NOT at a slave display are as follows: • switching the transceiver between standby and transmit mode • selection of transmission pulse-length • tuning the transceiver • selecting Manual or AFC mode for tuning • tuning the performance monitor.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview A console selected as a master display has full control of the connected scanner.

Each console is linked via a LAN so that data input to one console is available to all. Consoles providing radar video data will be connected via the interswitch to one or more scanner units. or as a slave display.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Multi-Node System A multi-node system may include a number of consoles which have been configured as specific product types. see Watch Mode. 1-6 65900010 . and can be selected as the master display.

Each radar video source is known as a `Channel’. enabling the overlay of radar video from both scanners to form rm a composite display. A dual radar system includes an additional scan converter card ard and an auxiliary PCIO unit. see Duall Radar R Features 65900010 1-7 . For an overview on features specific to dual radar.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Dual Radar – Single System A dual radar system can connect to two scanner units at the same sa time.

1-8 65900010 . The figure below shows two dual channel displays with two standndard displays. The Master/Slave status of all display radar channels. or as a Slave radar channel if another display radar chan annel has been selected as the Master. A scanner unit can be selected from its associated display as a Master radar channel for controlli lling that scanner.Overview Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Dual Radar – Interswitched System On an interswitched system a display radar channel can be assoc ociated with any one of the scanner units in the system. connected to a 6-Way Interswitch unit. and their specific sp scanner couplings. can be monitored from any display unit in thee system.

see page 1-10. 25.Static Site. If your system is a stationary installation. For information on the Static Site system refer to Annex B . In addition to the CAT1/CAT2 Radar/Chart Radar variants. • Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and CAT 2 Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar. 25.5” 100 CAT 1 Chart Radar CAT1C or 27” CAT 2 Radar CAT2 19” 60 Enhanced CAT 2 Radar CAT2 19” 100 Enhanced CAT 2 Chart Radar CAT2C 19” 100 High speed craft variants for each of the above products are available and will include a suffix H (for example CAT1H).5” 100 CAT 1 Radar CAT1 or 27” 23”. the VisionMaster product will be configured as a Static Site. Chart Radar to ECDIS). see page 1-13. number of Product Type tracked targets 23”.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Product Types The following table lists the VisionMaster FT Radar and Chart Radar product types available: Monitor Max. • Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C). 65900010 1-9 . see page 1-14. for example. Applicable Features The features applicable to the product types listed above are given in the following tables: • Features common to all Product Types. the following product types are available:  ECDIS (with or without radar overlay)  Conning Info Display  Central Alarm Management (CAM)  Total Watch (a multi-function workstation that enables switching between watch modes.

Defining and displaying Waypoint data. Selection of motion mode Relative Motion (RM) or True Motion (TM). Ring interval dependent on Range Rings scale.125 to 96 Range rings on or off. Scale selection Range scale in nautical miles from 0. Feature Additional details Selection and set up. Selection of water or ground stabilisation Selection of Sensor Selection of sensor source for data type (heading. Video gain.) Selection of presentation North-up or Course-up (stabilised) mode Head-up (unstabilised). user specified data Wind and depth data. Selection of vector mode Selection of vector time.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Features common to all Product Types The following table lists the features which are common to all VisionMaster radar/chart radar product types listed in the `Product Types’ table. Centring and off-centring (max view) the picture. Picture brilliance (day/night selection). Own ship’s position. Compass alignment. Enhanced video mode. Transceiver control Manual/automatic tuning. 1-10 65900010 . Ship’s heading and speed Selection of speed mode (through water or over display ground). Brightness check Display controls Displaying/hiding heading line and synthetics. Video processing controls Manual/automatic anti-clutter sea/rain control. Selection of true (T) or relative (R) vectors. position etc. Source STW.

System tools Enables optional features such as NAVTEX and Weather Fax to be displayed. warnings and cautions. Vector Tick marks. Selection of Display Display of own ship display settings. VRMS & ERBLs Each EBL/VRM pair can be displayed as a combined ERBL – ERBL 1 and/or ERBL 2. edit or delete objects and assign mapping objects to defined groups. edit and delete different types of Navigation Tools commissioned navigation tools. Displaying the current unacknowledged alarm with highest priority. Create. Watch alarm facility.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Feature Additional details Selection of True or Relative Trails True and Relative Trails Selection of different types of trail modes. Enables targets to be selected. Monitor and display internal. external and Routes facilities temporary route data. Extensive alarm and Facility for acknowledging alarms. Alarm buzzer facility. Defining and displaying Two variable range markers – VRM 1 & VRM 2. Define system time and set a time zone offset Display information on unit groups. warning indications Display list of alarms. Two electronic bearing lines – EBL 1 & EBL 2. Beam Line. Import or export route plans Create. including local targets and Target facilities AIS targets. Provides different types of target alarm states. including: Settings True Scale Ship. export and display specific mapping Mapping Facilities object symbols. EBLs. 65900010 1-11 . Import. tracked and information displayed. Position as derived from navigational sensors or Navigation facilities an estimated position.

Test the Alarm buzzer. Warnings and Cautions are displayed in Alarm Announcements a status indicator Temporary and Both Temporary and Permanent prompts are Permanent prompts displayed below alarms. Enables user login. View Datalog files and export the datalog as a zip Diagnostic facilities file. test facilities Monitor the performance of the system or the receiver Generate a report and export the report file. View the status of the sensor data from the sensor source. Online Help Guide. 1-12 65900010 . Help facility Context sensitive Help.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Feature Additional details Extensive monitoring and Built in self tests (BIST). Commissioning facilities Display of TxRx settings. Video and Authorization information Alarms.

Enables VisionMaster data to be recorded and viewed as Visual Playback a series of one second screen captures. When MOB Man Overboard is active. See Optional Features User Guide 65900014. apply. These are bearing lines or range lines used to Clearing Lines approximate a position where a danger lies. which are available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and enhanced CAT 2 Radar/Chart Radar product types. See (Nav Objects) Optional Features User Guide 65900014. view User profiles and update profiles that contain node specific chart. delete. route. Patterns 65900010 1-13 . save. Enables management of a MOB emergency. based on Trial Manoeuvre rate of turn for own ship. Feature Additional details Allows the effect of a proposed manoeuvre. SAR patterns may also be edited.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Features available to CAT 1 Radar/Chart Radar and CAT 2 Enhanced Radar/Chart Radar The following table lists additional features to those listed in the previous table. and monitor anchor drag after the ship is anchored. speed and distance between waypoints on a monitored route. a symbol is displayed representing the man in the water. Predicted Areas of PADs are outlines marking an area that will generate a Danger (PAD) CPA violation by a tracked target or active AIS target. Route Planning Creating and editing user-defined routes ETA calculator Calculates the time. Anchoring control the anchorage parameters. Display of Predicted Ship and Predicted Path for own Display Settings ship. Search and SAR patterns are specialized routes that can be used to Rescue (SAR) patrol a given area. Next Turn EBL and LAT/LON Grid Allows an anchorage to be planned and monitored. Enables the operator to create. to be displayed. and other display settings.

Charts facilities Chart sets can be customised and manually updated by the operator. with the exception of Coast button the coast outline. 1-14 65900010 . which are available to CAT 1 and enhanced CAT 2 Chart Radar product types. Feature Additional details Enables vector charts installed from an installer facility to be displayed within the video circle.displays chart presentation showing land and sea as the same colour with land outline only shown. such as SENC Colour Diagram coastlines. the `normal bow’ at the front Double Ended of the ship and the ‘alternate bow’. Suppresses all synthetics.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Feature Additional details Allows two bows to be used. The Charts button enables the following selections: • Chart Filled . Ensures any adjustments made to brightness and contrast settings will enable SENC data. • Chart Unfilled . These features are available on the Chart Radar watch mode of a Total Watch system. Features available to Chart Radar (CAT1C & Enhanced CAT2C) The following table lists the additional features to those listed in the previous two tables. safety contour and other objects to be adequately displayed.displays chart presentation with Chart Presentation button land and sea shown as different colours. usually at the rear of Ferry the ship.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Dual Radar Features The following specific features are available if your VisionMaster FT system is configured as dual channel radar: • Targets can be tracked on one channel through the blind arc of the other channel. • Enable test targets to be controlled on channel 1. • Displays origin symbol for Channel 1. 65900010 1-15 . The following specific Transceiver features are available: • Independent display of transceiver video. • Individual Video Display On/Off control. or an X and S band may be superimposed. channel 2 or both. • Output of targets on the Track Table Output irrespective of the channel they are being tracked on. • Both scanner units may be X band or S band. • Individual control of the other video related parameters (e.g. • Individual control of the Standby/Transmit status of each transceiver. Gain and clutter controls).

in addition to the Radar/Chart Radar variants. 65900012. the following product types may be available from the Watch Mode button: • Chart Radar • ECDIS • Playback • Conning Info Display • Central Alarm Management The availability of the presentation options listed above is dependent on the product type and security device installed at initialisation. This User Guide describes the Radar/Chart Radar product type. The Central Alarm Management (CAM) presentation option is described in Chapter 7 Alarms.Overview Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Total Watch If your VisionMaster FT system is configured as a Total Watch. For information on the ECDIS product type. refer to the VisionMaster ECDIS User's Guide. refer to Optional Features User Guide. see System Security. `Central Alarm Management’. For information on Playback and Conning Info Display. 65900014. 1-16 65900010 .

112(73) and MSC. Additionally. there are areas of the world where coverage is limited and these areas may cause inaccuracies on the tracking and positioning data. Any limitations associated with the method of sensor input are stated below.114(73). For example. tides and currents. re-constituting serial data as analogue data via a converter is inferior to using the serial data direct. 23. a ground speed log may have inaccuracies in deep waters. if a single axis log is used it will not take into account transverse effects due to leeway. Log Input The speed log input used must be compliant to IMO resolution A 824(19). depending on the actual depth of the sea. When a ground speed log is in use. However. If serial input data at 4800 baud rate. in Relative trails the data is not affected. 25. To function correctly the system requires sensor input from external devices. 65900010 1-17 . Position Input The EFPS connected to the system must be compliant with IMO resolution MSC. The accuracy of tracked target trails and vector data using a single axis log is only degraded when in True trails.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overview Information on Sensor Inputs to the System The VisionMaster Radar system is Type Approved using 19".5" and 27" displays with X-Band and S-Band top units. The primary compass data should be used in all circumstances. using both longitudinal and transverse data if available from the log. true video trails and target tracking data will be ground stabilised. When a water speed log is in use true video trails and target tracking data will be water stabilised. However.1". or a lower message update rate is used then the tracking data will be compromised. If an analogue input is unavailable then a serial input may be used with data conforming to IEC 61162-2 at 38400 baud rate and a message update rate of approximately 50Hz. using both longitudinal and transverse data if available from the log. Compass Input The approved method of compass input is via an analogue input. either through a Synchro or Stepper motor interface. The magnitude of these effects will depend on their strength and direction.

.

The following topics are covered: • Switching on and starting up the radar • a description of the radar controls • a description of System Security • a description of Standby Mode and Transmit Mode • various types of screen cursor • using Online Help • Accessing Tool Tips • Operator Messages • shutting down the system 65900010 2-1 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar Chapter 2 Getting Started with Radar This section shows you how to start up the system and how to use the controls.

monitor controls and a power On/Off switch.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar System Controls The operator controls the VisionMaster FT system via a control panel assembly. Control Panel The Control Panel consists of the following group of controls:  Trackball assembly  Rotary controls  Adjustment and Acknowledgement buttons. 2-2 65900010 .

instructions to ‘left click’ or ‘right click’ relate to a press-and-release of either the left key or right key. Turning the control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the EBL1 bearing. 65900010 2-3 . see Range Scales.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Trackball Assembly The trackball assembly comprises a trackball and two associated keys (left and right).  The SEA control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting. Turning the control in a clockwise or anti-clockwise direction adjusts the VRM range. see Variable Range Marker (VRM) Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines. see Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) in Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines. The BRILL (brilliance) buttons change the day/night modes by one level. Pressing the ACK ALARM button acknowledges the currently displayed alarm announcement.  The GAIN control adjusts the video gain setting for the currently selected anti-clutter mode.  Turning the VRM control automatically switches on VRM1. The trackball controls the position of the screen cursor. Rotary Controls The rotary controls include the following:  Turning the EBL control automatically switches on EBL1. see Video in Chapter 11 Radar.  The RAIN control adjusts the anti-clutter rain setting. Throughout this manual. see Day and Night Modes in Chapter 13 Brilliance. Adjustment and Acknowledgement Buttons The RANGE buttons increase or decrease the currently selected range scale by one level. see Alarm Status Indicator in Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Radar. see Video in Chapter 11 Radar. Selections are made by positioning the cursor over a menu caption or control button on the video circle and clicking (press and release) on the left key. see Video in Chapter 11 Radar. The right key is used to provide additional functionality such as accessing drop down menus applicable to the function.

VisionMaster Ships Manual Volume 1 (65900011V1). Monitor On Screen Display Controls The monitors used in VisionMaster systems include On-Screen D Display (OSD) controls. The On/Off button controls the monitor only. Under normal circumstances the OSD controls should not require ire operator adjustment. The system must be powered down as described in System Shutd utdown.2 `Monitor Unit’. WARNING! The use of the monitor brightness control may inhibit inh visibility at night. it does NOT controlol tthe radar system. This indexed position sets the default brightness and calibrated c operation. Power On/Off The radar system is switched on at the Power On/Off switch locat ated on the underside of the control panel. Do NOT switch the power off until the system has fully powered down wn. The brightness adjustment control has an indexed position. 2-4 65900010 . including the image position. These controls enable access and adjustments to be made to monitor settings. However.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started ed with Radar Monitor Controls The monitor controls include an On/Off button and a brightness adjustment a button. see System Start-Up. The OSD functionality available may vary dependent on the type e of monitor your system uses. marke rked as a white line. in Chapter 4 `Fault Reeporting and First Line Servicing’. if information on the monitor OSD controls ls is required refer to section 2. scaling and imagage quality.

When this switch is turned On n the t system powers up. To start up the system press the On/Off rocker switch. located ed on the underside of the control panel. CAUTION: When starting up the system always leave at least le one minute after the system has powered down befefore switching the On/Off switch to On. the software re automatically establishes communication with other workstations that may already a be running. as the system is started. In a multi-node system.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Ra adar User Guide System Start-Up Switching on the System The VisionMaster workstation is designed such that one switchitch at the workstation typically applies power to that workstation’s compuputer and monitor. The On/Off switch is the only system control accessib sible to the operator. 65900010 2-5 .

If the motherboard shuts down as a consequence ce of BIOS Flashing `Last State' settings the system will be forced to rebo boot. The status of the hard disk is in indicated on the upper LED at the front of the Processor un nit and is detailed in the table below. CAUTION: The warm up sequence of the hard disk drive may ay take up to 30 minutes. the Processor unit measures the temperature of its hard disk drive to determine if it is ready for ope peration.5ºC and d + 5º C  5Hz: HDD temperature is below + 5º C The system is monitored for 10 seconds to ensure va valid power Green up.5º C  2.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started ed with Radar Starting up the System at a Low Temperature When the system is switched on. Green The system is powered up Red The system is in Standby mode 2-6 65900010 . If the temperature is acceptable the system powers up. If the temperature is too low the power up sequence is delayed whilew the hard disk drive is heated to an acceptable temperature (as define ned in the table below). Red Flashing  1.25Hz: HDD temperature is below . c The LEDs can be viewed by looking towards the left side of the Proces cessor.5Hz: HDD temperature is between . Processor Unit System Indicators Upper LED Indication Description Off Power is removed from the system Power up sequence is delayed while the hard disk dr drive (HHD) is heated. open the flap on the front housing g cover. The lower LED indicate ates hard disk activity To view the Processor status.

In a multi-node system the dongle will also contain security data which defines the number of nodes in the system with each product type (e. On start-up. 65900010 2-7 .Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Software Start-Up Each VisionMaster workstation is equipped with a device called a Security Block (sometimes called a `dongle') which is attached to a USB port on the PC. Chart Radar or ECDIS) stored in the dongle to the corresponding data in the system configuration file. Soon after the system is powered up the VisionMaster FT Start Up window appears on the screen. For further information. this window shows the current system software version number.g. On start up the system is always in Standby mode. By default the system opens with ownship symbol shown in the centre of the video circle. the system will not be authorized and will run in a degraded state. copyright information and a status bar displaying the system loading status. two Radars. After system initialisation has completed the start up window is replaced by the radar display. the system compares permit codes and the product type identifier (e.g. If the data does not match. see System Security. two Chart Radars and one ECDIS). Starting up the software takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes.

To acknowledge alarms left click on the alarm status indicator. make the following checks:  On the sensor data display at the top left of the screen. SOG (Speed Over Ground). For information on sensor source selection. refer to Sensor Data Display for more information. COG (Course Over Ground). some setup procedures may be necessary. or right click to open the Alarm Display and view information on the alarms. Presentation Motion. Alarms for more information on using the Alarm Display window. with the HDG/STW field block highlighted in water stabilisation and the COG/SOG field block highlighted in ground stabilisation. See Chapter 7. see Sensors Menu Chapter 4 Sensor Management. To verify proper setup. On the video circle. Verify that the desired sensor devices are selected.  The currently active sensor sources for navigation data are indicated to the right of the displayed sensor data. The sensor data display indicates the current stabilisation mode: water stabilised or ground stabilised.  If any alarm conditions are active the Alarm Status Indicator will flash red or amber and the buzzer will sound. and STW (Speed Through Water) should all be green.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar Setup Procedures After the VisionMaster software has loaded. 2-8 65900010 . Red data indicates a loss of valid data from the selected source. the indicators for HDG (Heading). the colour of the Ownship symbol or outline is red if the software determines that the data sources for Position and Heading are not providing valid data (see Chapter 5. Vector and Trail Modes). The current stabilisation mode can be toggled in a field below the motion mode and presentation mode buttons.

a Security Block device must be properly programmed by Sperry Marine and attached to the workstation PC. 65900010 2-9 . The system also compares the allowed number of workstations (nodes). the system will shut down.  If on start-up an invalid system identification code is found in the configuration file. If the number of nodes exceeds the limit set in the Security String an Authorization Failure alarm is given. The following rules govern system security:  In order for the VisionMaster FT to operate effectively. This is true even if the user has obtained a temporary security password. The system will continue to operate but will revert to a degraded state after a period of 7 days. If the Security Block is damaged the operator should contact Sperry Marine to apply for a replacement. to the actual number of nodes in the system.  While the Security Block is broken or detached.  If the Security Block becomes damaged or detached while the VisionMaster FT is running. No grace period is provided. installation of charts is prohibited.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Security System security is maintained by comparing identification codes contained in the Security Block device attached to the VisionMaster PC (see System Start-up) with the codes contained in the software configuration file. an Authorization Failure alarm is given.  On a multi-node system each node has a Security Block attached.

The transceiver identity is displayed in the field above the Standby/Transmit field. Vector and Trails modes  EBL. 2-10 65900010 . If the VisionMaster Transceiver has been previously powered down the Standby/Transmit field displays a warm up count down before Standby is displayed. with own ship's symbol shown centred in the video circle (see Own Ship Symbols). ERBL and VRM settings  Trial Manoeuvre settings  Route Plans  Navigation Tools  Chart settings  System Settings To switch from Standby mode to Transmit mode click on the Standby/Transmit button. In Standby mode you can access the following functions which allow the display to be set up for operation:  Radar Settings  Alarms  Cursor data  Range selection  Range Rings  Chart View  Video Processing Controls (Manual/Auto and Enhance On/Off only)  Sensors Indicator and Sensors menu  Presentation. The Master or Slave caption indicates the type of display.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar Standby Mode After the system has powered up the radar is always in Standby mode. the radar switches to Transmit mode. for information on Transceiver selection see Interswitch Control. The TX/RX n (X) or (S) caption relates to the type of transceiver the system is using. Motion. In Standby mode the video circle displays the message Radar Standby.

65900010 2-11 . go straight to Chapter 3 `Basic Operation of Radar’. For information on Standby and Transmit mode and video On/Off control for a Dual Channel Radar.2. Standby/Transmit Mode in Dual Radar In a dual radar system the transceivers for each channel may be individually switched between Standby and Transmit. it is strongly recommended that you read `System Controls’ on page 2. refer to `Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode Selection’ Chapter 3 `Basic Operation of Radar’.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Transmit Mode The following functions are only available when the radar is in Transmit mode:  Pulse Length  Display and selection of target data  Video Processing Controls (video Gain. The video button for Channel 1 is always on the upper line and Channel 2 is on the lower line. Each channel includes a video indicator button. If you are already familiar with the system controls and want to start transmitting. Rain and Sea anti clutter control)  Radar Fine Tuning If you are not familiar with using the radar system. This describes how to use the external controls in order to operate the system.

All other controls and functions on a widescreen are the same as a standard screen display. refer to Optional Features User Guide.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar Screen Layout for Widescreen Display If your VisionMaster system includes a widescreen. see Chapter 4 ‘Conning Information Display’ in Volume 2 of VisionMaster Ship’s Manual. For information on using the CID. 2-12 65900010 . the area to the left of the main display will be available for CID (Conning Information Display) pages. 65900014. For information on configuring and creating CID pages.

or Add Annotation Mark is selected from Manual Chart Update a ? is added to the cursor. Cursor Graphics When the cursor is over the system control areas and background area of the radar it is displayed as a small white arrow. see Cursor Readout. the letters TMP WYPT appear below the cursor. By default the Cursor window gives cursor range and bearing (from own ship) and cursor latitude/longitude. If an adjustable parameter is selected within a control window. When Select Points is selected from Charts menu the letters CM are added to the cursor. referred to as the screen cursor. see Temporary Route Plans. When a map offset is to be applied graphically. see Routes.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Using the Cursor Whenever the cursor is displayed. When Query On is selected from Chart Query menu. the letters Add appear below the cursor. When a Polygonal acquisition zone is created. As the cursor passes from the control area into the video circle it changes to an orange cross. the cursor changes to the following symbol. see Chart Match. the letters ADD RTP appear below the cursor. the cursor is displayed as a text entry cursor. see Chart Query When a Return Plan is to be added. a dialog box in the bottom right of the display gives a readout of the cursor’s position within the video circle. see Acquisition Zones. see Maps Display Settings When a Temporary Route Plan is created or edited. 65900010 2-13 . referred to as the video cursor.

the letters MO EDIT appear below the cursor. the cursor lines change to diagonal and the letters DEL appear below the cursor. When the range of a Variable Range Marker (VRM) or Parallel Index line is adjusted the cursor changes to the following symbol.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started ed with Radar When a mapping object is created or edited. see Mapping. When the cursor moves over an object to be deleted the letters DEL appear below the cursor. When Delete Radar Maps is selected and the video cursor moves over a mapping object. 2-14 65900010 . When the video cursor moves over an Electronic Range and Bearing Line (ERBL) it changes to the following symbol. see Editing Maps When the iHelp button is selected and the cursor moves over screen functions it changes to the following symbol. When the cursor moves over an Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) or Parallel Index line it changes to the following symbol.

Accessing Context Sensitive Help 1. or by clicking on the Help button in the main menu list. With the cursor displaying the ? icon click on the required function button. and then clicking on the Help sub menu button. This type of help is called "context-sensitive" because it enables the user to quickly access information relevant to the major functions displayed on the VisionMaster FT screen. A context-sensitive help facility is also provided. as described above. the Help information relevant to that function appears in the features area of the screen.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Online Help The VisionMaster FT system includes an online Help Guide that provides information and procedures necessary to operate the system. The online Help Guide appears as a moveable window and can be resized to occupy as much of the screen as required. Click on the iHelp button at the top right of the screen. Accessing the Help Guide The Help Guide can be accessed when the system is in Standby mode by clicking on the Launch Explorer button at the bottom of the Help window. 65900010 2-15 . This window is accessed either via the iHelp button. 2.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar On-Screen Keyboard The Help Guide includes a screen keyboard that allows the operator to enter textual and numerical data. A keyboard window appears below the Help Guide. The keyboard window may be minimised or closed by clicking the respective buttons at the top right of the window. replicating a standard computer keyboard. 2-16 65900010 . To access the keyboard click the On-Screen Keyboard button at the bottom of the VisionMaster Help window.

65900010 2-17 .Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Accessing Tool Tips As the screen cursor moves over the system function buttons the text in the highlighted button changes from white to yellow and a tool tip for that function is briefly displayed in a popup window.

for example. 2-18 65900010 . when switching from Transmit to Standby. the buzzer is sounded briefly to alert the operator to their presence. the system displays the reason for not proceeding with the action and a confirmation (OK) button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Getting Started with Radar Operator Messages The system generates messages that appear in order to either confirm an action to proceed that the operator has requested. Action Required Messages If an Action Required message is confirming an operator action the window will include an OK button and a Cancel button. or if the action is to be cancelled the Cancel button is clicked. If a message is not acknowledged after a period of 30 seconds it is then escalated to an Alarm. The action is confirmed by clicking the OK button. for example to acknowledge a change of own ship's course on a monitored route. All Operator Messages include an Acknowledge button. Operator Messages Operator messages are used to notify the users at all nodes about course changes on a monitored route (see Monitor Route). If the action requested by the operator cannot be done. see Alarm Buzzer. Or a message to confirm an action that the system is about to make. While an Action Required is active the system periodically sounds an audible indicator. When an operator message is displayed. which may be muted by the operator.

select Shutdown System in the System menu (see Shutdown) S and wait for the VisionMaster FT application and the Windows ws operating system to power down. CAUTION: In a multi-node system. 65900010 2-19 . each node may be con nfigured to provide a connection to a sensor device or oth ther peripheral equipment that is also providing dat ata to other nodes on the system. Therefore it is importantnt to change to alternate data sources before shutting down n a node that is providing navigational data to the system tem. To shut down all the nodes on a multi-node system select Shu hutdown All Systems. A prompt appears requesting a confirmation of thee shutdown to be entered.Getting Started with Radar Radar/Chart Ra adar User Guide System Shut Down To shut down a standalone node. CAUTION: Do NOT switch the On/Off switch to Off before re the VisionMaster software has fully powered down n. on the nodes that are still running. and an the colour of data displayed for that sensor will change ch to red. see Shutdown for details. or your particular node on a multi-node system. an alarm is generated. If an active sensor is lost. When the software has fully powered dddown then switch the On/Off switch to off.

.

 Selecting Trial Manoeuvre. 65900010 3-1 .  Selecting the watch mode.  Viewing chart information. The following topics are covered:  Accessing the main menu and sub-menu functions  A description of transmit mode and returning to standby mode.  Safety Checking.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Chapter 3 Basic Operation of Radar This section describes the basic operation of the radar.  Positioning own ship in the video circle.  Own ship's symbol and own ship's vector. via the CPA button  Using the video processing controls.  Setting the AIS target display options.  Autopilot Interface Appendix A describes operational functions specific to a Multi-node system.  Accessing target's Limits and Settings.  Setting the pulse length of radar transmission.  Accessing main menu functions.  Selecting the radar range.  Selecting and changing the Radar settings.

When in Transmit the transmission pulse length button (to the right of the Transmit/Standby button) becomes active (for Master displays). a prompt is displayed and the slave remains in Standby. If Transmit is selected on a slave display when its master radar is still in Standby (NOT transmitting). The sensor devices that have been configured for the system will begin acquiring navigation data to be made available to the operator. In Transmit mode the transceiver starts transmitting radar pulses and the video circle shows own ship's heading line to indicate ship's direction. see Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database Selection.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Selecting Transmit Mode When Transmit is selected from Standby. safety contours and other objects in outline only (Chart Unfilled default mode). the system is switched to Transmit mode. 2. position the screen cursor over the Standby toggle button. The message Radar Standby disappears from the video circle and the toggle button displays Transmit. In a multi-node system switching to Transmit is only possible if the node is selected as a Master Display. see Sensor Management. With the system in Standby. see Heading Line. see Radar Transmission Pulse Length. 3-2 65900010 . Left click to select Transmit. If there is a fault in the transmission of radar video data to the console the video circle shows the message Video Failed. or if the node is a Slave Display and the Master Display is in transmit. If the system is configured for Chart Radar then charts will be displayed with land/sea. To switch to Transmit mode do the following: 1. A slave display can only be switched to Transmit if its associated master display is in Transmit mode.

or to return to Transmit mode click the Cancel button. The screen prompts to confirm the switch to Standby. the system returns to Standby and the text Radar Standby re-appears on the video circle. To confirm click the OK button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Returning to Standby Mode To return to Standby mode left click on the Transmit toggle button. 65900010 3-3 . When the switch to Standby is made the transceiver stops transmission.

and the video display for each transceiver channel switched on and off. the video button is displayed with a red diagonal line through the icon. To switch off the video at channel 1 or channel 2 click on the video button. When video is switched off for a channel and the channel’s transceiver is in Transmit. a confirmation prompt is generated (see Returning to Standby Mode). Video On/Off Control The video for each transceiver channel may be switched on and off independently of the transceiver’s Standby/Transmit status. When either channel is switched to Standby. The message is removed when either channel 2 video re- appears or channel 1 is switched to Transmit. The Standby/Transmit status of each transceiver may be independently selected. 3-4 65900010 . or the video at channel 1 is switched off. If video is switched off at channel 2 (with channel 2 still in Transmit). or the video is automatically suppressed if channel 2 video origin is too far from the centre of the display area. Video will continue to be transmitted via the other channel. If the origin of channel 2 video is automatically suppressed while channel 1 is in Standby the message VIDEO OFF is displayed in red at the bottom of the video circle. Selecting Transmit Mode A dual radar system enables each transceiver to be individually switched from Standby to Transmit and back again.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Dual Radar – Transmit and Video Mode Selection A Dual Radar system allows the overlay of video from two separate transceivers on one display. the video is automatically switched back on if channel 1 is switched to or forced into Standby.

provides summary data on the currently monitored route. for more details see Position. for more details see Monitoring Routes in the Routes chapter.provides a continuous indication of data related to the cursor position.  Trial . and date/time data. 65900010 3-5 . for more details see Cursor Readout.  Posn . The four pages display the following information:  Curs .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Status Area At the bottom right of the screen is a status area containing four tab pages. depth below keel (DBK) for own ship.provides current latitude/longitude.provides access and data relating to Trial Manoeuvres. each page is accessed by clicking on the tab.  Route . for more details see Trial Manoeuvre.

see Sub Menu Selection and Navigation Bar. all sub menu functions associated with the selected item are displayed above the Main Menu list. The Main Menu buttons are superimposed over the status area. To access an function click on the appropriate sub-menu button. This button appears when the cursor is moved and is replaced by the company logo when the cursor has been stationary for a few seconds.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Accessing Main Menu and Sub Menu Functions The Main Menu functions are hidden at start up. Sub menu functions can also be accessed via the sub-menu selection bar at the top of the menu area of the screen. to access these functions move the cursor over the Show Menu button at the bottom right of the screen. the Status Area re-appears. To view each item's sub menu functions click a Main Menu button. To retain the Main Menu functions on the screen. 3-6 65900010 . keep the cursor inside the area containing the menu buttons. To hide the main menu and sub-menu functions move the cursor outside the area containing the menu buttons. Additionally it is possible to cycle round the sub-menus of a main menu by repeatedly clicking on the main menu button. The most recently selected sub-menu is remembered for each main menu button.

including functions that are not part of the currently selected main menu. The bar displays the currently selected sub menu. To display all the sub- menu functions within the currently selected main menu right click on the bar. To navigate back to a previously selected sub-menu click on the button. If no sub menu navigation option is available the arrow is shown as a dotted line. Navigating to previous sub menus The sub menu selection bar includes forward and back navigation buttons. To select. Left click on the selection bar to cycle to the next sub-menu function within the currently selected main menu. move the trackball to the required function and left click. This feature enables you to quickly navigate to previously selected sub menu functions. a drop down list of all sub menus is displayed. To navigate forward through the previously selected sub menus click on the button. 65900010 3-7 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Sub Menu Selection and Navigation Bar A sub menu selection and navigation bar is included at the top of the Features area of the screen.

between the CCRP and the cursor position divided by speed over ground (when in ground stabilised mode) or speed through water (when in water stabilised mode) . the button text changes to GC. For information on stabilisation options.  Reciprocal bearing. To change the calculation of cursor data to Great Circle click on the button.the distance between the CCRP and the cursor position as measured in nautical miles (NM). The Cursor readout includes the following:  Latitude (LAT) corresponding to the current cursor position.the geographical distance.  Longitude (LON) corresponding to the current cursor position. For more information on rhumb line and great circle. refer to Sensor Data Display Indicator Display in Sensor Management. displayed as true or relative by clicking on the T or R toggle button. displayed as hours. displayed as true or relative by clicking on the T or R toggle button. The LAT/LON readings are replaced by dashes if the following happen:  the cursor passes over popup windows or toolbars  own ship’s position is lost  the compass is unaligned  there is a compass error. The readout displays the location of the cursor position relative to the CCRP of own ship. see the footnote descriptions on page 8-17. Readout data appears when the cursor is within any area of the video circle.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Cursor Readout The cursor readout data is located in Status Area at the bottom right of the screen.  Bearing from the CCRP to the cursor position. the default is Rhumb. To access the cursor readout click on the Curs tab. Cursor data may be calculated based on Rhumb line route or Great Circle route.  Range .  Time To Go (TTG) . defined as bearing from the cursor position to the CCRP. 3-8 65900010 . minutes and seconds.

if the position data is degraded then the values are displayed in orange. 65900010 3-9 . For further information on sensor data sources see Sensors Menu. if the position data is considered invalid and unusable the data is shown in red.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Where the LAT/LON and bearing data is acquired from a valid sensor data source the values are displayed in green.

To access the Position data click on the Posn tab The Position window includes the following data:  The latitude/longitude (LAT/LON) position of the CCRP.GPS Quality indicator Indicator Description Field Acronym 0 Fix not available or invalid - 1 GPS SPS Normal 2 differential GPS Differential 3 GPS Precise Prcs 4 Real Time Kinematic RTK 5 Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK 6 Estimated dead reckoning DR 7 Manual Manual 8 Simulated - Indicator values 0 and 8 are degraded values.  The sensor source of the position data. as reported by the Position sensor. the quality is indicated as shown in the table below. No acronym appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded colour (orange). 3-10 65900010 . . When position data is sent using the GGA sentence. if the position data is degraded then the values are displayed in orange. A sentence is a self contained line of data. Where the LAT/LON data is acquired from a valid sensor data source the values are displayed in green. 2 NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Position Summary data on own ship's Lat/Lon position is displayed in the Status Area at the bottom right of the screen. GGA . The connected position sensor will in most cases be a GPS receiver and should be 2 configured to send position data using the GGA sentence . if the position data is considered invalid and unusable the data is shown in red. For further information on sensor data sources see Sensors Menu.

If a GLONASS device is providing position data it is likely to be configured to send the data using the GNS sentence. No acronym appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded colour (orange). No acronym appears in the field but LAT/LON values change to degraded colour (orange). 65900010 3-11 .system mode indicator Indicator Description Field Acronym A Autonomous Normal D Differential Differential E Estimated dead reckoning DR F Real Time Kinematic Float FRTK M Manual Manual N Not valid - P GNS Precise Prcs R Real Time Kinematic RTK S Simulated - Indicator values N and S are degraded values.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar A Loran-C device or an older GPS device may not provide position using the GGA sentence. Quality indicators when using the GLL sentence are shown in the table below. In this case the GLL sentence may be used. GLL . GNS . Quality indicators when using GNS are shown in the table below.system mode indicator Indicator Description Field Acronym A Autonomous Normal D Differential Differential E Estimated dead reckoning DR M Manual Manual S Simulated - N Not valid - Indicator values S and N are degraded values.

The current selection is shown next to the time. depth below keel (DBK). If no sensor data is available a series of red dashes are shown in the field.  The depth value as reported by the depth sensor. depending on the selection of system time made in Time Management.  The system time shown as the current date and time in hours. depth below transducer (DBT) or depth below waterline (DBW). 3 World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) is a chart datum model used by chart makers to map the earth’s surface. i.e. This can be either UTC or Local (local time may have a time offset applied). minutes and seconds. 3-12 65900010 .Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide  The field to the right of the quality indicator denotes the datum used for position data (defaults to WGS84). The field to the right of the depth value denotes the depth source sensor. For information on 3 WGS-84 datum see `Factors affecting Chart Accuracy' in Chart Facility.

Left click on the range you want to use. A list of available ranges will be shown in a drop down menu. between the < and > buttons. Or. do the following: 1. 2. or the > button to increase the range scale. Left or right click on the range scale button. 65900010 3-13 . The current range is shown on the range scale button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Range Scales A set of pre-defined range scales are provided. 1. To change the radar range. Range scales can be chosen in both standby and transmit modes. Click the < button to decrease the range scale. The range scale varies from 0.125 NM to 96 NM.

When range rings are switched on the button shows the current scale in nautical miles (NM). Range Scale Range Ring Interval (NM) (NM) 0. irrespective of the range scale or any offsetting of the CCRP.25 1.125 0. The range rings are centred on own ships CCRP and are equally spaced.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Range Rings The Range Ring button enables you to toggle the display of range rings on or off.25 0.05 0.025 0.25 3 0. Range rings are drawn out to the edge of the display. The range ring interval is dependent on the currently selected range scale.5 0.1 0.5 0.75 0. The table below lists when the range ring interval changes at a particular range scale.5 6 1 12 2 24 4 48 8 96 16 3-14 65900010 .

and the error is still present. The need for alignment is indicated by the heading readout flashing green. 65900010 3-15 . The sensor data display is divided into three columns: Caption The captions are always the abbreviated data types listed above. The selected sensor source for each data type can be viewed. Each sensor is identified by the following data types:  HDG (Heading)  STW (Speed Through Water)  COG (Course Over Ground)  SOG (Speed Over Ground) For each data type. the picture will revert to Head-UP. course and speed (through water and over ground) as indicated by the selected sensor. Readout Shows the current heading direction (as indicated by the Heading Line). from the Sensors menu. A readout of true heading is always displayed. or a compass error has occurred. If a stabilised picture presentation is in use. unless compass alignment 4 is being prompted. or where necessary changed. 4 A compass error will cause the heading readout to change from green to red and a compass alarm will be raised. For certain types of compass input.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Sensor Data Display The information shown in the sensor data display is transmitted via navigation sensors. a sensor source must be selected to provide the required data. then after 1 minute. it will be necessary to align the heading readout by manually entering the current heading after the radar display is switched-on. This information is available in both Standby and Transmit modes.

If the data is currently invalid it is shown in red. all nodes on the system provide the same indication of selected sensor source for each data type. regardless of the node from which the operator makes selections.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Valid sensor data is shown in green. 3-16 65900010 . Data Source The currently selected sensor from which the readout is taken. directly below the presentation and motion mode buttons. or click on the stabilization field. The block is highlighted and sensor data is extracted based on the stabilisation mode selected. Multi-node System In a multi-node system. The HDG and STW field block indicates water stabilisation and the COG/SOG field block indicates ground stabilisation. ground and water referenced. To toggle between the two stabilisation modes either click anywhere within the two field blocks on the sensor data display. Stabilisation Options There are two stabilisation modes for target tracking.

Move the cursor to a position within the video circle where you want the off centre position to be and right click. All chart and target positions are also moved in accordance. Off Centring Own Ship The Off-centre Own Ship function is not available at a range scale of 96 NM. options are only available in Standby. Own ship's CCRP is moved to the position selected. To off centre own ship do the following: 1. If the position selected is outside the 70% range scale of the video circle the Off centre option will still appear in the window but the placement of the CCRP will be within the 70% area.  Goto. Pan and Goto The following positioning options are available from a semi-transparent window when you right click within the video circle.moves a selected chart position (navigation marker or object) to the centre of the video circle. A semi-transparent window appears at the selected position. Own ship's position.moves a specified location to the centre of the video circle by using the location's LAT/LON coordinates. Off-centre Own Ship is available in both Transmit and Standby. with all chart and target positions also moved in accordance... (see note below). Select Off-centre Own Ship from the window.moves own ship to a selected position.  Pan . 2. or by selecting a previously saved location. at a point nearest to the selected position. . The Pan and Goto. chart data and target positions are all moved in accordance. 3.. 65900010 3-17 .  Off-centre Own Ship .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Off Centre. To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen select Close Menu.

Select Pan from the window. 3. a mariner object or a chart location). To cancel the operation and remove the window from the screen select Close Menu. Own ship and all other chart and target positions are also moved in accordance.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Panning The Pan function enables you to pan the display to view neighbouring areas by positioning a selected point at the centre of the video circle. To pan the picture do the following: 1. 3-18 65900010 . Panning mode is automatically turned off when the following are selected:  Off Centre. The selected position is moved to the centre of the video circle. the system automatically centres own ship. Move the cursor to either a specific point on the chart (for example. If the current motion mode is Relative Motion (RM) the system automatically changes the motion mode to True Motion (TM) when Pan is selected. Centre or Max View  changing motion mode  Head Up presentation mode  Transmit mode When the system turns panning mode off and the CCRP (radar video origin if video is displayed) is currently outside the offset limits. 2. A semi- transparent window appears at the selected point. Where the current presentation mode is Head Up (H Up) the system automatically changes the presentation mode to course up (C Up) when Pan is selected. or to a selected position within the video circle and right click.

Locations that may be used repeatedly can be saved by name. and then selected from a drop- down list. function enables the centre of the video circle to be moved to known locations or a specific location on the chart. 2. 3. Enter a location name using the keypad. To create a new location do the following: 1. To generate the location under another name click in the new location name field. The Goto. To assign the coordinates to the location click the Update button. and when complete click the OK button. To move LAT/LON position to the centre of the video circle click the Go button. When a designated position is accepted. the new location name field shows { Auto- Generate Name }. 8. The Goto control window displays the LAT/LON position selected. 65900010 3-19 . control window reappears with the saved location name in the Location drop down list. which is sorted alphabetically. Own ship along with all other chart and target positions are moved in accordance. a numerical keypad appears on the menu area from where you can enter the new LAT/LON coordinates.. To create a new location based on the LAT/LON position click on the Create.To generate a location name based on the current date and time click the OK button. button. 6. from the popup window. 7. To enter revised coordinates for the new location click in the LAT/LON fields.. Right click at a selected position within the video circle and select Goto. 5. the video circle shifts to show the desired location. Any geographic location can be designated by its LAT/LON coordinates..Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Goto The Goto. 4. a keypad appears below the location field.. To display the list of previously saved locations click on the drop down arrow to the right of the Locations field.

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

To rename or delete a location do the following:
To delete a saved location:
1. Select the location name to be deleted
by clicking on the Locations drop
down arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field,
click the Delete button. The location
and its coordinates are deleted from
the list.
To rename an existing location:
1. Select the location name to be
renamed by clicking on the Locations drop down arrow.
2. With the location shown in the field, click the Rename button.
3. The Goto.. window prompts to rename the current location's name
and includes the option of automatically generating a name based
on the current date and time {Auto-Generate Name}.
4. To auto generate the name click the OK button, or to create
another name click in the field and enter a name using the screen
keypad. When the location has been renamed the new name
appears in the location drop down list.

3-20 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Centre & Maximum View Options
Centring the Video Display
If the picture has been off centred or panned
(see Panning and Off Centring) the display
can be redrawn with own ship's CCRP at the centre of the video circle by
clicking on the Centre button. All other chart data and target positions are
also moved in accordance.
Positioning the picture for Maximum View
Clicking on the Max button off centres the video display at approximately
70% of the range scale radius so that a line drawn from it in the direction of
the current course passes through the centre of the video circle.
Maximum view is not available at a range scale of 96 NM.
In unstabilised presentation mode (Head Up), the direction is reciprocal to
the heading marker.
In stabilised presentation mode (North Up or Course Up), the direction is
reciprocal to the course over ground (COG), or heading marker if COG is
unavailable.
For a description of presentation modes available, see Presentation Modes

65900010 3-21

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Heading Line, Beam Line and Stern Line
The Heading Line (HL) and Stern Line (SL) are lines drawn parallel to the
ship’s fore/aft axis indicating the current own ship heading (HL) or the
reciprocal of the current own ship heading (SL). The HL and SL begin at
5
the CCRP of own ship and are drawn to the edge of the video circle. The
Beam Line is drawn perpendicular to the HL and SL at the CCRP.
The HL is always displayed. The SL may be selected for display, in addition
to the HL, from the Display Settings in the Nav Tools menu. The SL is
shown as a dotted line. The figure below shows own ship with HL and SL
displayed.

The bearing of the HL or SL is dependent on the presentation mode.
 In Head Up (H UP) mode the lines are always drawn vertically.
 In Course Up (C UP) mode the lines are initially drawn vertically
and then change dependent on the current heading bearing.
 In North Up (N UP) mode the lines are drawn at the current
compass heading.
When own ship is off-centred, the heading line bearing is automatically
adjusted so that the scale is always referenced correctly.
For further information on how the presentation mode affects own ship's
heading line, see Presentation Modes.

5
The position of the heading line and beam line within own ship's outline symbol is dependent
on the distance values applied to the CCRP in the Configuration tool (see VMFT Ship's
Manual, Volume 2, Chapter 1 `Configuration’). To position the CCRP in the centre of the ship's
outline the distance from bow must be half the configured value for ship's length. If no value is
applied, the heading and beam line will appear at the bow of ship's outline symbol.

3-22 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Beam Line
The beam line is a short line drawn at right angles to the heading line and
extending to each side of own ship's CCRP, the default (minimum) length is
10mm.
The beam line length can be increased from the 10mm default from the
Display Settings sub-menu in the Nav Tools menu.

65900010 3-23

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar
ar User Guide

Own Ship Symbols
There are three types of symbol that may be used to display own
n ship’s
position and heading:
• Minimised Symbol
• Outline Symbol
• Custom Symbol
Minimised Symbol
The minimised symbol is drawn where the scaled outline symbol ol cannot
c be
resolved at the given range scale. The minimised symbol may be drawn in
one of two ways, depending on the current view selected in Chart art/Radar
Maps.
 Circle Symbol - the circle symbol is drawn when the syst ystem is in
Charts view (Filled or Unfilled). It has a 6mm diameter for the outer
circle and a 3mm diameter for the inner circle, in addition
on to the
heading line and beam line.

 Heading and Beam Line Symbol - this symbol appears rs when the
system is in Radar Maps or Charts Off view. The symbol
ol consists
of the heading line and beam line only.

Outline Symbol
This symbol represents a true scale outline of own ship based on the
configured length and beam of the ship. The outline symbol is dis
isplayed
when Default Symbol is selected in Ownship Display Settings andan the
greatest dimension of the ship is larger than 6mm on the display.
y.
The outline symbol is displayed in addition to own ship minimised
ed symbol
(heading line and beam line).

3-24 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Custom Symbol
This symbol represents ownship drawn to the actual outline of the ship. The
custom symbol is displayed when Custom Symbol is selected in Ownship
Display Settings and the greatest dimension of the ship is larger than 6mm
on the display
Note that Custom Symbol will only be enabled if an outline definition for
own ship has been defined in the Configuration tool by entering line
segments, which are defined as x,y coordinates for the start and end point
of each segment. If no custom symbol has been defined then this symbol
will be unavailable for display.
The custom symbol is displayed in addition to own ship minimised symbol
(heading line and beam line).

Faults in Heading and Position Data affecting Own Ship Symbol
If the position data becomes invalid, ship's outline and circle symbol are
shown in red and the system switches to water stabilised mode, (see
Sensor Data). The heading line and beam line remain in green.
If the heading data becomes invalid, ship's outline and circle symbol are not
displayed and the heading line/beam line is shown in red. After a short
period of time the presentation mode reverts to Head Up (see Presentation
Modes). In Head Up the ship's outline or circle symbol re-appear and are
then shown in green.
Own Ship Vector
The own ship vector symbol is a line indicating ship’s direction and speed.
The end of the line is shown with a double arrowhead when in ground
stabilisation mode, and a single arrowhead when in water stabilisation
mode, if enabled in ownship Display Settings. For a description of the
stabilisation modes see Indicator Display.
The vector line begins at own ship’s CCRP and is drawn with a length
corresponding to the distance on the video circle that own ship will cover,
given its current speed, in the vector time chosen, see Vector Modes.

65900010 3-25

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar
ar User Guide

When in ground stabilised mode, the vector line is drawn to refleclect the COG
shown on the sensor data display. When in water stabilised mode de, the
vector line is drawn to reflect the course through the water based d on the
current heading shown on the sensor data display.
Own ship vector is not drawn if Predicted Vector is enabled (see e Display
D
6
Settings, Ownship) and the stabilisation mode is ground based .
In water stabilised mode own ship vector is drawn in addition to theth
predicted vector.
If own ship vector's end point is not on the available area of the video
vi circle,
a semicircle is drawn, centred at the point that the vector intersec
ects the
edge of the available area.
Own ship vector is shown in red when the data received from the he sensors
used to draw the vector (water or ground stabilised) is invalid orr degraded.
d
If enabled, tick marks will be displayed along the vector length at one
minute intervals, with every sixth tick mark shown with double thic
hickness.
The tick marks can be switched on or off, and the tick mark interv rval time
adjusted from the Display Settings sub-menu in the Nav Tools me menu.

Predicted Vector
Predicted vector is a tool to indicate where the ship will go based
d on current
speed, course, and rate of turn. Predicted Vector is turned on andnd off from
Ownship tab in Display Settings, Nav Tools menu.

6
This is the default presentation, set at commissioning. Ownship vector and predi
edicted vector
may be selected for simultaneous display, but this is NOT the recommended settitting.

3-26 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar

Radar Settings
Your display may be configured to operate with one of six transceivers
(labelled A to F) located at different positions on the ship. Each transceiver
may be either an X-Band or S-Band.
The display can be a master display or a slave display. Master displays
have full control over a transceiver; therefore only one display can be set
as the master of a transceiver at any one time. Also, a display can only be
connected to one transceiver at a time.
The Transceiver (TX/RX) field at bottom left of
the screen shows the following transceiver
information:
 label (A to F)
 transceiver type (X or S)
 display status (Master or Slave)
To view and set the transceiver options left click
on the Transceiver field. If an Interswitch is fitted
the menu displays a list of available transceivers
for your display.
For more information on transceiver settings, see
Interswitch in Chapter 11 `Radar’.
Dual Radar Interswitch Settings
On a dual radar system with an Interswitch fitted,
any transceivers that are available for Channel 1
and Channel 2 may be selected.
The selection of transceivers is independent
between channels.

65900010 3-27

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Radar Transmission Pulse Length
The current selection of pulse length is indicated in the pulse
length toggle button. The caption is an abbreviation of the
current pulse length selection (SP, MP or LP).
The pulse length can only be changed on a master display and in Transmit.
On a Slave display, or when in Standby, the pulse length is greyed out.
There are three pulse lengths:
 Short Pulses (SP) are used at close range to improve the
discrimination and range accuracy of received echoes.
 Long Pulses (LP) are used at long range to improve the ability of
the radar to pick out targets at distance.
 Medium Pulse (MP) is a pulse length used as an optimum between
discrimination and long range detection.
Pulse lengths are restricted to the following ranges:
 SP is available on the 3NM range and below.
 MP is available in the 0.5NM to 24NM ranges.
 LP is available at 3NM range and above.
If the pulse length is changed when the current range scale is outside the
permitted pulse length range listed above a temporary prompt: Invalid
Range for Pulse Length appears.
If the range scale is changed to a value outside the currently selected pulse
length parameters listed above, the pulse length automatically changes.
To change the pulse length, do the following:
1. Left click on the pulse length button. This will toggle through the
available choices for the pulse length, depending on range.
Or
1. Right click on the pulse length button. A list of
available pulse lengths will be shown in a drop
down menu.
2. Left click on the pulse length you want to use.

Radar Transmission Pulse Length on Dual Radar
On a dual radar system channels 1 and 2 may
have a different pulse length selected, providing
both transceivers are in Transmit mode.

3-28 65900010

see Chapter 1 `Configuration’ in Volume 2 of VMFT Ship's Manual.shows no maps or chart information.  Charts Off . The charts are restored when the presentation mode is changed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Chart/Radar Maps View & Chart Database Selection Where the system is enabled for Chart Radar the following viewing options may be selected from the Chart and Radar Maps button:  Chart Filled .  Chart Unfilled . For information on installing charts on to a node via the Sperry Marine Chart Installer program.g. In the event of a malfunction in the source of chart data. If the system is enabled for Radar only then only the Radar Maps and Charts Off options are available. If charts are displayed the currently selected chart database is indicated by a tick mark. or restrict the use of unrelated system functionality. Charts are suppressed when the display is unstabilised in Head Up (H Up) presentation mode (see Presentation Modes). For information on configuring chart engines. or right click on the button and select from the drop down list. this malfunction will not adversely affect the operation of the radar and AIS system. The chart databases available in the system are defined by which chart engines are configured and what chart data has been installed. 65900010 3-29 . To access the chart presentation and radar maps options either click on the button until the option appears. Right clicking on the Chart and Radar Maps button also displays a list of enabled chart databases (e.S-57 or C-Map-ENC). with land and sea shown as different colours. Left clicking on the button toggles between Charts Off and the last selected option. SevenCs .  Radar Maps .displays a complete chart presentation.displays a defined collection of geographic objects (points areas and lines) known as radar maps. see Chapter 3 `Chart Installation’ in Volume 2 of VMFT Ship's Manual.displays a chart presentation showing land and sea as the same colour with land outline only shown.

3-30 65900010 . see Chart Legend in Chapter 12. To access the AIS Input and Filter settings left click on the button. The Enable Input check box enables the AIS input and display to be switched on or off. For details on the selected chart database. see AIS Display in Chapter 10 `Targets’. When AIS Input is enabled the button shows the message AIS On. For information on AIS filter settings. left click on CPA. the AIS Display window appears. which defines the CPA/TCPA. CPA Button The CPA (Closest Point of Approach) button is located at the top right of the main screen. Nav Tools. The button enables you to quickly access the Limits and Settings window. For more information on creating radar maps. bow crossing (BCR/BCT) and target association settings. The screen briefly refreshes and changes to the selected chart database. when AIS input is switched off the button shows the message AIS Off. Charts. see Limits and Settings. AIS Input and Filter Button The AIS On and Filter Section button is located at the top right of the main screen. For information on target limits and settings. To access. see Mapping in Chapter 6.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To select another chart database click on the chart database line in the drop down list.

 Anti Clutter (RAIN) Use the Anti-Clutter Rain control to optimise suppression of rain clutter. select Auto to suppress rain and sea clutter. The Video Gain may be adjusted when the Auto/Manual control is in Auto.e. The Rain/Sea anti clutter levels appear green (editable) when the Auto/Manual control is set to Manual. The anti-clutter (Rain and Sea) controls can only be adjusted when the control button is set to Manual. balance the detection of targets within the clutter region (under the rain) with detection of those outside the clutter region.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Video Processing Controls The video processing controls are located in the bottom left hand corner of the display. 2. i. Video gain is independently adjustable for Auto and Manual anti-clutter modes. The current level is indicated by the shaded bar adjacent to the video control caption. The Rain and Sea levels are displayed as green (editable) when Manual is selected. In open sea conditions. 65900010 3-31 . A temporary reduction in gain can be beneficial when searching for targets in rain or snow conditions. Manually Adjusting Video Gain and Anti-Clutter Controls The following video processing controls can be adjusted independently. A light background speckle should be present to achieve the best target detection and long range performance. Left click to toggle control between Manual and Auto. All the video processing levels are shown in grey colour (non-editable) in Standby. This normally provides optimum detection by adapting the amount of clutter suppression applied to the varying characteristics of clutter returns.  Video GAIN Always adjust the Gain setting while on the longer range scales of 12 or 24 NM. Position the screen cursor over the Manual/Auto selection button (the button displays the current mode). To select Manual or Automatic Anti-Clutter Control: 1. In Transmit mode the Gain level is shown as green.

as the bar is adjusted the current percentage figure appears in the centre of the field. 3-32 65900010 . 100% on the right. To adjust the Gain and anti-clutter settings using the trackball: 1. often of similar signal strength to the sea clutter returns to be detected. Or: 1. do the following: The Gain and anti-clutter settings may be adjusted either from the control panel. The bar colour will appear blue. You can exit the adjustment and return to the previous setting by right clicking. Position the screen cursor over the Gain value and left click to make the control bar active. The bar colour will appear blue. The setting should be periodically checked as prevailing sea conditions change. To manually adjust the Video GAIN. Move the trackball left or right to move the bar to the gain/suppression level required. 2. With the Auto/Manual control set to Manual. Excessive suppression can cause loss of small targets.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Always use the control with great care. position the screen cursor over the anti-clutter control (Rain or Sea) you wish to change and left click to make control bar active.  Anti Clutter (SEA) Use the Anti-Clutter Sea control to reduce sea clutter to an operational level where some residual clutter speckle is present. you will need different settings for each mode. Each control is adjusted using the shaded bar behind its associated caption which indicates the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left. returning the control to zero after the search. Always use the control with great care. IMPORTANT NOTE – There are different stored values of Gain setting for Auto and Manual. or by using the trackball. Avoid setting the control to completely remove all sea clutter. RAIN and SEA settings. It is often advantageous to use this control to search for targets in the clutter region. The setting must permit small targets. as this will reduce the detection of small targets.

Using the Enhanced Video Mode In estuary and open sea conditions. 65900010 3-33 . especially when operating at range scales of 3 NM and an above. When Auto Anti-Clutter check box is ticked after adjustment the th Rain and Sea anti clutter settings appear grey. The Video rotary controls only adjust the gain/suppres ression levels. To turn the Enhanced Video Control On or Off: 1. espec pecially on range scales of 3 NM and above.75 NM and above. below the Gain setting. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar adjus ustment. The bar will return to its green shaded state and the percen centage figure disappears. Enhanced Video Mode A substantial improvement in the presentation of small and/or or short range targets. sign gnificantly improving their perceptibility on the display at all ranges. Left click to toggle the Enhance control On or Off. This facility is available on range scales 0. If used d on o short range scales it will degrade target discriminatio tion. e. The adjusted level is set and the bar deactivated after ter a 10 second period of inactivity.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Ope peration of Radar 3. Position the screen cursor over the Enhance button. or anti-clockwise to suppress the gain or anti-clutt lutter level. To adjust the settings using the control panel: Turn the required video rotary control clockwise to increase the gain or anti- clutter level. CAUTION: Use the Enhance Control with caution. 2. can normally be achieved by selecting the enhanced video mode. This will enhance small targets. always use the enhanced ed video mode for best target detection.

Manually adjusting the Gain. Rain and Sea settings for each channel is the same as described previously for single channel radar. To aid the visual differentiation between the two channels the Channel 2 video settings are displayed in a slightly darker shade than the Channel 1 video settings. This shade difference applies when both channels are set to Manual and the Gain/anti-clutter levels are displayed in green.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Dual Radar Video Processing Controls On a dual radar system the Gain and anti- clutter controls (Rain and Sea) can be independently adjusted for each channel. Note that on dual radar the percentage level which appears when adjusting the Gain/anti-clutter settings as described previously for single channel radar does not appear. 3-34 65900010 . and when adjusting the settings with the bar colour displayed in blue. The Gain and anti-clutter settings are split horizontally for the two channels. For example. the Auto/Manual control on Channel 1 may be set to manual (Man 1) with Channel 2 remaining in Auto (Auto 2). with the upper bar representing Channel 1 and the lower bar representing Channel 2.

Radar. For accurate tuning to be achievable. Position the screen cursor over the AFC/Manual selection field. Refer Chapter 2 ` Diagnostics and Commissioning’ in Volume 2 of VMFT Ship's Manual. 65900010 3-35 . 2. The tuning mode may only be adjusted when the system is in Transmit. see Chapter 11. The current level of tuning is indicated by the shaded bar adjacent to the Tune caption and is continuously updated. 100% on the right. below the video processing controls.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Radar Fine Tuning The radar tuning indicator is located in the bottom left hand of the display. Left click to toggle the tuning control to Manual or AFC. In a multi-node system the coarse and fine tune levels are distributed and used by other nodes on the system. For a Master display there are three tuning controls:  AFC on/off  Manual fine tune  Coarse tune (Diagnostics) The tuning indicator may also be accessed from the Transceiver window. 1. To select between Manual or AFC tuning. The two tuning modes are AFC and Manual. This bar indicates the level in percentage terms with 0% on the left. with the default mode as AFC. coarse tuning must have been correctly adjusted during initialisation. The tuning indicator can only be adjusted manually if the system is configured as a Master radar.

To manually fine tune do the following. the upper bar is the tuning indicator. With Manual selected left click in the Tune bar to activate the control. The tuning mode should be set to Manual. use these for the final adjustment. the label changes to Man 1. Radar Fine Tuning on a Dual Radar On a dual radar system both radar channels may be separately tuned. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar. The tune bar divides into two. 3-36 65900010 . If distant radar targets are visible. Move the trackball left or right to adjust the tuning control (lower bar) until the maximum level is reached on the tuning indicator (upper bar). to manually tune the Channel 1 radar click the AFC1 button. and the lower bar is the tuning control level indicator (which indicates how well the receiver is tuned). The bar will return to its green state. For example.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Manual Fine Tuning Adjustment For manual fine tuning. providing each transceiver is set as a Master. Fine tune adjustment for each radar channel is the same as described for single channel radar. 3. long pulse (LP) must be selected. 1. A right click will de-activate the bar but not set the new level. ideally using the highest range scale that shows a known target near to the edge of the radar circle. 2.

To suppress synthetics but display the coast outline: 1.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Synthetics Button All synthetics on the screen can temporarily suppressed. other than chart data. 2. 2. Left click and hold the left key down on the Synth On button. It suppresses all synthetics with the exception of the coast outline. 65900010 3-37 . To restore all synthetics release the left key on the Synth button. Left click and hold the left key down on the Coast button. radar video and own ship symbol. all synthetics on the screen are suppressed with the exception of any coast outline which may be in the vicinity of the video circle. Coast Button The Coast button works in a similar way to the Synthetics button. To suppress synthetics: 1. To restore all synthetics release the left key on the Coast button. The button changes to Synth Off and all synthetics on the screen are suppressed.

When current speed is over ground (COG) a warning is given when the Manoeuvre On check box is ticked that the trial course.  A true speed to be maintained during and after the manoeuvre. Trial Manoeuvre is located in the Status Area at the bottom right of the screen. depending on the currently selected stabilised mode. The manoeuvre course and speed can be either ground referenced or water referenced. both graphically and alpha-numerically.  A delay time (time to turn) before the manoeuvre is to start. Adjusting Trial Manoeuvre Parameters The following parameters can be specified to define the proposed manoeuvre:  A true course to follow after the manoeuvre. by observing the theoretical relative target vectors that would be produced.  A rate of turn for the manoeuvre. This gives the operator the ability to evaluate the possibility of collisions. to be displayed. see Sensor Data Display.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Trial Manoeuvre Trial Manoeuvre is a facility that allows the effect of a proposed manoeuvre. speed and vectors will be ground referenced. To access click on the Trial tab. based on rate of turn for own ship. 3-38 65900010 . However it is recommended for Trial manoeuvres that water speed (STW) is selected.

Enter the required final true course (from 0º to 359.  Time to Turn .0° Course Manoeuvre 0. An Action Required dialog opens prompting to enter a bearing.0 kn to 75 kn 15 kn Speed Time to 0 to 30 minutes in 0. to maximum set rate of Rate of Turn commissioned turn in initialisation. To change or enter a value: 1. 65900010 3-39 .  Rate of Turn . in 0. To change or enter a value for Final CTW/COG: 1.the proposed speed of own ship to be maintained during and after the manoeuvre. Left click on the current value to activate. Left click on the Final CTW/COG button. The dialog is removed and the entered value appears on the Final CTW/COG button.the proposed course of own ship to be followed after the manoeuvre.1 minute 0. 3.9°.1° increments 000.0min Turn increments Own ship's 1°/min. the text turns green (editable).the value in degrees per minute to be maintained during the manoeuvre.9º) and click the OK button. 2.  Final (CSE or COG) . 2.the figure representing the time in minutes between switching the trial manoeuvre on and actually starting the manoeuvre. Left click to accept and exit edit mode. Parameter Ranges Power on Default Final True to 359. Move the trackball left or right to set the required speed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar The ranges and default values for trial manoeuvres are shown below. standard rate of turn To enter trial manoeuvre values do the following: The following trial manoeuvre values may be edited:  Trial (STW or SOG) .

When the delay countdown reaches zero the Timer check box is automatically unticked. the time value previously entered in the Time to Turn field starts to count down to zero in real time. Delay Countdown To start the manoeuvre delay countdown tick the Timer check box. Effects due to tidal stream and leeway are not taken into account. and show the course and speed of the targets relative to own ship. rate of turn. The manoeuvre vectors are displayed until the manoeuvre is switched off by unticking the Manoeuvre On check box. 3-40 65900010 . with own ship’s vector suppressed. Whenever Manoeuvre On is ticked the display shows a large flashing T in the lower half of the screen. whether or not Manoeuvre On is enabled.  the scale is valid for the display of target synthetics. Displaying the Trial Manoeuvre Tick the Manoeuvre On check box to display the trial manoeuvre.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Turn Radius The turn radius figure is generated from the manoeuvre speed and the rate of turn and is therefore not editable. If relative (R) vectors are selected. The manoeuvre speed. If true (T) vectors are selected.  the heading is valid. When the Time to Turn countdown reaches 30 seconds a Manoeuvre Display warning is displayed. time to turn. the trial vector shows own ships proposed true course during the manoeuvre. Display of Vectors Trial manoeuvre vectors are displayed in all presentation modes and all motion modes when the following conditions are satisfied:  the Manoeuvre On check box is ticked. the trial vectors are applied to every tracked target or activated AIS target. course. vector type and length can be changed at any time during the trial. The Rate of Turn and the manoeuvre speed determine the radius of the turn based on data entered.

 The second section consists of a circular arc between the end of the first section and start of the third section. The arc radius is determined by the manoeuvre rate of turn and the manoeuvre speed. Enter the proposed vector time by left clicking in the value field and moving the joystick left or right to increase or decrease the vector time. If the vector time is not long enough to cover the entire manoeuvre then only a part of a trial manoeuvre vector will be displayed. Entering a longer vector time will allow you to see further into the trial manoeuvre. Trial Manoeuvre Vector Own ship’s trial manoeuvre vector consists of the following three sections:  The first section is a straight line continuing on the own ship's current course and speed. Targets.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar The display of True or Relative vectors for trial manoeuvre is determined by the Vector mode selection button. The trial manoeuvre vector lengths displayed are dictated by the selected vector time. see Target Data in Chapter 10. 65900010 3-41 .  The third section is a straight line showing the final course of the own ship at the manoeuvre speed. Trial CPA and TCPA data is displayed for selected target in the Target Data window. The vector length is calculated using the own ship’s current speed and the trial manoeuvre delay time. Any trial CPA and TCPA data is labelled TRIAL CPA and TRIAL TCPA respectively and does not obscure the actual target data. Trial CPA and TCPA It is possible to display target trial CPA and TCPA values predicted using the trial manoeuvre parameters.

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Watch Mode If your system is configured as a Total Watch. 7 Playback enables the operator to record and view a history of VisionMaster data through a series of one second screen captures. refer to Optional Features User Guide. the Watch Mode button at the top right of the screen enables the console view to be changed. 65900014. refer to Chapter 4 `Conning Information Display' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ship's Manual 65900011V2. 8 For user information on the Conning Info Display (CID). The drop down list shows the watch modes available with the currently selected watch mode ticked. Watch modes unavailable for selection are listed in orange lettering. including the design of CID pages. For information on Playback mode refer to the Optional Features User Guide. 65900014. 3-42 65900010 . Products not available from the Watch Mode list can be purchased from your VisionMaster FT supplier. For more detailed information on the CID. The following Watch Modes are supported:  Chart Radar  ECDIS 7  Playback  Central Alarm Management 8  Conning Info Display The availability of the product presentations listed above is dependent on the product type installed at initialisation. To view or change the watch mode click on the button. While Playback mode is enabled the only system settings available to the operator are the Playback controls and Watch Mode selection.

These common settings include:  Transmit/Standby  Target Display and Target Tracking  AIS On/Off  Acquisition Zones  EBLs and VRMs Functional aspects that are specifically not shared across watch modes include stabilisation mode (water/ground based) and presentation settings.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Total Watch Features When a watch mode is changed on a Total Watch product. motion mode. If Conning Info Display or Central Alarm Management modes are selected the display retains the Alarm Status Indicator and the Watch Mode button. 65900010 3-43 . certain settings made that are common to Radar/Chart Radar and ECDIS are retained across modes. including presentation mode. centre and max view.

57 (S57). see Dangers. the object is added to the dangerous objects list. Charts complying with this specification are available from various suppliers. as indicated in the ENC or mariner object database. Charts. see Dangers in Chapter 12. prohibited areas.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Safety Checking The safety checking facility provides the operator with advanced warning that own ship may be headed towards objects that could endanger the safety 9 of own ship. All objects above the water are considered dangerous if their clearance is less than own ship safety height. height and contour settings in the Chart Depths/Heights window. 3-44 65900010 . when one or more items are added to the Dangers list the icon colour changes to red (for Chart Dangers) or yellow (for Chart Cautions). which defines dangerous objects as either `Chart Dangers' or `Chart Cautions'. 9 Electronic Nautical Chart. The safety depth and height for each object are checked against the default depth. see Chart Depths/Heights. The proximity of dangers to own ship is indicated by the safety check icon at the top right of the screen. when items are added to the Dangers list the Alarms button shows the message Chart Dangers on a red flashing background colour (see Alarm Status Indicator) if the items are defined as dangers. When there are no dangerous objects in the Dangers list the background colour of the icon is shown in the system colour. Chart data conforming to specification published in IHO Special Publication No. If the Dangers list defines the items only as cautions the Alarm Status Indicator will not raise an alarm unless the Alarms On Cautions check box has been ticked in the Dangers sub menu. The system periodically searches the chart database and mariner objects database for objects that could endanger the safety of own ship. When an object currently not in the list of dangerous objects intersects own ship's safety region. and areas with special conditions are considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety depth or no depth is defined for that object. In addition to the safety check icon. Contours.

The operator should therefore be aware thatat there might be a slight delay in updating the e li list of chart dangers to reflect the current conditions ns. The dangers list provided on the Route te Monitor 'Dangers' tab are for the permanent rout ute only. see Monitor Route . and always keep the database updated. The ownship based safety checking is ththe only safety checking provided when making ga deviation on a temporary route. 2. and periodically during the route when progres essing to new legs. The rou oute-based region checked uses the XTE alarm limit which h is typically much wider than the ownship safety region. The operator needs to be aware of the quality of o the database presently loaded and enabled for the e operating o area. s stopping distance and general ability to manoeuvre. s. 65900010 3-45 . In a addition to the own ship based safety checking the operato ator should review the dangers list provided on the Dangers ers tab of the Monitor Route menu whenever a new route te is loaded.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Ope peration of Radar WARNING! The ability to detect chart dangers is reliant onn the quality of the data contained in the loaded and enabled ed chart database and the quality of the vector chart covoverage. wi with as much as 30 seconds between searches. In addition the operator must always set the look ahead ran range (time or distance) to an appropriate value consideringing operational parameters such as ship's speed.Dangers. The tem emp route does NOT apply a safety checking regioion based on the XTE limit as the saved/named route rou does. Safety checking is done periodically. It is particularly important that the operator be eaaware that: 1. re and therefore can indicate the available corridor for or safe deviation from the route on either side of the tra track line..

these changes automatically go into effect on all nodes:  Safety depth (see Chart Depths/Heights)  Safety height (see Chart Depths/Heights)  Look ahead time (see Dangers) Autopilot Interface If compliance with international standards for Track Control is required. an Autopilot interface must be configured. 3-46 65900010 . If the following safety checking parameters are changed at any node. 65900014. the system provides an Autopilot menu button on the Main Menu list. When configured.Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Multi-node Support All nodes on a multi-node system perform safety checking. The periodic own ship safety checking is triggered on all nodes at the same time. Radar only node or a node with only raster charts installed). An Autopilot button also appears below the Sensor Data Display displaying the current Autopilot control mode and providing quick access to other selectable Autopilot control modes. see `Autopilot Interface' in the Optional Features User Guide. Each node in the system will list the objects of concern detected by own ship safety checking the charts on that particular node. Chart Dangers announcements will appear on all nodes. One node on the system is designated as an arbiter for Chart Dangers announcements. Only one alarm or warning is raised for all chart dangers or cautions found on all nodes during the safety checking operation. For a full description of the Autopilot. irrespective of whether a particular node has the necessary chart installed (for example.

When double-ended ferry is enabled and the bow is switched from normal to alternate the following changes take place: • The heading signal changes by 180º and the speed logs change the sign of their speed signal. • Corrections are performed to all sensor data (e. based on configured offsets (e.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Double Ended Ferry If double-ended ferry has been configured the system assumes that there are two bows that may be used. The system should also be configured to include two CCRPs. radar positions. it will be considered a stern marker when switched to alternate bow). usually at the rear of the ship. one applicable for each bow direction. • Radar video is re-drawn such that it is centred on the correct position origin. ownship vector origin) are re-drawn to correctly reflect positions based on configured offsets. • Radars remain in transmit without adverse effects. . No inappropriate sensor alarms should be generated due to these changes. 65900010 3-47 . A switch provides a discrete signal. other than needing to rebuild trails or re-acquire targets. • All other synthetics (CCRP.g. positions and velocities) based on interpretation of configured positions. if the marker is a heading marker in normal bow. • Ownship symbol may change where the ‘bow’ of the outline is 180° opposite of the heading being supplied. the `normal bow’ at the front of the ship and the ‘alternate bow’. which is also used by gyros and speed logs to indicate whether the normal bow or alternate bow is acting as the current bow of the ship.g.

.

• Change the current active chart database. • Change manual sensor values. enabled at commissioning. and safety height. • Control whether safety checking Cautions can raise an alarm. or modify the Mariner Objects that are tied only to geographic locations. • Turn on/off the track control feature or make changes to track control parameters. A SIC node may take control over any of the following SIC functions: • Acknowledge alarms. • System In Control • Database Synchronization Station In Control Station In Control (SIC) is an optional feature. • Start or stop the execution of all types of route plans.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Operation of Radar Appendix A Operational Functions in a Multi-node System The following operation functions described below are specific to a multi- node system. 65900010 Appendix A-1 . see `Automatic Transfer of Control' below. • Change the active Mariner Object layer. When SIC is configured. • Change the sensor source for any sensor. where a more secure system of control is required on a multi-node system. each node is assigned to one of the following groups: • Always in Control • Never in Control Nodes that are configured to be in the Never in Control group are never in control unless every node from the other group is unavailable. safety depth. The feature enables critical system control functions to be accessed only from one or more designated nodes. • Turn on/off the speed control or make changes to speed control parameters. • Change the look-ahead range.

Basic Operation of Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide If any of the functions listed above are accessed from a node assigned as `Never In Control’. the function's values are greyed out and a temporary prompt appears confirming that SIC has restricted access to this feature. Appendix A-2 65900010 . The SIC functions are automatically removed from the restricted nodes when the system detects a valid SIC node. Automatic Transfer of Control SIC functions may be granted to nodes that have been configured to be Never In Control when the system lacks a SIC node for a configurable period of time.

In a multi-node system one node is assigned to be the master er copy of this database (the current master node is displayed on the Databa base tab in the System Diagnostics menu). otherwise data entered on one orr mmore nodes will be lost. Radar Maps. s see List of Alarms. A Database Initializing warning is displayed informing the operator that updates to the functions listed above are not allowed during the initialization progress.. Warnings and Cautions in Chapter 7 Alarms.. When this happens a Database Node Mis issing warning is raised describing the potential results of the missing node. 65900010 Appendix A .3 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Basic Ope peration of Radar Database Synchronization VisionMaster uses a database to record and share certain info formation around a multi-node setup (this information includes Routes. When the node is switched on or reconnected an Operator MessageMe is displayed prompting to select the source node to synchronize e the database to. CAUTION: Always select the node where the last set of ch changes were made. If a node is switched off or disconn nnected from the network then any changes made to the functions listed abo bove may not be properly saved. PI P Lines. GoTo locations. With the source node selected click the Synchronize button. Manual Chart Updates and User ser Profiles).

.

and an offsett position p can be applied to a Position sensor.). With the Sensors menu displayed. To access the sensor source for the data types on the Sensor or Data Display right click on one of the four fields and left click on the Selectt nnn n source line. all nodes use the same sensor for each type of senso sor data (position. As an exam ample. CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode off o operation. regardles less of the node from which the operator makes the selection. heading. water speed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Senso sor Management Chapter 4 Sensor Management Sensors Menu The Sensors menu allows the operator to select the sensor source so to be used for each type of data (e. position ion etc. ground speed. Left click on the Sensors field in the main menu list. if the operator selects position from GPS1 on one node. If automatic sensor data is unavailable manually entered value lues may sometimes be used in place. in order to apply a consistent common on reference system.g. 2. heading. 65900010 4-1 . water speed. etc.). In addition to the selection of a sensor source. The sensor source selected from any VisionMaster FT console ole for that data type will apply across the whole system. If for any reason a sensor is not providing usable data an alarm arm will be raised and the data displayed in red. adjustments to the heading alignment can be made at the Heading sensor. In a multi-node system. subject to certain restrictions. To access the Sensors menu from the main menu list: 1. A sensor device should be selected as soon as valid data is available. GPS1 is selected se as the source of position on all nodes. A window for the selected data type appears below the data display listing the available sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight. click on the specific sensor source button.

see COG Source Values. Heading Sensor To change the current sensor source for heading. Depth Below Keel Sensor To change the current sensor source for depth below keel. Date and Time Sensor Shows the current date and time and its source (usually GPS). 4-2 65900010 . Speed Over Ground Sensor To change the current sensor source for speed over ground. see Position Values. see Date and Time. Position Sensor To change the current sensor source for position. Set and Drift Sensor To change the current sensor source for set and drift. see Wind Values. Rate of Turn Sensor To change the current sensor source for rate of turn. Wind Sensor To view the current sensor source for wind. Speed Through Water Sensor To change the current sensor source for speed through water. see Rate of Turn Values. see STW Source Values. The sensor source currently used and its current value are highlighted in bold and the sensor's radio button selected. see Heading Source Values. Course Over Ground Sensor To change the current sensor source for course over ground.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Data Source The name of each available sensor data source is listed. see Set and Drift values. see Depth Source Values. see SOG Source Values.

Alignment Synchro and stepper compass values require alignment unless the ratio is 1:1. or to return to the existing sensor source and value click the No button. the presentation mode will switch to Head Up after 30 seconds. If alignment is required a prompt to enter the compass angle appears when the system is powered on and the system will automatically open the Heading folder of the Sensors menu. Tick the button next to the source. 3. Sensors and Alignment. If the heading data becomes invalid. The Alignment area shows alignment information applicable to each of the alignable heading sensors in the system. do the following: 1. Sensors The system supports the acquisition of analogue heading data via synchro and stepper interfaces and serial heading data via a serial port on the PCIO. The Sensors area lists the available heading sensor sources with the active sensor source and its current value in highlight. the text turns green (editable). 2. Whenever the sensor source is about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change. To change the alignment click in the Value field.0° and the heading readout flashes until aligned. To change the Heading sensor source. 65900010 4-3 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management Sensor Data Sources Heading Source Values The Heading folder is divided into two areas. 1. The power up default angle is 000. The Sensors area may display the analogue data (Gyro) and the serial data (HDT . The HDG readout shown in the Indicator Display and the ship's heading marker also change to reflect the new sensor value. To confirm click the Yes button. The Value field enables the operator to align a heading sensor prior to selecting it.true heading) and will allow selection between the two data values. Where the sensor is changed the heading values shown against the selected sensor source are applied.

STW Source Values The STW folder lists the available STW sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight. To confirm click the Yes button. If Computed is selected for the sensor data source for STW the system continually computes the values based on other active types of sensor data received. Click the Man button to enter the value. 3. Move the trackball left or right to alter the value. Whenever the sensorr source s is about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the th change. To change the STW sensor source and values. 1.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide 2. do the following: 1. 2. If no sensor source is currently available you may enter manuall data. A sensor device should be selected as soon as v valid data is available. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field. the text te changes to green (editable). Where the sensor is changed the values shown againstt the th selected data source are applied. The head ading readout changes when the alignment value changes even en if the compass is unaligned. 2. 4-4 65900010 . If manual data is entere ered the STW readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayed d in yellow. or to return to the previou ious sensor source and value click the No button. d CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode of oper eration. Move the trackball left or righ ight to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode. Tick the button next to the source.

To confirm click the Yes button. 2. or to return to the prev revious sensor source and value click the No button. CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode off o operation. When Computed is selected for the sensor data source for COG the system continually computes the valu alues based on other active types of sensor data received. or untick the boxoxes next to the data source where the update should not apply. Tick the button next to the source. with the data type's current sensor sourc urce displayed.g. To change the COG sensor source or values do the follow owing: 1. Manual data cannot be entered for COG if AIS S iinput is enabled. SOG and Position). 2. Whenever the sens nsor source is about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm irm the change. To update all click the Apply button. Move the trackball left or right to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode. 3. Click the Man button to enter the value. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field. If no sensor source is currently available you may enter manua ual data. Before entering data turn off the AIS input. a window appears prom rompting to select which of these other data types should also be e taken from manual data. the text changes to green (editable). 65900010 4-5 . i see AIS Display in Chapter 10 `Targets’. When the sensor being selected for COG also provide ides other data types (e.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Senso sor Management COG Source Values The COG sensor provides information about own ship course based on actual position history (when a position sensor such as GPS is providing the data). 1. A sensor device should be selected as soon a as valid data is available. To cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click lick Cancel. The COG folder lists the available COG sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight.

Move the trackball left or righ ight to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode. see AIS Display in Chapter 10 `Targets’. 2. 2. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field. Where the sensor is changed the values shown againstt the th selected sensor source are applied. or to return to the previou ious sensor source and value click the No button. CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode of oper eration. If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manu nual data. The COG will return to display an active course bearing when the SOG is at 0. Manual data cannot be entered for SOG if AIS inpuput is enabled. Click the Man button to enter the value. To confirm click the Yes button. When Computed is selected for the sensor data source for SOG the system continually computes the values based on other active types of sensor data received. A sensor device should be selected as soon as v valid data is available. the text te changes to green (editable). Whenever the sensorr ssource is about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the cha change. If manual data is ente ntered the COG readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayedd in yellow and the ship's vector line displayed in red. Before entering data turn off the AIS inpu put. If your SOG goes below 0. 1.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide 4. To change the SOG sensor source or values do the following: 1. SOG Source Values The SOG folder lists the available SOG sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight. 4-6 65900010 .5 knots or higher.5 knots the COG value will show sh as a series of green dashes. Tick the button next to the source.

Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the selected sensor source are applied. providing that the correct offsets for the position sensors are set during commissioning. with the data type's current sensor source displayed. If manual data is entered the SOG readout shown in the Indicator Display is displayed in yellow and the ship's vector line displayed in red. When the sensor being selected for SOG also provides other data types (e. To update all click the Apply button. The folder is divided into two areas. Sensors and Position Offset. Position Values The Position folder shows geodetic position data of own ship. To cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel button. 65900010 4-7 . The position displayed for CCRP is accurate. The area also provides computed sensor data that supplies geodetic position based on dead reckoning (DR) from the last valid position received. Position.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management 3. If position data becomes invalid the system will automatically switch to water stabilised mode. COG and Position). see Basic Operation of Radar. or untick the boxes next to the data types where the update should not apply. Sensors The Sensors area lists the available position sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its latitude/longitude values in highlight. The current position and sensor source are also shown in the Position tab of the Status area at the bottom of the screen. a window appears prompting to select which of these other data types should also be taken from manual data.g. 4.

To confirm click the Yes button. Manual position data cannot be entered if AIS inpu put is enabled. 2. The timeout limit applied to valid dead reckoning values defaults s to t 30 seconds. Tick the button next to the source. and this data will bec ecome degraded after a period of time. Before entering manual data turn off the e AIS input. The system considers position data to be invalid if the most recen ent usable sample data received from a position sensor is older than the time imeout limit. CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode of oper eration. may be used as the active data source for the position sen ensor.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Dead Reckoning values If valid position data for own ship is not received within a short period pe of time from the sensor interface the system establishes a computed ted position by dead reckoning from the last valid position received using own wn ship’s direction and speed. CAUTION: The amount of time that a LOP position sensor willill b be considered usable is limited. see Line Of Position in Nav Tools. For information on LOPs. LOP Values The geographic location of own ship. determined by using Lines s of o Position (LOP). or to return to the previou ious sensor source and value click the No button. see AIS Display in Chapter 10 `Targets’ 4-8 65900010 . Whenever the sensorr source s is about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the th change. A sensor device should be selected as soon as v valid data is available. If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manu nual data. To change the Position sensor source do the following: 1. Note that LOP position ion sensor data is dead reckoned.

5. Where the sensor is changed the values shown in the Posn tab change and the sensor source changes to Manual. To update all click the Apply button. Enter position data from the keypad. COG. To cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel button. To change the sensor source from the current automatic source (usually GPS): 1. 3. To enter manual sensor data click in the Man field. the text changes to green (editable). 4. Move the trackball left or right to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode. Tick the DR or Man sensor button. the text changes to green (editable) and the screen keypad appears. UTC). Manual sensor data cannot be entered if the system has AIS input. The STW readout shown in the Indicator Display and the ship's STW marker also change to reflect the new sensor value. Click the Man button to enter the value. Own ships symbol (scaled outline or circle symbol) will be displayed in red while manual position data is being used. Click the Man button to enter the value.g. a window appears prompting to select which of these other data types should also be taken from manual data.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management 1. or untick the boxes next to the sensors where the update should not apply. 65900010 4-9 . Whenever the sensor source is about to be changed a window prompts you to confirm the change. When the sensor being selected also provides other data types (e. 6. click the OK key to exit edit mode. To enter manual data click in the Man field. 3. 2. 2. with the data type's current sensor source displayed. Where the sensor is changed the values shown against the selected data source are applied. SOG.

2.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Position Offset The Position Offset area shows the current sensor and enables the operator to enter a position on the chart known to correspond with own ship’s position and enter an offset bearing value. The range and bearing values selected on the chart are shown in the Offset fields. GPS. Click in the position on the video circle where you want the offset to be applied. or right click in the field and enter values using the on-screen keypad. Offset values are not applied to the chart until this check box is ticked. Move the trackball left or right to change data. then this field is read-only. Position. select the relevant position sensor by clicking on the drop down arrow. 2.g. the text becomes green (editable). To apply the entered offset values to own ship tick the Offset Applied check box. the cursor changes to an offset arrow graphic. Offset values are applied to all data received from the applicable position sensor. To enter offset values do the following: To specify offset range and bearing values: 1. If only one position sensor has been configured e. When offset values are applied the entry is highlighted in the Posn tab with Offset shown in orange text below the sensor source. To select an offset position on the video circle using the cursor: 1. Click in the respective fields. If there is more than one position sensor configured. 4-10 65900010 . Click on the Set Offset by Cursor button and move the cursor over the video circle.

When incorrect computed values are suspected they can be manually set to zero or to an estimated ed manual value. 65900010 4-11 . The system will re-calculate accurate Set and Drift value lues after accurate sensor data has been restored. Tick the button next to the source.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Senso sor Management Depth Source Values The Depth sensor provides information on the current depth values: • depth below keel (DBK) • depth below transducer (DBT) • depth below waterline (DBW) The specific sensor information available will depend upon ins nstalled and configured sensor devices. A sensor device should be selected as soon a as valid data is available. 2. To confirm click the Yes button. To change the Set and Drift sensor source or values do th the following: 1. When Computed is selected for the sensor data source for Set and Drift the system continually computes the values based on other active types of sensor data received conventionally (via an interface). Whenever the sens nsor source is about to be changed a window prompts to confirm the he change. the data for Drift is shown in knots (kn). If no sensor source is currently available the user can enter manual ma data. or to return to the prev revious sensor source and value click the No button. CAUTION: Using manual data is not the normal mode off o operation. Set and Drift Values The data for Set is shown in degrees.

3. To cancel all changes and revert to the previous sensor source click the Cancel button. 2. To update all click the Apply button. Click the Man button to enter the value. or untick the boxes next to the data type where the update should not apply. Move the trackball left or right to enter the required value and left click to exit edit mode.Sensor Management Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 1. with the data type's current sensor source displayed. A window appears prompting to select the data type (COG/SOG and STW) that will be computed from the manual set and drift sensor. 4-12 65900010 . the text changes to green (editable). To enter manual sensor data click in the Manual Set and Drift fields.

The ROT is indicated as unavailable if the Heading from the selected source is unavailable or invalid. The default selection for date/time source is from a GPS sensor. 65900010 4-13 . When Computed is selected for the sensor data source for ROT the system continually computes the values based on other active types of sensor data received conventionally (via an interface). Date and Time The Date and Time folder shows the system date and time with the currently active date and time source and its value in highlight. If the time data is valid the values are shown in green.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Management Rate of Turn Values The Rate of Turn (ROT) folder lists the available ROT sensor data sources with the currently active sensor source and its value in highlight. The specific sensor information available will depend upon installed and configured sensor devices. Wind Values The Wind sensor provides information on the current wind direction and velocity.

.

Motion.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. • Displaying the velocity of own ship and other targets as vectors on the video display. Motion. • Displaying the history of a target's movements as a trail on the video display. Vector and Trail Modes Chapter 5 Presentation. • Selecting a motion mode and how this affects the display of own ship and other targets on the display. 65900010 5-1 . Vector and Trail Modes The following topics are covered in this chapter: • Selecting a presentation mode and how this affects the video display.

then own ship's vector is displayed. This is the power up default presentation mode. The currently selected presentation mode is shown on the presentation mode button. A valid source of heading data must be selected to use a stabilised mode. 5-2 65900010 . In an unstabilised presentation mode radar video and trails are maintained relative to the ship’s fore/aft axis. • North-Up (N Up) Stabilised display.Presentation. The following modes may be available for selection: • Head-Up (H Up) Unstabilised display. The bearing scale shows 000° at the top of the video circle (assumed to be true north). If the vector mode is True. The ship’s heading marker is shown at the appropriate bearing. H Up is a relative display with the ship’s heading marker always shown vertically upwards indicating straight ahead movement. There are two types of stabilised mode available: North-Up and Course-Up. the display is 'unstabilised’ and is shown with the ship’s heading marker vertically upwards indicating straight ahead movement (Head-Up mode). In a stabilised presentation mode radar video and trails are maintained relative to a fixed true bearing. see Vector Modes. Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide and Trail Modes Presentation Modes Data from the compass can be processed to produce a correct ‘stabilised’ display. Without a compass input. Motion. irrespective of own ship's current bearing.

Left click on the presentation mode you want to use. the ship’s bearing is shown at the top of the video circle with 000° elsewhere on the circle. 65900010 5-3 . Right click on the presentation mode button. To change the presentation mode.ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. Motion. On selection of Course-Up mode. do the following: 1. Or: 1. Click the presentation mode button. A list of available presentation modes will be shown in a drop down menu with the currently selected presentation mode ticked. Vector and Trail Modes • Course-Up (C Up) Stabilised display. 2. This will cycle through the available choices for the presentation mode (N Up and C Up only). still representing true north.

5-4 65900010 . see Prompts in Chapter 7 Alarms. When the system is switched to transmit and the radar video centre is outside the allowable offset limits.g. if the ship alters course the bearing scale does not realign automatically. the radar video is automatically centred in the video circle. A Course-Up reset should then be performed by re-selecting the mode. This realigns the bearing scale to bring the new course to the top of the video circle. When this happens a temporary prompt indicating that the presentation mode has changed is displayed. This can occur when a smaller range scale is selected.Presentation. Motion. Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide and Trail Modes A presentation mode can be automatically changed as a side effect of another action (e. When the C Up mode is in operation. changing the motion mode) or as a result of an invalid heading. An alarm is given within five seconds of the heading becoming invalid.

even when channel 1 video is switched off. Motion. the video origin for channel 2 may be located by switching off channel 1 video and increasing the Gain setting for channel 2. and the Video On/Off control is displayed in amber. If the origin of channel 2 is too far away for the display. the video from channel 2 is automatically suppressed. Suppression of Channel 2 Video Channel 2 video origin does not include a position symbol. This ensures that the screen location for off-centring the video is clearly indicated. 65900010 5-5 . depending on transceiver offsets made in commissioning. Sometimes the origin of channel 2 video becomes too far away for display when the following actions are performed: • Centring or Off-centring • Max view ahead • Selecting a lower range scale • Course up reset • Changing presentation mode • Panning The origin of channel 2 video is also considered too far away if it is outside the 70% range scale from the centre of the video circle.ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. Channel 1 Video Origin A small + symbol is displayed centred on the channel 1 video origin. no video is displayed on the screen and the text ‘VIDEO OFF’ is displayed in amber at the bottom of the video circle. If required. If the origin of channel 2 is automatically suppressed when channel 1 is in Standby. Vector and Trail Modes Dual Radar Presentation On a dual radar system Channel 1 and Channel 2 video origin can be at different locations.

If the display becomes `stabilised’ then TM may be selected. True Motion In TM own ship moves across the video circle at the selected ground or water based velocity (see Sensor Management).g. in RM the chart moves under own ship. the presentation mode is Head Up (see Presentation Modes) and only RM mode can be selected. When this happens a temporary prompt indicating that the motion mode has changed is displayed. Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide and Trail Modes Motion Modes The currently selected Motion Mode is displayed at the top right of the screen. see Trails Mode. in TM own ship moves over the chart. changing the range scale or presentation mode) or as a result of an invalid heading. Relative Motion Own ship is shown at a selected point or fixed point in the video circle (normally the centre) with all target trails displayed. 5-6 65900010 . In this mode all moving target trails are displayed. Motion Mode Changing Automatically A motion mode may be automatically changed as a side effect of another action (e. so there is no need to reset the display. How moving and stationary target trails are displayed is dependent on the trails mode selected (True or Relative). see Prompts. the heading is invalid). whereas stationary targets trails are not generated.g. Presentation Modes affecting Motion Modes If the display is 'unstabilised’ (e. There are two motion modes available:  True Motion (TM)  Relative Motion (RM) The motion mode determines how chart information is updated.Presentation. Motion. Motion modes can be altered in both Standby and Transmit mode. The advantage of this mode over true motion is that a constant range ahead of own ship is always shown.

do the following: There are two methods of selecting the motion mode. This will switch between TM and RM. the motion mode will temporarily revert to RM. Left click on the motion mode you want to use. TM is available on range scales 0. The two motion modes are shown in a drop down list with the currently selected motion mode ticked. If the presentation mode or range scale is not valid for true motion (as described above).ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. Motion. then TM will be unavailable for selection. Or: 1. On selecting a valid range scale the system will revert to TM. To change the Motion Mode. 2. with the RM lettering displayed in a warning colour (amber). On the 96 NM range scale own ship will be automatically centred. 65900010 5-7 . either: 1.5 NM to 48 NM. Right click on the motion mode button. Vector and Trail Modes Range Scales affecting Motion Modes RM is available at all range scales. If the range scale is outside these limits. Click on the motion mode button.

The e vector v mode is either True (T) or Relative (R) and is aligned with the Tra rails mode (relative or true). Basic Operation of Radar. Selecting the Vector Mode The vector mode determines whether the vectors represent the true tr velocity of targets or the target velocity relative to own ship. Vector Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide and Trail Modes Vector Modes Vectors are shown on the radar display to indicate the velocity (speed (sp and direction) of own ship and moving targets. Target vectors are drawn using the same colour as the target symymbol. see `Own Ship Symbols’ in n Chapter C 3. based on the following conditions:  Target with no alarm condition : Non-flashing gre reen  Target with unacknowledged alarm : Flashing red  Non-dangerous target with acknowledged alarm : Non-flashing gre reen  Dangerous target with acknowledged alarm : Non-flashing red ed For information on own ship vectors. Stationary targets do not have a vector. e. Vectors are only displayed when the system is in Transmit mode. Motion. • True Vectors All moving targets and own ship have a vector representing their movement (speed and direction) over the water/ground. Thehe length of the vector indicates speed and its bearing indicates direction. All vectors are shownn as a a dashed line beginning at own ship CCRP or the target origin. 5-8 65900010 .Presentation.

To select a Vector Mode. Vector and Trail Modes • Relative Vectors If own ship is moving. 1. If it is not selected the vector text will remain in amber. The vector mode will revert to the same as the Trails mode (relative or true) after 30 seconds if the Vector Timeout check box is selected in Target Display. Position the screen cursor over the Vector mode selection field. have a vector representing their movement (speed and direction) relative to own ship. both moving and stationary.ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. 65900010 5-9 . If the selected vector mode is not the same as the current Trails mode. do the following: A true (T) or relative (R) Vector mode can be selected as follows. Or right click on the current vector mode and select from True or Relative from the drop down menu. 2. the vector text is shown in the warning colour (amber). all targets. Consecutive left clicks will toggle the mode between True (T) and Relative (R) vectors. 3. Motion. Own ship will not have a vector in this mode.

2. 5-10 65900010 . Extending the vector time lets you visually check on CPAs of targets by projecting their movements further into the future. If a value entered is incorrect press the Back key. With the required values enter click the OK key. The numeric keypad appears. Right click over the vector time field. Enter the revised vector time field using the keypad's numeric keys. Or: 1. Left click to edit. The keypad is removed from the screen and the revised value is entered at the vector time field.Presentation. The length of a vector represents the distance the ship or target will travel in the vector time. Left click to accept the re-entered time. Position the screen cursor over the vector time field. To change Vector Time. Move the trackball left to decrease or right to increase the time. Motion. 2. For example:  Vector Time 5 minutes  Speed (of ship or target) 12kn  Length of vector 1nm The optimum vector time will depend upon the range scale that is in use. The text becomes green (editable). do the following: Either: 1. Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide and Trail Modes Vector Time The Vector Time selected will determine the length of the vectors shown on the radar display. 3. Extending the vector time will help you predict closest point of approach (CPA) of targets to own ship and other targets. 3. 4.

5 NM in True Trails then the trail mode will change to Relative. Video trails may be displayed in True or Relative mode:  In Relative Trails the trails indicate the movement of the targets relative to own ship.  In True Trails the target trails have own ship's speed applied (ground based or water based).e. when switching between Relative and True the corresponding vector mode will be maintained. Actual trail length will depend on the range in use. Own ship is shown at a selected point in the video circle (normally the centre). If the range scale is switched to a scale lower than 0. with all target trails displayed. • LONG Low rate of decay giving a long trail. The selection of True or Relative trails will be reflected in the vector mode selection. The trail time defaults to SHORT after power up. Motion. • PERM Permanent trail which does not decay. When the trail length exceeds 60 minutes >60min 0s is displayed. i. See table below. If the display becomes 'unstabilised’ only Relative Trails is available. 65900010 5-11 . This means that stationary targets will have trails if own ship is moving. The following Trails Modes are available: • SHORT High rate of decay giving a short trail. Actual trail length will depend on the range in use. Vector and Trail Modes Trails Mode In addition to a target's vector the radar shows decaying video trails. The Trails button text will be displayed in a warning colour (amber) until the range is switched to a higher scale. • OFF Trails are removed from display.ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation. stationary targets trails are not generated. Unlike relative trails. When switching between Relative and True. target trails are maintained. showing the history of a target’s movements. See table below.

When the range scale is changed by more than one increment. although the time appears in the warning colour (amber) for the trial time period. The Trails button is displayed at the top right of the screen. If the trails are still below their maximum length. True or relative mode is denoted by the letter T or R. Motion.5 NM on Short trails will result in the trail time showing as amber for 30 seconds.Presentation. indicating how long they have been building up. Trail Length Time The trail time shows the length of the trails in minutes and seconds. If Permanent Trails mode is selected the trails do not decay. If trails have been switched off. changing the range scale from 3 NM to 1. Vector Radar/Chart Radar User Guide and Trail Modes • RESET Resets the Trails time to zero and clears all existing trails from the video circle. a count-up time is shown. For example. The trail mode listed above is also shown on the button. If the range scale is changed by one increment the trail time adjusts to the value relative to the selected range scale. the trail time restarts at zero before building up to the maximum time for the range scale and trail type selected. 5-12 65900010 . the button shows Trails Off. see the table below. The selection of Long or Short Trails changes the trail time and is also dependent on the range scale in use. or the system is in Standby.

3. Position the screen cursor over the Trails Mode button. do the following: To switch between True and Relative trails: 1. it takes as long as the new time selection for the trail time to be representative. The table below lists the long and short maximum trail times.75 15 sec 45 sec 1. changing from 3 minutes on Long to 60 seconds on Short will take 60 seconds for the trails to represent how far the targets have moved. 2. Position the screen cursor over the Trails Mode button and right click. and all existing trails are removed from the video circle.0 30 sec 90 sec 6. Or: 1. To reset the Trails time select Reset. Vector and Trail Modes When switching between trails length.5 30 sec 90 sec 3. Range Scale Short Trail Long Trail (nm) time time 0. or to change the Trails Mode. Select the Trails mode option from the window. 65900010 5-13 . Relative and True Trails and the trails modes options listed above appear in a drop down list.25 10 sec 30 sec 0. For example.ARPA Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Presentation.5 15 sec 45 sec 0. relative to the range scale. 2.125 10 sec 30 sec 0. During this period the trails displayed are not representative of the displayed trail time and so the trail time is shown in the warning colour (amber).0 and above 60 sec 3 min To select True or Relative trails. The time shown to the right of the trails mode is momentarily reset to 0min 0s before re- counting. Motion. Consecutive left clicks will toggle between True and Relative Trails.

.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Chapter 6 Navigation Tools This section covers the creating. editing and deleting of the following navigation tools:  Parallel Index Lines  Mapping Objects  Line of Position  History Tracks  Display Settings  Parallel Cursor  Anchoring  Man Overboard It also includes a description of how to create and edit Navigation Marks. 65900010 6-1 .

line type and which side of the ship the line is on. including adding a set or line. deleting or renaming a set of lines. Each PI line is defined by the range of its closest point to own ship. its bearing. • Display . shared between all nodes. Each set may include up to fifteen lines. Multi-node Support Sets of parallel index lines are saved and retrieved in a database. The set of parallel index lines displayed on a particular node may be specified independently for each node. PI lines are available in all presentation and motion modes. 6-2 65900010 . irrespective of the range scale in use.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Parallel Index Lines Description The Parallel Index (PI) Lines facility allows multiple sets of parallel index lines to be displayed simultaneously. • I/O . and copying.where import and export of PI Line sets is done. To access PI lines left click on the Parallel Index Lines field from the Nav Tools menu list.where all PI line and PI set editing functions are done.enables selection of one or more PI sets to be displayed on the video circle. The lines span the entire video circle. The PI Lines window includes the following three tab folders: • Edit .

and the Selected Set shows <Default Set>. Information on PI lines associated with the default set is displayed in the Line Data section of the folder. press the Back button to delete characters or the space button to create a space. 4. The screen prompts to enter a name for the new set of PI lines with the current date and time highlighted in the set field name. When a new set is created the set name is entered in the system and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list. or to edit the name click in the field. Click on the Add Set button. 2. The selected set is displayed on the screen and is available for editing. The <Default Set> of PI Lines cannot be deleted or renamed. To select a previously created set of PI lines click on the drop down arrow to the right of the Selected Set field and select from the list. 5. see Adding PI Lines or deleting Sets.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Edit Parallel Index Lines The Edit tab folder opens as default when Parallel Index Lines is selected. 3. To enter the current date and time as the PI name click the OK button. 65900010 6-3 . With the required name entered press the OK button. Creating a new set of PI Lines To create and name a new set of PI lines do the following: 1. You can now add PI lines to the set name. the text changes to green (editable) and the screen keypad is displayed immediately below the field. Enter a new name using the screen keypad.

4.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Adding PI Lines or deleting Sets To add a PI line or delete a set do the following: 1. On the screen the previously created line is displayed as orange and the new line shown as magenta. To delete a line set select the set name by clicking on the Selected Set drop down list and with the set displayed click on the Delete Set button. You can edit the display of PI lines by unchecking the tick boxes next to each Line button. Click OK to confirm. A PI line is always initially created with its axis through own ship’s CCRP and the bearing angle the same as the current heading line of own ship. 2. A further set of Line Data values are displayed with default values and the last line created is highlighted in Line Data. With the PI set name entered click the Add Line button. A window appears prompting to confirm the deletion. A line is created and the default line values are shown in the Line Data area. When a tick box is unchecked the line's values remain but the line is removed from the screen. 6-4 65900010 . the set is deleted and the PI Lines window reappears with <Default Set> in the set field. To create further PI Lines click on the Add Line button. 3.

the text changes to green (editable) and the on-screen keypad is displayed immediately below the field. Enter a new name using the keypad. or to edit the name click in the field. Enter a new name using the keypad. 2. With the required name entered press the OK button. The window prompts to rename the selected Pl line set with the current date and time highlighted in the set field name. When a new set name is created the set name is entered in the system and displayed in the Selected Set drop down list. press the Back button to delete characters or the space button to create a space. 4. 4. To enter the current date and time as the PI name click the OK button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Copying or Renaming PI Line Sets To copy or rename a PI line set do the following: To copy a PI Line set: 1. To rename an existing PI line set: 1. 2. press the Back button to delete characters or the space button to create a space. 3. To enter the current date and time as the PI name click the OK button. Highlight the set name from the Selected Set drop down list and click on the Copy Set button. 3. the text changes to green (editable) and the on-screen keypad is displayed immediately below the field. The PI line set is renamed in the Selected Set list 65900010 6-5 . The window prompts to enter a name for the newly copied Pl line set with the current date and time highlighted in the set field name. or to edit the name click in the field. With the required name entered press the OK button. Highlight the set name from the Selected Set drop down list and click on the Rename Set button.

Any individual line styles previously selected aree overridden o by this command. 2. Move the cursor over the PI line. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to pivot the line around own ship’s CCRP. To adjust the line range move the cursor over the middle of the line where a small centre line bisects at the e CCRP. the NM range value denotes the distance of the liline to the 6-6 65900010 . 3. the cursor changes to the th following symbol 2. each style is a variation of line dashes. Click on the drop down list next to the current line style (defaults to Solid). Select the preferred line style from the list. Or: 1. the same list of line styles appears as described above. the values change to green. Move the trackball to change the data values. the bearing angle value in Line Data automatically changes as the line bearing is moved. Click on the line bearing and range fields in the Line Data ta area. the PI line is automatically selected and a list of line styles are displayed as numerical indicators. Select the line style to be applied to all lines in the set and click the Apply for Set button. The line's style is changed to the selected option on scree reen.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Editing PI Lines To edit a PI line do the following: A different line style for each PI line may be selected. You can edit the line bearing and range in either of the following g ways: w 1. or a line style sty may be applied to all lines in the set. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right ht to adjust the range of the line to either side of the CCRP. 2. 3. To select a line style for each PI line: 1. The cursor changes to the following symbol 4. Click on the drop down arrow next to the Apply for Set button. To apply a line style to all PI lines in the set: 1.

The front and back endpoints may be different values. without changing its bearing value.) in the Line Data section. select the PI line to be truncated. either by clicking on the line in the video circle. The Truncate Front and Back values both default to a distance of 2. From the Line Data area click on the Toggle Side of Ship button to the right of the line bearing 2. When a line is selected the Truncate Front and Truncate Back check boxes become active. Changing the Bearing Type The PI lines menu defaults to displaying the PI lines in true bearing. To change which side of the ship a PI line is displayed: 1.0 NM either side of the line's centre point. With the Display On. hold down the left key and drag the end point to the required distance. or click in the Truncate Front and Truncate Back fields. which is valid for a correct ‘stabilised’ display. To display the PI lines on an unstabilised display select Relative from the Bearing Type drop down list.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools CCRP (defaults to 0. 65900010 6-7 . To adjust the end points of a PI line do the following: 1. or by clicking on the line button (Line 1 etc. The front and end points of a PI line may be edited in one of two ways. The PI line displays a T or R to the side of the line.0) and the bearing values denote the angle from 000°. The selected PI line changes to the other side of own ship. depending on the bearing type selected. Either click on the line's end point in the video circle. move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the truncated values. the text becomes editable (green). 3. To adjust the line's end points tick the Front and End check boxes. If the heading data becomes invalid the display is 'unstabilised’ and the PI Lines are not displayed. Truncating and Deleting a PI Line Each PI line may have its forward endpoint and back endpoint graphically adjusted. 2.

click the Turn Off All box. The tab folder lists all the current PI Line Sets created in the Edit tab folder. To remove a line set from the display click on the set. Continue to select line sets for display as required. the set's check box is ticked and the PI lines are displayed. To turn the display of all sets off. To display information for a specific PI line. To delete a PI line. The current range and bearing for that line are displayed on the screen. 6-8 65900010 . Display Parallel Index Lines The Display tab folder enables the selection of one or more sets of Parallel Index Lines to be displayed on the video circle. select the line as described above and click the Delete Line button. The line is removed from the video circle and its data removed from the Line Data section. the tick is removed from the check box. all PI line sets are removed from the video circle.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide When a truncated PI line is selected a short line is drawn perpendicular to the PI line's axis at the truncated end. hover the cursor over the line. When Display is initially accessed no PI Line Sets are selected for display. To select a set for display click on the set name.

the selected file appears in the field below the directory tree.piline file and a temporary prompt appears confirming the exported file and folder name. The filename entered appears in the field below the directory tree as a . To export PI lines: 1. Enter a filename for the PI lines in the Filename field using the screen keypad. the set selected in the Edit tab folder). 2. the file is imported and a temporary prompt appears confirming the imported file and folder name. To import PI lines: 1. 65900010 6-9 . Navigate to the directory folder where you want to export the files to (this is usually an external device such as a USB memory stick). Click on the Import button. 3. If the PI lines have been imported or exported from an external memory stick click on the Eject button before removing the device. (i. 4. by clicking on the Export drop down arrow and selecting from the two options. or all sets as listed in the Display list. Click on the Export button. 2. Choose whether to export the currently edited set.e.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Importing and Exporting PI Lines A set of named PI lines can be saved to an external device and imported or exported via the import/export (I/O) tab To import or export a set of PI lines do the following. Navigate to the file in the directory tree.

all other mapping objects can only be created and edited when Radar Maps is selected from the Charts/Radar Maps button. For information on importing or exporting mapping objects see Importing and Exporting Mapping Objects. The display of mapping groups and object types are controlled via the Display folder. For information on creating. For information see Maps Display Settings. Maps can be added. which is then named by the operator. group or import/export mapping object symbols from a database library anywhere within the video circle. 6-10 65900010 . The Mapping menu includes the following tab folders: • Display • Edit • Maps • I/O (Import/Export) All mapping objects are initially created from the Edit folder. deleted or renamed via the Maps folder.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Mapping Features Mapping The Mapping facility includes the ability to display. Objects can be saved in a group called a Map. When the mapping object is saved after editing it is updated on all other nodes. edit. or groups of objects. A mapping object can be edited by the operator when the object is in use on another workstation. Multi-Node Support Mapping Objects can be saved and retrieved from a shared database. including nodes where the object is currently being displayed. Apart from Navigation Marks. editing and deleting mapping objects. Mapping objects are displayed in either Standby or Transmit mode. see Editing Maps Other mapping objects. For information see Maps. can be imported or exported from one workstation to another via the Import / Export folder.

1. Highlight the map to be deleted and click on the Delete Selected Map button. 65900010 6-11 . and delete or rename a previously created map. 2. the screen keypad appears. If no maps have been created then the window is blank. To add a new map do the following: 1. 3. Enter a name for the mapping group using the keypad. Select Yes to confirm. When a name has been entered click the OK button. The folder includes the options to name and add a new map. 3. The screen prompts to confirm the deletion. The name entered is added to the Maps list. 2. Click the Add New Map button. The selected map is removed from the list. the keypad disappears from the screen. To delete an existing map from the list do the following: Deleting a mapping group will result in all the objects in the map also being deleted.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Maps The Maps tab folder displays all the object maps created on the workstation. Click in the Map Name field.

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To rename a selected map do the following: 1. the keypad disappears from the screen. 5. 6-12 65900010 . Enter a new name for the map using the keypad. 4. Click the Rename Selected Map button. 3. Click the Yes button to confirm. The map name selected in the Maps list is changed to the revised name. the screen prompts for confirmation of the rename. Click in the Map Name: field. 2. Highlight the map to be renamed from the Maps list. when a name has been entered click the OK button. the screen keypad appears.

2. Create Radar Maps All mapping objects are created by clicking on the Create Radar Maps button. If no map has been created then <Default Map> only appears. All mapping symbols are assigned to the following types:  Areas  Beacons  Buoys  Danger Points  Geo Shapes  Lines  Nav Marks  Other points The following sections give specific information on the creation of the listed mapping types:  Creating Geo Shapes  Creating Beacons. Click on the Type drop down list and select the mapping object type. To create a mapping object do the following: 1. Click on the Map drop down list and select the map to which subsequently created objects will be assigned. When the Create Radar Maps button is clicked a Radar Map Creation window appears.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Editing Maps All the creating. editing and deleting functions of Radar Maps are done in the Edit tab folder. Buoys and Danger Points  Creating Areas and Lines  Creating Other Points 65900010 6-13 .

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Creating Geo Shapes Geo shapes include a number of geometric objects such as arcs. that may be created. Click the Manually Create button. the name will be displayed underneath the origin point of the shape. To create a geo shape and specify its parameters. The screen cursor displays MO EDIT. or click the OK button and move the cursor into the video circle. To move the shape to another position left click in the Lat/Lon position fields and edit the co-ordinates using the screen keypad. If the shape is closed (circle. lines. 2.) the object appears on the video circle and the Settings tab displays the shape’s Lat/Lon position and default parameters. 6. 7. Click in the area of the screen where you want the symbol positioned. do the following: 1. Either enter a Lat/Lon position and click OK. 6-14 65900010 . squares etc. To change the shape details (rotation. circles. If the shape is a line or polygon click at the first point position.) enter data in the Settings tab. With Geo Shapes selected in the Type drop down list. To create a new type of geo shape repeat the above process. 3. If required. select the type of geo shape from the Symbol/Description drop down list. range. click in the video circle to generate other line or polygon points. segment type etc. enter notes on the shape in the Notes and Labels tab. 4. 5. square etc. radius. If a name is entered in the Display Label field. a window prompts to specify a Lat/Lon position for the object point.

do the following: 1. The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description drop down list includes a brief description of the selected symbol. rotation or to add notes click in the respective fields. click on the Manually Create. The screen prompts for a LAT / LON position 8. Select the mapping type (Beacons.. Each left click in the video circle results in a new symbol of the selected type being created 7. 5. 9. To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click the Done button. 4. 6. enter a position using the screen keypad. the screen cursor displays MO EDIT.. button. A symbol is created in the position specified. 3. buoys and danger point symbols is the same procedure. To create beacons. Buoys or Danger Points) from the Type drop down list. To create the same symbol in a different position move the cursor to another area of the screen and left click. Buoys and Danger Points The creation of beacons. With the mapping type selected click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the object symbol. 2. To create a new object with a manually specified position. Click in the LAT/LON fields. Rotation (if applicable) and Notes. and click the OK button. Move the cursor into the video circle. buoys and danger points. Click in the area of the video circle where you want the symbol positioned. the symbols created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Edit folder. The symbol appears with a bold white box around it and the following fields appear for the created object: Position. 65900010 6-15 . To change the object's position.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Creating Beacons.

The first point is created as a small red circle and its LAT/LON position is shown. The symbol is created in the position specified. 4. enter a position using the screen keypad. A new line or area can now be created on the video circle. Click in the LAT/LON fields. The points previously created appear as white circles and the last created point appears as a red circle. Lines require two points or more and areas require three or more points to be correctly specified. To enter further points left click in the video circle. 7. The screen prompts for a LAT / LON position. 3. and areas created are automatically shaded. 2. From the Radar Map Creation window click on the Type drop down arrow and select either Line or Area. you can edit the position by changing the LAT/LON values. 5. To save the current mapping object and start a new line or area click on the Start New Line/Area button.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Creating Mapping Lines and Areas In the creation of line and area objects you must specify the multiple geographic positions that form the line or area. Click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the symbol you want to create. To create a line or area do the following: 1. 6-16 65900010 . and click the OK button. 6. Move the cursor into the video circle and click in the area of the circle where you want the first point of the line or area positioned. The system automatically connects each point with direct lines. To append a new point to a line or area click on the Manually Create button.

when the symbol was created. the window shows Time Label and Display Label fields. The symbol appears with a bold white box around it and a time label. 65900010 6-17 . The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description list includes a brief description of the selected symbol. 5. To change the time label click in the Hour and Min fields and move the trackball left or right to change the values. 3. To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click the Done button. the symbols created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Edit folder. Click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the required object symbol. 2. The Tidal Stream symbols may be rotated. Move the cursor into the video circle. To rotate the symbol click in the Rotation field and move the trackball left or right to the required angle is shown. To change the line type to Great Circle click on the drop down arrow and select from the list. in hours and minutes. If the symbol is a Tidal Stream a Rotation field is also displayed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools 8. The time label denotes the time. the time label and any display label remain horizontal. In addition to the mapping fields described previously. Only the symbol rotates. the screen cursor displays MO EDIT. 9. The line segment type defaults to Rhumb Line. Select Other Points from the Type drop down list. 4. shown as a four digit number. Creating Other Points The creation of `Other Points' requires a slightly different procedure to other mapping symbols. To create other points symbols do the following: 1. 6. Click in the area of the video circle where you want the symbol positioned.

To exit the Create Radar Maps mode click the Done button. When selected the label is shown with abbreviated letters only e. Editing Objects from the View/Edit Window To edit a previously created map object from the View/Edit window do the following: 1. Click on the View/Edit Radar Maps button. Refer to Creating Radar Maps for information on editing the mapping object's specific parameters. The display label appears to the lower left of the symbol. the selected object is highlighted with a white box and the Radar Map View/Edit window displays the symbol's description and positioning information. the folder returns to the Edit folder. To enter a value click in the Display Label field and move the trackball left or right until the required speed is shown. 6-18 65900010 . the symbols created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Edit folder. Move the cursor over the object to be viewed or edited. the cursor changes from a cross hair to a bidirectional arrow indicator. by right clicking on the object. 2. Certain objects. 8. The display label for a Position Fix is selected from a drop down list. 9. EP for Estimated position. The display label for tidal streams denotes the approximate speed of the tide in kilometres.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 7. The window prompts to left click the object to view or edit. Click on the symbol. The View/Edit window displayed is dependent on the object selected and is similar to the Radar Map Creation window. To exit the View/Edit Radar Maps mode click the Done button. Viewing and Editing Radar Maps Previously created radar map objects may be edited from the View/Edit window. or lines and areas may be edited directly on the video circle. with a range from 0 to 498 kn. 3.g. 4. such as arcs.

65900010 6-19 . Hold down the left key and drag the start and end ang ngles apart by moving the trackball. Editing via dragging of points can only be done do while in this mode. To edit the arc start and end angles: 1. Changing the selection in this drop down list modifies the behaviour of subsequent left clicks inside the video circle. The values shown n in Arc Details will be also adjusted accordingly. li The Left Click Action drop down list allows other types of edit actions to be made for the selected line or area object. the cursor changes to the following symbol. When the start and end angles have been split the arc's range ge may be changed directly on the video circle. Editing Objects from the Video Circle To edit an arc from the video circle do the following: An arc object may have its details edited directly from the vide deo circle. the cursor changes to the following symbol 2. Hold down the left eft key and move the trackball.  Delete Point – Left clicks delete individual points ts that make up the currently selected line or area object.  Add Point to End – Left clicks add new points on to the end of the currently selected line or area.  Add Point to Start – Left clicks add new points on to the start of the currently selected line or area object. To change the range move the cursor over the start angle circ ircle.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide N Navigation Tools If the mapping object to be edited is a line or area the Rad adar Map View/Edit window includes a Left Click Action drop down n list. To fix the start and end angles at a the position displayed release the left key. the arc's range and start angle may ma be adjusted on the display simultaneously. With the object selected move the cursor over the arc's editing point (a white circle at the top of the radius). The following describes the available modes:  Select (Default Mode) – Left clicks select points within w a line or area.

 Add Point – Right clicking within the video circle while a line or area mapping is selected adds a point at the position.  Insert Point – Right-clicking between two existing points in a selected line or area objects provides an Insert Point option. Selecting this option will delete the point that was right clicked. 6-20 65900010 . Selecting this option will add a new point on to the end of the selected line or area object.  Delete Point – Right-clicking on an existing point in a line area object provides a Delete Point option.Right clicking within the video circle while a line or area mapping is selected adds a new point on to the start of the selected line or area object.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To view or edit a line or area object from the video circle do the following: The following editing actions are available by right clicking on the line or area in the video circle. Selecting this option will insert a new point into the line or area object at the location of the right click.  Add Point to Beginning .

Selecting this option will delete the object without confirmation. Deletion of individual points within a line or area object can be done using the Delete Point option described in the preceding section. The cursor displays DEL when moved into the video circle. either from the Radar Map Deletion folder. indicating a delete action can now be performed. or directly from the video circle. If the Confirm check box is unticked the object is immediately deleted from the screen. the cursor lines change from horizontal and vertical cross hairs to diagonal cross hairs. The option of deleting a mapping object by right clicking on it is available independent of the Mapping Edit mode. 2. The Radar Map Deletion folder prompts to left click on the object you wish to delete with a Confirm on Delete check box. Right click on the object in the video circle. Click on the Delete Radar Maps button. 2. 65900010 6-21 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Deleting Radar Maps You can delete previously created mapping objects. by right clicking on the object. If the box is unticked then objects are deleted without confirmation. To delete a mapping object from the Radar Map Deletion folder do the following: 1. 3. To delete a mapping object from the video circle do the following: 1. If the Confirm On Delete check box is ticked then the screen will prompt you to confirm the deletion. Move the cursor over the object to be deleted. a Delete <Symbol Name> option is displayed. Click on the object to delete it. To receive system prompts to confirm deletion before any object is deleted tick the check box. Note that right click deletion will delete a line or area object in its entirety.

To select or deselect all maps and/or displayed types click the Select All or Deselect All buttons below each list. 4. If no maps have been generated then the Displayed Maps window shows <Default Map> only. From the Display folder you can also apply an offset to a specified location for all the radar maps in the video circle. To offset radar maps do the following: To apply a specified range and bearing offset: 1. the default value (0. 2. Displayed Maps and Types Maps and object types that are ticked are enabled for display in the video circle. Tick the Apply Offset check box. Repeat the procedure for the required Bearing value. Move the trackball to the right until the required range is displayed and left click to exit edit mode. Click in the Range field. Or.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Maps Display Settings The Display tab folder lists all available maps and object types.00 NM) change to green (editable). 3. 6-22 65900010 . Unticked maps and types are not displayed. Radar Map Offset The radar maps displayed on the video circle can be offset to a specified range and bearing location or graphically offset by using the cursor to select a particular map object point and then a radar return point on the video circle. The displayed maps and object types are moved to the specified offset range and bearing. to select or deselect specific maps or object types tick or untick the map or type check box.

Move the cursor into the video circle.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools To graphically offset: 1. 65900010 6-23 . 2. Click the Offset Graphically button. the cursor changes to the Position offset graphic. 3. Click on the position in the video circle where you want the object point moved to. Using a particular map object point as a reference click on the point. the window prompts to Click Radar Return. the button changes to prompt: Click Radar Map Object. The radar maps and object types move to the selected location and the Apply Offset check box is automatically ticked. To move the radar maps and object types back to their default position untick the Apply Offset check box.

Click the Import button to import the selected file's contents to your Workstation and a temporary prompt appears confirming that the import was successful. 5. 4.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Importing and Exporting Objects The I/O (Import/Export) tab folder enables you to import or export radar map objects. Navigate to the external drive where the mapping objects reside. If no external device has been inserted the window prompts to `insert removable media'. Select the file to import. 3. If the mapping object has been imported from an external drive (for example. Mapping objects not currently on a workstation can be imported from an external drive. a USB key) click on the Eject before removing the USB. 6-24 65900010 . 2. The field below the directory tree will show any valid object files in the selected folder. Importing Objects To import objects do the following: 1. Mapping objects that have been produced on a workstation can be exported to other workstations via the external drive. Insert a USB key or a 3½ inch floppy disk adaptor into the PC. such as a USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk.

objects assigned to a specific map. 2. Select the map to export by clicking on the drop down arrow. Multi-node Support On a multi-node system a set of mapping objects are distributed and available among all nodes. 5. 3.  Objects in Area .objects within a specified geographic area. Select the external drive to export the objects to. If Objects in Map is selected a Map drop down list appears. the export options available are:  All Objects .  Objects in Map .all mapping objects on your workstation. the LAT/LON fields for Southwest and Northeast corners appear. Click on the drop arrow in the Export field. Define the geographic area you want to export from by editing these LAT/LON position fields. If Objects in Area is selected.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Exporting Objects To export objects do the following: 1. 4. A temporary prompt appears confirming that the operation was successful. When the export options have been selected name the file to be exported in the Filename field and click the Export button. 65900010 6-25 .

Manually Specified Below is automatically highlighted when Lat/Long data is entered. while the distance to a distinct shoreline or point of land measured by radar may be used for a range LOP. 2. Click on Nav Tools in the main menu. if LOPs have been left over from a previous LOP fix.e. LOP 1. 6-26 65900010 . Each symbol includes a reference number i. The Line Of Position menu will show the Lat/Long of the clicked location and a list of charted objects detected near the clicked location. Visual bearings taken on fixed aids to navigation or landmarks such as smokestacks or towers are typically used for bearing LOPs. The symbol remains fixed at the selected location or charted object. Either select the object/location from the list. although clicked location. do the following: 1. When the range of bearing data is entered. If no LOPs have been previously created. the window opens prompting to right click on the display to select a LOP position. Right click on the display at the desired LOP reference point and click Add Line of Position (LOP) in the semi-transparent context menu that appears. specify a Lat/Long position. but the time stamp moves with the line or circle.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Line of Position The geographic location of own ship can be determined by using Lines of Position (LOP). An active point symbol will be displayed at each of the operator-defined LOP positions. 3. Or. Up to six LOPs may be drawn on the chart display. which are created by taking bearings and/or radar measurements from own ship to suitable objects. LOP 2 etc. Creating LOPs To generate one or more LOPs. click the Clear button. and then select Line Of Position in the Nav Tools menu list. Normally one of the objects in the list represents the desired object that the range or bearing will be measured to. based on the speed and course of the vessel. or. When two or more LOPs are created a fix of own ship’s position may be obtained. or a specified lat/lon may also be used. the time of entry is indicated beside the symbol.

is highlighted with a red circle symbol. When the location. object or position has been selected click the OK button. The circle symbol represents the active point used as a bearing object for calculating the LOP fix. Each active point symbol is represented as one of the following: • A triangle for a bearing active point • A circle for a range active point • A triangle inscribed in a circle for a composite (range/bearing) active point The same location or mariner object may be used for multiple bearing and/or range observations at different times. and a red shaded background colour inside the circle. and that time remains indicated in the menu. Range and bearing to the objects can be updated and new fixes can be accepted. When this is done each selection is added to the Line Of Position list with the LOP reference numbers superimposed over each other.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools The location. 4. 5. The LOP is added to the Lines Of Position (LOPs) list and the object or location on the chart display now includes an active point symbol with reference number. The point symbol will be a triangle if a bearing LOP is used. 65900010 6-27 . When data is entered for the desired number of LOPs click Accept Fix to establish a LOP. A triangle inside a circle will be shown if both range and bearing are measured to the same object. Or the data can be cleared when the ship travels far enough that new LOP objects need to be designated for the next LOP fix. When all the desired LOP locations have been added. or selected object. or by radar. enter the bearing or range data for each object/location as measured visually. The LOP associated with each object will appear at the time the data is entered. or a circle if a range LOP is used. based on best available data for vessel course and speed. The line advances.

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

LOP Fixes
When two or more LOPs are drawn and intersect, a temporary position fix
is created. A LOP temporary fix symbol is drawn at the intersection point to
indicate the position of the fix.
When three or more LOPs are created with no
intersection point, the temporary position fix is
drawn at a calculated position, defined as the
magnitude of the difference between the calculated
fix and the GPS fix. The figure to the right shows
two bearing lines and one range ring.

When a fix has been accepted by clicking the Accept Fix button, a
temporary prompt `LOP Sensor - updated' appears and a LOP permanent
fix symbol is drawn at the same position as the temporary fix symbol.
The table below shows the temporary and permanent LOP fix symbols,
together with a brief description.

Symbol Description
The Temporary Fix symbol is created when two or more
LOPs intersect. The symbol moves across the display in
conjunction with the bearing lines/range rings.
A temporary fix symbol is removed if:
 the LOPs are deleted
 the temporary fix expires (expiration time configured
during commissioning)
 a new temporary fix calculation fails
When the operator accepts a position fix, a permanent fix
symbol is created. The symbol includes the current system
time above the symbol and the fix type, e.g. V to the lower
right of the symbol. See the table below for a list of fix types.
A permanent fix symbol remains at the fix position, and is
displayed in addition to a temporary fix symbol.

The following are defined as LOP fix types:
• Estimated Position Fix (EP)
• Visual Fix (V)
• Range Fix (R)
• Composite Type Fix (VR)

6-28 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

A minimum of three LOPs are required for a Visual, Range, or Composite
type fix. Only two LOPs are required for an EP Fix.
The table below gives a description of each LOP fix label.
Label Description
EP Position was obtained using two points.
V Position was obtained by making only bearing observations.
R Position was obtained by making only range observations.

VR Position was obtained by making both bearing and range
observations.

3. Right click on the display to create the first LOP, this could be a
mariner object, the clicked location, or a specified Lat/Long
location. From the semi-transparent context menu select Add Line
Of Position (LOP).
The location, or selected object, is highlighted with a red circle
symbol, with a red shaded background colour inside the circle. The
circle symbol represents the active point used as a bearing object
for calculating the LOP fix.
4. The Line Of Position window appears with a list of potential
locations to select, with the most valid object/location underneath
Clicked Location. Either select the object/location from the list; or,
to specify a Lat/Long position, select Manually Specified Below
and enter the Lat/Long coordinates.

65900010 6-29

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Editing LOPs
To edit LOPs, do the following:
When one or more LOPs are created, the list of
LOPs is displayed in the Line Of Position
window. The time displayed with each LOP is
the system time that the LOP was created.
From the Lines Of Position window the following
actions may be implemented:
• Turn the display of LOPs on or off
• Highlight a LOP
• Change from bearing to range
• Change from bearing angle or range radius
• Change from True bearing to Relative
bearing
• Delete a LOP
• Accept a position fix
• Delete all LOPs from the system
1. To turn all the LOPs off (the default is on) untick the Display Lines
of Position check box. All LOPs in the list retain their values when
the LOPs display is switched off.
2. To highlight a LOP, click its number button, the active point
reference of the LOP and the line are displayed as purple.
3. All LOPs default to true bearing at 0.00. To change from Bearing to
range click the Range radio button. The range defaults to 0.00 NM.
4. To change the bearing angle or range radius click in the respective
field, hold down the left button and move the trackball left to
decrease, or right to increase the bearing/range. When a
bearing/range is entered the bearing line or range radius line
appears on the chart display as a thin solid purple line. The bearing
line or range ring moves across the display, based on own ship's
course and speed over ground.
5. To change from True bearing to Relative bearing, click the T
button, the button toggles between T (true) and R (relative).
6. To delete a specific LOP from the list click on the Delete button
immediately below the number. The LOP is deleted from the list
and the chart display, with the existing LOPs retaining their
numbering.

6-30 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

7. To accept a position fix, click the Accept Fix button. A permanent
fix symbol is created, see the LOP Fixes section below.
8. To delete all LOPs from the system click the Clear button. All LOPs
are removed from the display and the Line Of Position window. A
permanent fix symbol remains on the display after the Clear button
has been clicked.
Using a LOP Position Sensor
A LOP fix may be used as the active data source
for the position sensor, see Position Values in
Sensor Management.
The LOP Position Sensor displays the Lat/Lon
coordinates of the permanent fix.
If the LOP Position sensor is selected, own ship
is re-positioned so that its CCRP is at the centre
of the permanent fix symbol.

The amount of time that the LOP position sensor will be considered
usable after a fix is set in the configuration tool (default time 300
seconds). Note that LOP position sensor data is dead reckoned
between each fix, and this data will become degraded after a
period of time.

65900010 6-31

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

History Tracks
History tracks are lines indicating the past
locations of position sources. Two history track
lines may be displayed simultaneously; primary
and secondary.
The primary and secondary history tracks are
shown as solid lines in the same colour as the
heading line, indicating the past location of own
ship from data provided by the selected
position source.

Secondary history tracks may be selected if the Position sensor source is
changed, see `Position Values’ in Chapter 4 `Sensor Management’.
Event marks may be added to the primary history track, with each event
mark time-stamped adjacent to the event symbol.
Primary History Track
The display of the primary history track defaults to off with the History
Tracks window showing time marks and track length data greyed out. To
turn the primary history track on tick the Display History Tracks check
box, the display controls become editable.
The time of day that own ship was at specific position is displayed regularly
along the track against time marks (e.g. against every 10th time mark).
The time value is indicated in UTC or local time, depending on the selection
made for current time in the Time Management window.
Time marks are small lines drawn perpendicular to the history track. Time
marks may be turned on or off by ticking or unticking the Display Time
Marks check box.

6-32 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Changing the Track Length
The track length value is the maximum amount of time that the history track
will be displayed on the screen. The history track period is variable from 0.0
minutes to 8.0 hours. The default period is the maximum history track
length of 8 hours.
The `Ignore Before' feature defaults to off (0 minutes). If a value is entered
the history track prior to this time (i.e. the track length) will not be displayed.
Once selected, the start time of the track remains fixed and the elapsed
time increments automatically.
The Ignore Before time will always be equal to or less than the
Track Length time.
To change the track length and `ignore before', do the following:
1. To change the track length click in the field and move the trackball
left or right to decrease or increase the track length time. As the
value is changed the tick marks and time data on the history track
change accordingly
2. To change the `Ignore before’ time click in the field and move the
trackball right to increase the time. As the value is changed the
history track shortens depending on the value entered.
Secondary History Tracks
The position sources available for history track display include the
following:
 LOP Sensor
 configured position sensors (e.g. GPS)
 manual position sensor
 dead reckoned position sensor.
To select a position source for a secondary history track tick the source
check box.
When a position source is changed, the primary history track transitions to
the newly selected position source, while maintaining a smooth continuous
line.
Position sources for secondary tracks can be individually selected and
turned off.

65900010 6-33

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Event Marks
Event marks may be applied to the primary history
track. These are displayed as an event mark
symbol with a time stamp. The time value is
indicated in UTC or local time, depending on the
selection made in the Time Management window.
To generate an event click the Add Event button. An orange rectangular
marker is shown on the history track at the current CCRP position, with the
current time in hours, minutes and seconds, adjacent to the mark.
The display of events can be toggled on and off by ticking the Display
Events check box. When an event is added to a history track the marker
will appear at its original position whenever Display Events is switched on.

If the display of history tracks is off when an event is added, the
history tracks display is switched on automatically.

6-34 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Parallel Cursor
The Parallel Cursor facility enables a rotating
parallel cursor centred on own ship's CCRP to
be displayed.
The parallel cursor graphics consist of two
dashed orthogonal lines (axes) extending to the
edge of the video circle with their axis crossing
point at CCRP, the end points of each line are
marked with a semi-circular marker at the edge
of the video circle. A series of equally spaced
dashed parallel lines, spaced at the currently set
range ring interval, are shown on either both
sides of the CCRP (full mode) or one side of the CCRP (half mode).

To access the facility click on the Parallel Cursor field from the Nav Tools
menu list. The Parallel Cursor window is displayed.
To turn on the Parallel Cursor and change settings do the following:
1. To turn the parallel cursor on tick the Display On check box. The
first time the parallel cursor is displayed, one cross axis runs
parallel to ship’s heading and the display mode is in full.
2. When the parallel cursor is displayed the Interval field changes
from Cursor Off to displaying the line interval in nautical miles
(NM). To increase or decrease the NM interval change the range
scale.
3. To toggle between Full and Half mode click on the Display Mode
drop down arrow.

65900010 6-35

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

4. From the Bearing Type drop down arrow select between Relative
and True. When True is selected the parallel cursor is azimuth
stabilised (i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to
north). When Relative is selected the parallel cursor is unstabilised
(i.e. maintains a constant orientation with respect to ship’s
heading). When True is selected and the heading becomes invalid
the parallel cursor is not displayed.
5. To rotate the parallel cursor either click on one of the four semi-
circular markers, hold down the left key and move the trackball left
or right to change bearing.
Or:
6. Click in the Bearing field, the text becomes green (editable). Move
the trackball left or right to change the bearing degree, the parallel
cursors move dependent on the values entered.
7. To realign the parallel cursor along ship's heading click on the
Reset to Ship Heading button.

6-36 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Display Settings Features
Display Settings
The Display Settings menu includes the following tab folders:
• Ownship
• EBL
• Grid
Ownship
The Ownship tab folder enables the display of
synthetics data for own ship to be controlled.
The folder includes the following options:
 Beam Line Length adjustment
 True Scale Ship - own ship display
settings, including:
 Off
 Default Symbol
 Custom Symbol
 Stern Line
 Antenna Position
 Own ship vector settings, including:
 Vector tick marks display
 Vector tick marks interval time
 Vector arrowheads display
 Ground Stabilized Vectors, including:
 Predicted Vector display
 Ownship Vector display
 Predicted Outlines, including:
 Predicted Ship display
 Predicted Path display

65900010 6-37

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar
ar User Guide

Beam Line Length
The length of the beam line defaults to 10mm, this is the minimum
um length
the line extends each side of own ship's CCRP.
To lengthen the beam line left click in the Beam Line
Length field, the value figure changes to green
(editable). Move the trackball right to increase the length
(maximum 99.9mm), or if the length has been increased
previously, left to decrease. Left click again to exit the
editing process.
True Scale Ship
When the Off check box is ticked the screen shows own ship draw rawn as a
minimised symbol, irrespective of range scale.
When the Default Symbol check box is ticked the screen shows a true
scale outline of own ship based on the configured length and bea eam of the
ship (as entered in the Configuration tool). The true scale outlinee may
m be
displayed if the greatest dimension of the ship is larger than 6mm m on the
display.
When the Custom Symbol check box is ticked the screen shows so ownship
drawn to represent the actual outline of the ship. Note that Custom
tom Symbol
will only be enabled if an outline definition for own ship has beenn defined in
the Configuration tool. If no custom symbol has been defined then en this
setting is disabled.
The default symbol and custom symbol are displayed in addition n to
t the
heading line and beam line.
For information on the symbols available for own ship see Own Ship S
Symbols.
Stern Line
When the Display Stern Line check box is ticked the
screen shows own ship's stern line, in addition to the
heading line. The stern line is drawn from the CCRP, i.e.
where the heading line joins the beam line.
The stern line is drawn reciprocal of the current heading
line. For example, if the presentation mode is Head Up
the heading line is at 000° and the stern line at 180°.

6-38 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide N
Navigation Tools

Antenna Position
The antenna position may be displayed when own ship is in truetru scale only.
The antenna position is shown as a pair of small
crossed lines, between 1mm and 2mm long, centred at
the location on the display corresponding to the position
of the radar antenna. Note that the antenna position
may be in a different location to the CCRP, as shown in
the figure to the right. For information on setting the
antenna position and CCRP, see `Top Unit
Configuration' in Chapter 1, `Configuration' of the Ship's Manu
nual (Volume
2).
Own Ship Vector Controls
Vector Tick Marks
Tick marks can displayed along the vector length at one minut ute intervals,
with every sixth tick mark is shown with double thickness, forr more
m details
see Own Ship Symbols.
To turn vector tick marks on or off tick or untick the Display Ve
Vector Tick
Marks check box.
To change the default tick mark interval time from 1.0 minute, e, left click in
the interval field, the value figure changes to green (editable).
). Move the
trackball left to decrease the time (0.1 minute minimum), or right
rig to
increase the time (60 minutes maximum). Left click again to accept
ac the
value and exit the editing process.
Vector Arrow Head
When the Display Vector Arrowhead check box is ticked the screensc shows
the own ship's vector arrowhead (double arrowhead in ground nd stabilised
mode; single arrowhead in water stabilised mode).
Ground Stabilised Vectors
The default setting for ground stabilised vectors is Ownship ve
vector
selected, see Own Ship Symbols. To turn predicted vector on n tick the
Predicted Vector check box. When predicted vector is selecte cted the
ownship vector check box is automatically de-selected.

The default presentation, set at commissioning, is notot to allow
Ownship Vector and Predicted Vector to be displayed ed
simultaneously. Although the option of simultaneous s display
d may
be selected from the Configuration tool, this setting is NOT in
accordance with IEC 62388.

65900010 6-39

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar
ar User Guide

Predicted Vector
The Predicted vector tool is used to indicate where
own ship will go based on current speed, course,
and rate of turn. Predicted vector is NOT intended
to access risk of collision.
Predicted vector is a vector arc drawn from own
ship's CCRP with a radius based on the selected
Rate of Turn sensor and the current ground
stabilised course and speed. The vector may be
drawn as an arc, or a straight line, depending on
ship's current course. The vector is drawn up to six minutes long g with
w a dot
indicating each minute, but is restricted by the time of the targett vector.
v
Target vectors and own ship vectors can be water stabilised or ground
gr
stabilised, but the predicted vector is always ground stabilised. If the
system is in water stabilised mode ship's vector is drawn along the th heading
line, in addition to the predicted vector.
A warning `Predicted Vector Mismatch' is raised if the currentt speedsp is
water stabilised when the predicted vector is displayed.
To turn off predicted vector and return to ownship vector untick theth
Predicted Vector check box.
Predicted Outlines
Predicted Ship
The predicted ship indicates a series of predicted
position and heading samples of own ship based
on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
Predicted ship is drawn as a series of true scale
own ship symbols, shown as thin orange outlines
displayed along the length of the ship vector. The
true scale outlines are drawn regardless of range
scale.
The spacing between each symbol is equal to the Vector Tick Ma arks
Interval setting. The number of ship symbols drawn is equal to the vector
time (see Vector Modes) divided by the tick mark interval setting,
g, rounded
down to the nearest whole number.

If the vector tick marks are set too high, the predicted ship
hip outline
will be spaced far apart and may not be visible on the disp
isplay
depending on scale and ship speed.

6-40 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Predicted ship will be displayed regardless of whether the display setting is
in predicted vector, predicted path or COG vector. When predicted vector is
enabled the location of each predicted ship CCRP is shown as a small dot
on the vector line.
If the system is in water stabilised mode and predicted vector/path is
switched off, the predicted ship outlines continue to follow the ground
stabilised vector path.
Predicted Path
Predicted Path is used to indicate the area that the ship will pass through
based on current speed, course, and rate of turn.
The predicted path is two thick orange lines
originating at the inside fore corner and the
outside aft corner of own ship, if the ship is
turning the lines are shown as arced. A true
scale ship is drawn at the end of the
predicted path.

Fore and aft are relative to the direction that own ship is moving
and do not necessarily relate to bow and stern.

Predicted path is drawn to a maximum vector time of six minutes. The
predicted path is decreased from its maximum length if the vector time is
decreased below six minutes.
If the system is in water stabilised mode the predicted path continues to
follow the ground stabilised vector path.

65900010 6-41

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Next Turn EBL
The system supports the input of a Next Turn EBL sentence that transfers
data from a VMS, this data can then be represented graphically on screen.
In order to display Next Turn EBL graphics an input must have been
previously configured.
The Next Turn EBL is used while own ship is planning and executing a
turn.
To turn the EBL on or off tick the Next Turn
EBL check box.
A valid compass input is required to display
the Next Turn EBL graphics; if the heading is
unusable then the graphics will not be displayed.
The system uses the following VMS information to display the Next Turn
EBL:
• Bearing of initial line, degrees with respect to north
• Length of initial line (can be zero if initial line is not to be drawn)
• Radius of arc
• Bearing of final line, degrees with respect to north
• Display status of Next Turn EBL, on or off
• Position of origin of Next Turn EBL, fore/aft and port/ starboard,
with respect to the centre of the ship
The final line is always drawn to the edge of the chart window.

6-42 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools

Grid
A latitude/longitude (LAT/LON) grid can be displayed on the chart window.
The LAT/LON grid values are taken from the latest valid position of own
ship’s CCRP, as reported by the Position sensor.
The LAT/LON grid is only displayed when the presentation mode is N-UP.
The grid is removed from the display if the presentation mode is changed to
H-UP or C-UP.

The grid display will vary between two latitude and three longitude lines,
and four latitude and four longitude lines, based on the selected range
scale of the display.
The LAT/LON grid will not be displayed when
the chart orientation is 45° to 135° and from
225° to 315°
To turn the grid on or off tick the Display
Lat/Lon Grid check box.

65900010 6-43

the operator selects a location and head bearing for the anchorage. the Status tab provides information on ownship position and bearing with respect to the planned anchorage parameters. or Anchor Approach. During Anchoring Planning. Anchoring Display includes diagrams of the display options for Anchor Drop and Anchor Approach. and monitor the anchor drag after the ship is anchored. During Anchor Approach. The Anchoring function may be in Anchor Watch (anchor dropped). A drop bearing object and a drop range object may also be planned.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Anchoring Anchoring Description The Anchoring feature allows the operator to plan an anchorage. The goal is to approach the planned anchorage over the head bearing track and use ship's bearing to anchorage. control the display of the anchorage parameters. Drop Anchor is activated from the Status tab to begin the Anchor Watch mode. Anchoring Status is used to guide the ship to the planned anchorage location. and the ship's range to a drop range object to determine whether the ship's hawsepipe is over the planned anchorage location. When anchor is dropped the Anchoring Feature On check box is automatically switched on in the Status tab. monitor the anchoring status. any drop bearing objects. Once the ship is at the desired anchorage location. Settings for anchor depth and chain scope are also entered from the Planning tab. 6-44 65900010 .

Precision Anchoring An anchor position may be selected. either manually enter a Lat/Long position using the screen keypad. With anchoring on. and/or a single drop range object.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide N Navigation Tools Anchoring Planning The Anchoring Planning tab enables a precise anchorage location to be entered. move the cursor to the desired location on the display and left click. The operator should enter a head bearing to steer for anchorage. see the figure below. and may also plan a single drop bearing object. centred on the location. 65900010 6-45 . click on the On Chart button. When an anchorage location is selected. by entering Lat/Long coordinate values or by selecting a location on the chart display. the system draws an anchorage approach display. or.

The head bearing is the planned course to steer as the ship approaches anchorage. e. The inner interval range is from 1 to 100 metres in 1 unit increments.g. the outer interval range is from 5 to 500 metres in 5 unit increments. Drop Objects Drop Objects are conspicuous landmarks that are used as aids to navigation in approaching the Anchor Point. Range Rings The range rings provide a quick visual indication of the distance from ownship to the Anchor Point. or right to increase the value. move the cursor to the object or location on the display and left click. To enter a head bearing. The head bearing value is displayed on the chart at the start of the head bearing line.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Anchor Track Anchor Track enables a true head bearing to the anchor point to be entered or selected on the chart display out to a distance of 5000 yards. Alternatively an object on the chart display may be selected as a head bearing marker (HBM). if you enter a value of 90º the system draws an anchor track at 270º. To change the spacing interval click in the field and move the trackball left to decrease. There are two types of drop objects: • Drop Range Object • Drop Bearing Object 6-46 65900010 . When anchor approach is displayed (see the figure in Display) the following types of range rings are displayed: • Inner range circles • Outer range circles The Inner Interval and Outer Interval values show the spacing interval in metres between the circles. To select a HBM click on the On Chart button. The head bearing is drawn at the opposite bearing to the value entered. either click in the Head Brg field and move the trackball left or right to set the bearing angle.

If enabled in the Display options. positioning the cursor over the object and left clicking. If no chart object is identified after a query. A DBO can be manually selected by specifying its Lat/Long coordinates. or by clicking the On Chart button. The range value from the CCRP to the DRO is continuously updated on the Status tab. drag circle radius and swing circle radius. the selected cursor position is used to calculate the drop bearing value. the selected cursor position is used to calculate the drop range value. A DRO can be manually selected by specifying its Lat/Long coordinates. positioning the cursor over the object and left clicking. 65900010 6-47 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Drop Bearing Object A Drop Bearing object (DBO) is an object that can be observed at a planned bearing when ownship is correctly positioned to drop anchor. Watch Settings The Watch Settings area allows the operator to enter values for anchor depth and chain scope. The figure below shows a diagram of the Anchor Settings parameters. Drop Range Object A Drop Range object (DRO) is an object that can be observed at a planned range when ownship is correctly positioned to drop the anchor. These values are used to generate an alarm if an anchor drag is detected. the display shows an outline circle in purple with the letters DR inside to visually indicate the current DRO position. The bearing value from the CCRP to the DBO is continuously updated on the Status tab. or by clicking the On Chart button. If no chart object is identified after a query. If enabled in the Display options. which are used by the system to calculate the values for chain length. the display shows an outline circle in purple with the letters DB inside to visually indicate the current DBO position.

Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Anchor Depth The Anchor Depth is the water depth value at the Anchor Point. 5. The chain length scope may be one of the following values: None ne. Chain Length The chain length is the distance from the hawsepipe to the ancho hor. An anchor chain length may be entered from m 1 and 1000 metres when the chain scope is set to None. Chain Length Scope The chain length scope is a multiplier value used to calculate thee chain length. the system aut utomatically calculates the chain length as the product of the anchor depth andnd the chain length scope. If a chain length scope has a value of 4. fe the chain length will be 120 feet. when switched on in Chart Settings. 6 or 7. 6-48 65900010 . 4. 6. or 7. An anchor depth of between 1 and 100 metres may be entered when w the chain scope is set any value other than None. For example. 5. if a scope of 6 is selected in a depth of 20 feet. The depth at the anchor point may be retrieved from the e chart c soundings. An alert is generated when the automatically calculated chain leng ength is greater than the configured maximum usable chain length. An alert is generate ated if a sounding can not be located within the distance from the anchora rage to 10 percent of the current range scale.

The drag circle radius is automatically calculated as equal to the chain length plus the distance from the hawsepipe to the CCRP. triggers an alarm indicating that the anchor drag limit has been exceeded. Display The Display tab includes the following anchor display options (the default setting is all display options enabled). The following display options only apply when in anchor drop mode: • Drag Ring . The display of the drag circle may be switched on or off at the Display tab. • Swing Ring . The figure below shows a diagram of the Anchor Drop display options.the drag ring is a boundary where. This symbol is displayed in both anchor range display and anchor drop mode. if violated. The drag ring is displayed when the anchor is dropped. An alarm is generated if the distance from CCRP to the Anchor Point exceeds the length of the drag circle radius. Swing Radius The Swing radius is a circle centred on the Anchor Point with a radius automatically calculated as equal to the distance from the Anchor Point to the ship’s stern. if violated. • Anchor Symbol .when enabled an anchor symbol is displayed in a purple outline circle over the anchor position.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Drag Radius The Drag Radius is used as a boundary where. The drag circle is not rendered if the diameter is less than 2 mm on the display. The display of the swing circle may be switched on or off at the Display tab. 65900010 6-49 .the swing ring is centred on the Anchor Point with a radius equal to the distance from the Anchor Point to the ship’s stern. triggers an alarm indicating that the anchor drag limit has been exceeded.

The radius of the letting go circlele is equal to the distance from the CCRP to the hawsepipe.the inner range rings are rendered between b the letting go circle and the inner most outer range circle. • Letting Go Circle . • Outer Range Rings .a drop range object is an object that at can be observed at a planned range when ownship is correctly positioned p to drop the anchor.the letting go circle is represented as s a dotted line. The spacing between the th outer rings may be changed in the Range Rings `Outer Interval val' field.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide The following display options only apply when in anchor approach ch display: • Drop Bearing Object . Anchoring Planning includes an illustration of the anchor approac ach display. which provides a visualal indication of when to drop anchor. see Planning. le. 6-50 65900010 . • Drop Range Object .the head bearing is the planned course to steer as the ship approaches anchorage. • Inner Range Rings .the outer range rings are rendered d and a labelled at regular intervals from the letting go circle to the starting position of the head bearing line.a drop bearing object is an objectt that t can be observed at a planned bearing when ownship is correcrectly positioned to drop anchor. • Head Bearing . see Planning. centred at the Anchor Point. The spacing between the inner rings may be changed in the RangeR Rings `Inner Interval' field.

65900010 6-51 . the anchor drop display is drawn. The warnings are escalated to alarms when own ship sails beyond the drag and swing rings. based on wind. the Status tab continues to show data based on the last placed anchorage position. A line is drawn from the hawsepipe to the anchor location. the application periodically monitors the ship's position to see if the anchor is being dragged. The Anchoring Feature On check box in the Anchorage area is automatically switched on when Drop Anchor is activated. During the Anchor Watch mode.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Status The Status tab enables you to monitor the anchor drag after the ship is anchored. This line is initially at zero length and represents any movement own ship makes from anchor position. tide or current (see the figure below). Anchor Watch Mode Click the Drop Anchor button to switch to Anchor Watch mode. If the Anchoring Feature On check box is switched off. generated from values entered at Planning. set to ownship hawsepipe position. An anchor drag alarm is generated if movement is detected in relation to the Anchor Point. All values in the Status tab are read-only. Any movement is monitored on the Anchorage area of the Status folder. The following sub sections describe the values shown in the Anchoring Status folder. Suitable warnings are generated when own ship passes over the drag ring (inner ring) and beyond the swing ring (outer ring).

• Head Brg .range from Letting Go Position to drop bearing object Wind Velocity The Wind Velocity area displays the following read-only data: • Speed . • XTD .cross track distance to anchor track Reference Drop Objects The Reference Drop Objects area displays the following read-only data: • Bearing .planned bearing to the anchorage (click the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).estimated remaining time to anchorage • Anchor Brg .wind speed (Relative or True) • Direction .bearing from Letting Go Position to drop bearing object (click the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).ships range to anchorage • TTG .hawsepipe's true bearing to planned anchorage (click the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).wind direction (Relative or True) 6-52 65900010 .ships bearing from CCRP to drop bearing object (click the bearing button to toggle between True and Relative).range from CCRP to drop bearing object • Drop Range .Lat/Long of planned anchorage • Range . • Drop Brg . • Range .Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Anchorage The Anchorage area displays the following read-only data: • Latitude/Longitude .

The operator may subsequently be able to adjust the bearing. range and time values immediately counting up. A MOB event may also be activated from the Man Overboard window from the Nav Tools menu. a symbol is displayed on the chart display representing `Oscar' – the man in the water. • Range (nm) . When a MOB event has been activated. When an MOB operation is active the button at the bottom of the window displays Cancel Oscar. When the Oscar button is clicked the symbol is dropped at own ship's CCRP. • Bearing (T) . Clicking the Start button on this window also drops the Oscar symbol at own ship's CCRP. range or elapsed time of the Oscar while the MOB event is active from the Man Overboard window by clicking the Manual Edit button. Unlike clicking the Oscar button on the upper toolbar.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Man Overboard The Man Overboard (MOB) function enables management of a MOB emergency. A MOB operation may be immediately activated by clicking on the Oscar button in the upper toolbar. When MOB is active. • Elapsed Time .the distance from CCRP to Oscar. 65900010 6-53 . the Oscar button is displayed with an orange background and the Man Overboard window appears with the bearing.time since the MOB event started.the relative bearing from CCRP to Oscar. the Man Overboard window displays the following read- only data: • Bearing (R) .the true bearing from CCRP to Oscar. accessing the Man Overboard window does NOT immediately generate a MOB operation.

Or. 3.Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To manually enter the MOB values do the following: 1. To turn off the MOB event. Done and Cancel Edit appear. enter values in the relevant fields and click the Done button the Oscar symbol is re-drawn at the revised location. From the Man Overboard window. click on the Manual Edit button. The bearing. From the Man Overboard window. click on the Select A Position On Chart button and move the cursor into the chart display. To edit the MOB position. The Bearing. click the Yes button to confirm. 3. Click in the display area to position the MOB. The button changes to Cancel and the cursor displays the Oscar symbol below the cross. Range and Elapsed Time values become editable and additional buttons. An Action Required window appears prompting to confirm cancellation of the MOB Event. Click the Start button to begin the MOB operation. click the Cancel Edit button. range and time values begin counting up and the Oscar button is displayed with an orange background. The Oscar symbol is removed from the display and the button changes to display Start. The Oscar symbol is dropped at the selected position with the range and bearing from the CCRP to the Oscar displayed and the Start button at the bottom of the window active. 2. Note that the MOB operation is not active until the Start button is pressed. 6-54 65900010 . 2. to cancel the edit operation. click on the Cancel Oscar button. To select an MOB position on the chart do the following: 1.

The Description area of the window shows Lat/Lon position information and all other data relevant to the Nav Mark. The nav mark is highlighted on the chart display with a red circle and a red transparent background fill. Right click anywhere within the video circle. Select Create Nav Mark from the window. To de-select the nav mark click on the Clear Query button. a semi-transparent window appears at the position selected. The Chart Query window opens on the display. When a Nav Mark is created and viewed in Radar Maps mode only the information note symbol in a square box is displayed. 3. 2. In the Results tab click on the Point + box and then click on Navigation Mark in the directory tree. Nav Marks can be created in both Standby and Transmit modes. To view data on the Nav Mark do the following: 1.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Navigation Tools Navigation Marks Navigation marks (Nav Marks) are generated by the operator to indicate positions of interest. To create a Nav Mark do the following: 1. all presentation modes and range scales. The highlight is removed from the nav mark and the data in the Description field is cleared. 2. Right click on the Nav Mark and select Query Chart from the semi transparent window. 65900010 6-55 . A Nav mark is created at the selected position. When a Nav Mark is created and viewed in Chart mode a vertical orange line with a dot at the end is displayed below the symbol box. The Nav Mark is displayed as an orange information note symbol in a square box.

Charts. The Nav Mark is deleted from the system without confirmation. 6-56 65900010 .Navigation Tools Radar/Chart Radar User Guide For further information on Chart Query see Query Results and Query Options in Chapter 12. a semi- transparent window appears at the position selected. 2. To delete a Nav Mark do the following: 1. Right click on the Nav Mark. Select the Delete Navigation Mark from the window.

Alarm Announcements Alarms and warnings are indicated visually and audibly. Alarm announcements are raised until they are acknowledged. Alarm announcements can only be cancelled if the condition causing them has been dealt with successfully. Warnings and Cautions. the system may provide the acknowledgement automatically and clear the alarm. when the alarm system automatically resets to normal operating condition. prompts (permanent and/or temporary) are raised to communicate information that does not necessarily require operator action. For some announcements. An unacknowledged announcement displays as a flashing colour whereas an acknowledged. Alarm announcements are initially displayed on the Alarm Status Indicator. Cautions are only indicated visually. The system uses three different types of announcements: • Alarms • Warnings • Cautions In addition. which enables the operator to either change the length of time the alarm buzzer is temporarily muted. displays a constant colour. see Alarm Status Indicator. 65900010 7-1 . but still existing announcement.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Chapter 7 Alarms The alarm management system generates announcements related to displayed information or equipment malfunction. warnings and cautions which can be raised by the VisionMaster system and any remedial action to be taken. For a list of the alarms. or mute the alarm buzzer for an unlimited period of time. via the alarm buzzer. from where they can be acknowledged. and the visual indications of individual alarms remain until the fault has been corrected. The Alarms menu includes a Mute Settings facility. see List of Alarms.

or Prompts in the Alarms menu.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Prompts Prompts appear directly underneath the Alarms field. External announcements are displayed and acknowledged through the CAM watch mode. see Prompts. see Picture Freeze. see Alarm Display. see Central Alarm Management. A Prompts window listing permanent and temporary prompts (when they appear) may be accessed either by clicking on the Prompts field. 7-2 65900010 . Announcement Sources There are two types of announcement sources: internal and external. Internal announcements are displayed and acknowledged through the Alarm display menu. Internal announcements are announcements generated by the VisionMaster system. In the event of a picture freeze the prompt field will freeze on a prompt or system time. External announcements are those relayed to the Central Alarm Management (CAM) by external sources.

The display of announcements in the Alarm Status Indicator is prioritised. the background colour shows the system background colour and the message No Alarms is displayed. If no active announcements exist. or 2. If unacknowledged announcements exist. the background colour displays a steady colour based on the highest acknowledged announcement category. When alarms have been acknowledged in the alarm status indicator but alarms are still active. followed by warnings and then cautions. The alarm is removed from the Alarm Status Indicator and. the background colour changes to a flashing colour based on the highest unacknowledged announcement category. To view details on Alarms right click on the Alarm Status Indicator. The alarm remains listed (non flashing) in the Alarms Display list as long as the condition exists. if other unacknowledged alarms exist. 65900010 7-3 . the Alarm Display menu appears.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Status Indicator The Alarm Status Indicator displays the current alarm announcement status of the system. by clicking on the ACK ALARM button on the control panel. is replaced by the next in order of priority. The Alarm Status Indicator's background colour is based on the state and status of active announcements in the system. either by clicking on the message in the alarm status indicator. see Alarm Display. with outstanding alarms first. these are:  red for alarm  yellow for warnings and cautions You can acknowledge Alarms and Warnings in one of two ways: 1.

The alarm continues to be shown in the indicator until it is either: • acknowledged. 7-4 65900010 . • automatically cleared. the alarm with the highest priority is shown. the buzzer will only sound when there are unacknowledged alarms or warnings. unless the Hide Acknowledged box has been ticked. If more than one alarm condition exists. Acknowledged Alarms If an alarm has been acknowledged. see Alarm Display No Alarms If there are no alarms the caption No Alarms is displayed in the Alarm Status Indicator and the system background colour is shown. that alarm appears with a flashing background colour in the Alarm status indicator and the Alarm display. but the fault has not been corrected.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Status There are three types of alarm status: • Unacknowledged Alarms When an alarm condition is detected. If the internal buzzer is enabled. the message Alarms Present is displayed in non- flashing red or yellow in the alarm status indicator. The acknowledged alarm remains listed (non-flashing) in the Alarms Display area. or • replaced with an alarm of higher priority.

Alarms are messages that require immediate attention or user action. announcements are divided into Alarms. or right click on the Alarm Status Indicator. Within the Alarms window. • An acknowledged alarm announcement whose condition is still active will remain listed in the Alarm Display window with no background colour. • An acknowledged alarm announcement whose condition is no longer active is removed from the Alarm Display window. The announcement will change indication as follows: • An unacknowledged Alarm whose condition is active will appear with a flashing red background. Warnings and Cautions. • An unacknowledged alarm announcement whose condition is no longer active will appear with a flashing grey background. whereas Warnings and Cautions indicate less critical conditions. 65900010 7-5 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Display To view a list of all the currently active Alarm announcements. including alarms acknowledged on the status indicator. • An unacknowledged Warning or Caution whose condition is active will appear with a flashing yellow background. You can acknowledge Alarm announcements either by clicking on the selected announcement in the list. click on the Alarms field in the menu list. The Alarms window shows the current alarm state and provides a description and a means of acknowledging alarms. The most recent alarms are shown at the top of the list. or by clicking on the ACK ALARM button on the control panel.

Primary and Secondary (see List of Alarms. 7-6 65900010 . Details of the announcement. Routes etc. Targets.). time and description are shown below the list. although if the alarm condition is still present the message Alarms Present is shown in red in the alarms message field. System alarms are always shown as the highest priority.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Viewing Announcement Details To view more information on a particular Alarm announcement right click on the text. To show all acknowledged Alarm announcements.g. Grouping reduces the type and number of alarms displayed. Acknowledged Alarm announcements are hidden from the display. including activation date. Hide Acknowledged To hide acknowledged announcements tick the Hide Acknowledged check box. untick the Hide Acknowledged check box. by de-classifying less critical alarms. with the exception of emergency alarms. In addition to acknowledging individual alarms the operator can acknowledge an entire group of alarms by clicking on the group title. regardless of the type of alarm in the system group. The system lists announcements in their relevant group (e. and prioritises the alarms within each group as Distress. Warnings and Cautions). Sort by Group To arrange Alarms announcements into groups tick the Sort by Group check box.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Buzzer An alarm buzzer is physically located in the LCD monitor. The system will automatically re-enable the buzzer once the mute length period has elapsed. if Unlimited is selected the buzzer is permanently muted when the buzzer icon is clicked. 65900010 7-7 . The length of time that the buzzer is muted is defined in Mute Settings and can be set to between one minute and 999 minutes. An unacknowledged Caution will not activate the buzzer. To re-enable the buzzer click on the icon again. The buzzer is connected to one of the following types of discrete outputs to the LCD monitor:  PCIO  Basic Control Panel  Labjack  Serial Port The buzzer will beep continuously when an unacknowledged Alarm is active. the red line is removed. When the buzzer is muted a red diagonal line appears through the icon. The alarm will sound three short beeps when an unacknowledged Warning is active. The mute length may also be set to Unlimited. The buzzer can be temporarily muted by clicking on the icon to the right of the Alarm Status Indicator.

see Appendix A Station In Control in Chapter 3. These are known as local announcements and relate to conditions that impact only the node that generated the alarm. These are known as system announcements. Basic Operation of Radar. When the operator acknowledges an announcement on a node it is shown as acknowledged on all nodes in the system. computer hardware problems. target alarms. etc. an announcement generated on one node will be displayed and audibly announced on all nodes in the system. transceiver and video errors. In general. 7-8 65900010 . Some announcements are displayed and audibly announced only on the node that generated it (unless the announcement is configured to be displayed on all nodes at commissioning).Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms on a Multi-node System Alarm management enables system features to designate announcements (alarms and warnings) that they generate as either `System' or `Local'. Alarms cannot be acknowledged if Station In Control (SIC) is enabled and your node is assigned as `Never In Control'. authorization/licensing errors. database connection errors. Examples of local alarms include: display warnings.

if more than one permanent prompt is active the prompts are shown in rotation until the condition creating the prompt no longer exists. When a temporary prompt is active a pale coloured background field appears below the permanent prompt field with the prompt message. Active prompts list all permanent prompts on the node. in parenthesis. Permanent prompts are displayed on a normal system colour background. The window is divided into Active Prompts and Recent Prompts. which links to the relevant page in the Help Guide. that the prompt was generated. These prompts are listing for approximately 90 seconds and then removed from the column. with the time. or may display settings. Temporary Prompts Temporary prompts are general system responses to a user interaction and are displayed briefly for a commissioned time period. as they occur. together with a hyperlink `Standard Chart Display'. provide instruction to the operator. 65900010 7-9 . Recent prompts list temporary prompts.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Prompts Prompts appear in the field directly underneath the Alarms and Warnings field and can be either temporary or permanent. Permanent prompts Permanent prompts denote a state or mode of operation. usually around 5 seconds. Prompts Window A prompts window listing all the permanent prompts and temporary prompts.

or the mute length is set to Unlimited. 3. Left click in the field to accept the value. It also enables the operator to mute the alarm buzzer for an unlimited period of time. that the alarm buzzer is temporarily muted.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Mute Settings The Mute Settings sub menu enables the operator to adjust the length of time. 2. Move the trackball left to decrease the time or right to increase the time. If the mute length is set higher than the default time. 4. The mute time range may be set between 1 minute and 999 minutes. 7-10 65900010 . in minutes. To mute the alarm buzzer for an unlimited period of time tick the Mute length unlimited check box. The Mute Length field displays Unlimited as read-only. The default is 5 minutes. the value changes to green (editable). a Long Mute Length Warning is displayed in the Alarms field. To change the mute settings do the following: 1. To change the mute time uncheck the Mute length unlimited check box (if ticked) and click in the Mute Length: field.

The following types of alarms are not grouped:  Faults requiring speed or power reduction  Automatic shutdown of machinery  Steering gear alarms. warnings or cautions to all nodes on the system. 65900010 7-11 . A group of alarms may be acknowledged at the same time. In this role. as far as practicable. alarms from the bridge and other equipment are sent to the VMFT internal alarm system.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Central Alarm Management If your VisionMaster FT (VMFT) is configured as a Total Watch. Alarm priorities include Emergency. Primary. The alarms and warnings are arranged in groups. The indication of alarm status (unacknowledged or acknowledged) is the same as described previously in Alarm Status and Alarm Display. except emergency alarms. Distress. The CAM system uses the VMFT alarm output to forward unacknowledged alarms. as described in List of Alarms. Alarms are sorted by these priorities and by time within each priority group. and to other locations of the ship as necessary. acknowledge. The VMFT alarm system acts as a functional alarm interface to any equipment relaying alarms. The CAM displays a warning when NAVTEX messages are received via a serial connection on the client node. the option for a node to be selected as a central alarm manager (CAM) is available. which enables the operator to silence. and cancel the alarms centrally. Warnings and Cautions. and Secondary.

If a picture freeze occurs the permanent prompt field will freeze on the currently displayed prompt.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Picture Freeze A picture freeze represents a failure to update the User Interface on an operational display. or the system data and time if no prompts are displayed. but an internal error alarm will be generated. in addition to the prompt freeze. If the system returns to normal operation then the prompt field will continue to cycle between prompts and system time. If the VisionMaster system includes a PCIO. an alarm beep will sound denoting an internal error. see Prompts. 7-12 65900010 . see Shutdown. In the event of a picture freeze it is advisable to create a system fault report (for details see Report) and to then restart the system.

see pages 7-13 to 7-33. or the geodetic position of the ship. Many of these types describe a characteristic of the ship itself (for example. which will only generate alarms when the data becomes unusable:  Position  Speed Through Water  True Heading Other data types that have been selected for primary navigation in the `CCRS Announcement Reporter’ window of the Configuration tool will also always generate alarms. the type of announcement (owner) and its priority: Emergency. with the addition of Course over Ground and Speed over Ground. This applies to all except the following three data types.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms List of Alarms. the ship's heading. Warnings and Cautions in alphabetical order. The tables list Alarms. 65900010 7-13 .). The default list of data types for primary navigation includes the three listed above. and which are usually received via sensors. are given in three tables. while others describe a characteristic of something associated with the ship. Primary or Secondary. such as `Rudder Angle' or `Propeller Rpm and Pitch'. 10 Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) data includes the various types of data that describe the state of the ship. 10 Note that announcements related to CCRS data are listed in both the Alarms table and the Cautions table. whereas data types that have not been selected for primary navigation will only generate cautions. Distress. and appear in the Alarm Status Indicator and in the Alarms window. etc. Warnings and Cautions The Alarms announcements which are raised by the system.

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Intentionally Blank 7-14 65900010 .

Routes Secondary Approaching Waypoint Approaching a waypoint on the external route. AIS Interface Error No AIS messages received Targets Secondary Possible anchor drag detected. Routes Secondary System is Authorization Failure System Primary Unauthorized Communication with the autopilot's master SCU has failed. Approaching Route End Approaching the end of the route. Ensure that all nodes have the same version installed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Description Owner Priority Absolute Humidity Sensor Absolute Humidity Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Active AIS Full Activated AIS Target Limit Reached (maximum 40) Targets Secondary AFC Mode Error The AFC mode of the transceiver is in conflict Radar Primary Aggregated Generic Data Sensor Aggregated Generic Data Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT The maximum number of AIS targets and AIS objects has AIS Full Targets Secondary been reached (240). Autopilot Secondary Autopilot Power Reduced Power level supplied to autopilot has been reduced. which may cause unpredictable system App Version Mismatch System Primary behavior. Not all nodes are running the same version of the application. and restart the system. The ship is farther from the Anchor drag anchor drop location than the specified anchor chain Anchoring Secondary length allows. Autopilot Secondary 65900010 7-15 . Autopilot Power Failure Power supplied to autopilot has failed. Autopilot Communication Failed Autopilot Primary The system may no longer be able to control the autopilot.

Course Over Ground Sensor Course Over Ground Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 7-16 65900010 . Charts Secondary Config File Mismatch Config File Mismatch System Primary Config File Modified Config File Modified System Primary Control Panel Comms Communication with the control panel has failed. Chart Render Failure A chart render failure has been detected. Emergency Emergency Blank sectors invalid Tracker .Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Description Owner Priority AZ Entry Target has entered an Acquisition Zone Targets Secondary AZ Full Acquisition Zone Full Targets Secondary The number of azimuths per revolution has varied from its Azimuth Error Radar Primary nominal value of 4096 Backup Navigator Description text set at runtime. System Primary Course Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated course criteria for a zone Targets Primary Difference limit between heading and route bearing Course Difference Routes Primary exceeded.blank sectors failed to configure Radar Primary Bow Crossing Limit Target has infringed bow crossing limits. Targets Secondary Bow Ground Speed Sensor Bow Ground Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Change In Distance Sensor Change In Distance Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Cautions found on the chart along the ship's present Chart Cautions Charts Primary course. Dangers found on the chart along the ship's present Chart Dangers Charts Primary course.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Description Owner Priority CPA/TCPA Limit Target has infringed CPA/TCPA limits. Targets Distress Critical Point Abeam Ship is abeam a Critical Point. Routes Secondary Critical Point Off Route Critical point is too far off the route. Routes Secondary Critical Point Approach Critical Point is now within the specified time or distance. Routes Secondary Date and Time Degraded/ Sensor Date and Time Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Unusable Datum Offset Degraded/Unusable Sensor Datum Offset Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Depth Below Keel Sensor Depth Below Keel Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Depth Below Transducer Sensor Depth Below Transducer Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Depth Below Waterline Sensor Depth Below Waterline Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Dew Point Degraded/Unusable Sensor Dew Point Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Distance To Quay Unusable Sensor Distance To Quay Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Distribution Service Error Distribution service is not running System Primary Docking Speeds Unusable Sensor Speed And Distance Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Engine Mass Based Fuel Sensor Engine Mass Based Fuel Consumption Rate Value Consumption Rate Sensors Primary Integrity VisionMaster FT Degraded/Unusable Engine Power Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine Power Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Engine Propulsion Power Sensor Engine Propulsion Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine RPM Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine RPM Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary 65900010 7-17 .

Targets Primary External Targets Comms No external targets received on port.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Description Owner Priority Engine Speed Value Sensor Engine Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Thrust Value Sensor Engine Thrust Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Torque Value Sensor Engine Torque Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Total Energy Value Sensor Engine Total Energy Value Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Engine Total Revolutions Value Sensor Engine Total Revolutions Value Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Entry Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated entry criteria for a zone Targets Primary Error Finding Dangers An error finding dangers on the chart has been detected. Charts Primary Difference limit between required turn rate and planned Excessive Turn Rate Required Routes Primary turn rate exceeded. Exit Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated exit criteria for a zone. Targets Primary Fuel Consumption Corrected Sensor Fuel Consumption Corrected Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Fuel Consumption Observed Sensor Fuel Consumption Observed Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Fuel Density Degraded/Unusable Sensor Fuel Density Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Fuel Heat Value Sensor Fuel Heat Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Fuel Temperature Sensor Fuel Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Generic Data Degraded/Unusable Sensor Generic Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary 7-18 65900010 .

I/O Device Unavailable I/O Device Unavailable System Secondary Incompatible PCIO firmware The PCIO firmware required is version 1. because this chart Inaccurate Chart does not provide a mapping to standard WGS-84 Charts Primary coordinates. verify Global Thread Delay Detected System Primary this by checking the periodic thread delay log file. An unrecoverable internal error has occurred.04 or later PCIO Primary Configured compass ratio is incorrect for current board Incorrect Compass Ratio. A heading marker has not been received for at least 10 Heading Marker Error Radar Primary seconds Positions on this chart are inaccurate. please Internal Error System Primary restart the equipment Interswitch Comms The interswitch communications has failed Radar Primary Interswitch Model Conflict The interswitch model conflicts with the configured model Radar Secondary Invalid Datum In Use Datum in use is not WGS84. Charts Secondary Local Time Offset Sensor Local Time Offset Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Lost Connection Lost connection to Distribution Service System Primary Lost Echo Reference The Echo Reference Target is lost Targets Primary Lost Target Target is lost Targets Secondary Low Video Level The video level has dropped below the minimum threshold Radar Primary 65900010 7-19 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Description Owner Priority Generic Data with Units Sensor Generic Data with Units Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable A potential global thread delay has been detected. PCIO Primary type.

Off Track Off-track distance exceeds the route's limit. Autopilot Primary Next Turn EBL Comms No messages received from external VMS system. Routes Secondary There are no CAM supporting product types in the system No CAM Watch mode System Primary that are in CAM watch mode.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Description Owner Priority Magnetic Course Over Ground Sensor Magnetic Course Over Ground Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Magnetic Deviation Sensor Magnetic Deviation Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Heading Sensor Magnetic Heading Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Sensor Heading Sensor Magnetic Sensor Heading Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Magnetic Set and Drift Sensor Magnetic Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Variation Sensor Magnetic Variation Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Multiple Master SCUs The autopilot has identified multiple master SCUs. No Station In Control for a period greater than the Station In No SIC Timeout Primary configured SIC timeout Control A mariner created object in view is not being displayed Object Type Not Found Display Primary because its type cannot be found in the type library. Routes Primary PCIO Reset The PCIO has rebooted PCIO Primary PCIO USB Comms The PCIO USB communications has failed PCIO Primary Pitch Degraded/Unusable Sensor Pitch Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Position Unusable Sensor Position Unusable VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary 7-20 65900010 .

The Connection Status Safe Mode Activated menu provides a 'Leave Safe Mode' button to restore System Primary normal network communication. after the problem has been resolved.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Description Owner Priority Position Uncorroborated Sensor Position Uncorroborated VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Pressure Ground Sensor Pressure Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Propeller RPM and Pitch Sensor Propeller RPM and Pitch Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Propulsion Equipment Data Sensor Propulsion Equipment Data Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Pulse Length Error The pulse length state of the transceiver is in conflict Radar Primary Rate of Turn Degraded/Unusable Sensor Rate of Turn Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Relative Humidity Sensor Relative Humidity Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Relative Wind With Relative Sensor Relative Wind With Relative Direction Integrity Sensors Primary Direction Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Roll Degraded/Unusable Sensor Roll Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Route Monitoring Stopped Route Monitoring Stopped Routes Primary Rudder Angle Degraded/Unusable Sensor Rudder Angle Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Rudder Equipment Data Sensor Rudder Equipment Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable This node is currently running as a stand-alone node due to network connectivity problems. Primary Radar 65900010 7-21 . SC PCIO Comms The SC PCIO communications has failed Radar Primary Network Server Connection Terminated Communication with server has been terminated.

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Description Owner Priority Network Server Failure The connection to the server has been lost. Primary Control Sonar Communication Error Communications with the sonar system has failed Sonar Primary Sonar return detected within safety region and above Sonar Returns Detected Sonar Primary safety depth Sonar System Error The sonar system has reported an error Sonar Primary Specific Fuel Rate Corrected Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Corrected Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Specific Fuel Rate Observed Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Observed Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Speed Criteria Violated A traffic monitored target violated speed criteria for a zone Targets Primary Speed Over Ground Sensor Speed Over Ground Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 7-22 65900010 . Primary Radar Set and Drift Degraded/Unusable Sensor Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Ship Overall Efficiency Corrected Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Corrected Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Ship Overall Efficiency Observed Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Observed Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Ship Total Fuel Consumption Rate Sensor Ship Total Fuel Consumption Rate Value Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Ship Total Power Sensor Ship Total Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Ship Total Propulsion Power Sensor Ship Total Propulsion Power Integrity VisionMaster Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable FT Station in SIC Battleshort The Station In Control feature is in Battleshort mode.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Alarm Description Owner Priority Speed Through Water Sensor Speed Through Water Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Standby / Transmit Error The standby transmit state of the transceiver is in conflict Radar Primary Stern Ground Speed Sensor Stern Ground Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable System Tracks Almost Full Tracking 95% of the system maximum number of targets Targets Secondary System Tracks Full Tracking the system maximum number of targets Targets Secondary Target Anchor Drift Target out of the anchor watch limit circle. Tracks Full Tracking maximum number of targets Targets Secondary Transceiver BITE There is an error reported by the transceiver BITE Radar Primary The communications from the selected transceiver have Transceiver Comms Radar Primary failed Transducer Data Sensor Transducer Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Trigger Error The trigger has dropped below the minimum threshold Radar Primary 65900010 7-23 . Routes Primary Tracking Failure SC tracking data not present Targets Primary The heading data used for tracking is either invalid or Tracking Unavailable Targets Primary unavailable. Targets Primary Targets Full The system cannot allocate any more target numbers. Targets Secondary Temperature Degraded/Unusable Sensor Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Time Degraded/Unusable Sensor Time Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Total Set and Drift Sensor Total Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Track Control Stopped Track control stopped.

Secondary Radar Video Failed Radar video cannot be displayed. Radar Primary Vigilance Operator is not alert. Routes Primary Turning unit selection failed Tracker .Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarm Description Owner Priority True Heading Degraded/Unusable Sensor True Heading Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary True Wind With Relative Direction Sensor True Wind with Relative Direction Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT True Wind With True Direction Sensor True Wind With True Direction Integrity Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable VisionMaster FT Turn Not Acknowledged Course change indicator not acknowledged. Autopilot Primary The turn radius ordered in Joystick Heading is not Turn Radius Not Achievable Autopilot Primary achievable Network Video Data Watchdog Video data not received for a time. System Primary Water Temperature Sensor Water Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Warning Description Owner Priority 3D Chart Suppressed 3D Chart not supported for this region Display Primary Active AIS Almost Full Activated AIS Target Limit Almost Reached Targets Secondary Actual Speed Value Error Actual Speed value is above the threshold value VMFTVAS Primary Actual Fuel usage Value Actual Fuel usage value is above the threshold value VMFTVAS Primary Error 7-24 65900010 .turning unit selection failed Radar Primary Turn Radius Modified The ordered turn radius has been automatically changed.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Warning Description Owner Priority Track control is no longer computing a set and drift correction Adjust for Set and Drift due to the degraded state of one or more of the following data Autopilot Secondary Failure types: True Heading. Targets Secondary AIS disabled because Ownship position is being dead reckoned AIS Disabled Targets Secondary or Ownship heading data is unusable. Position. AIS Degraded AIS degraded because of dead reckoning. Chart permissions Contact your chart agent or distributor for a subscription renewal Charts Primary on your World database. Only ARCS Navigator permits are supported for Charts Secondary Supported operation with ARCS RNC charts The system cannot generate speed orders that will cause the Arrival Time Not ship to arrive at the desired arrival time and are within the Routes Primary Achievable monitored route's speed limits. Chart permissions Chart subscription service will expire. but a chart is available Chart Available Charts Secondary for the ship's position. AIS Unusable AIS interface integrity failure Targets Secondary AIS: Integrity Error Alarm generated by AIS hardware Targets Secondary Approaching Waypoint Approaching a waypoint on the external route. Autopilot Secondary Failure Bypassed Critical One or more critical points have been bypassed by temp route. Water Speed. Rate of Turn. Autopilot Interface An interface to the autopilot has failed. Routes Secondary The system has detected that ARCS Skipper permits are ARCS Skipper Not installed. Chart subscription service will expire in less than 60 days. Charts Secondary expiring 65900010 7-25 . Routes Secondary Point(s) No chart displayed at the ship's position. Refer to Chart Permissions.

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Warning Description Owner Priority A problem was encountered during the activation of charts Charts Activation Error copied from a remote node. Routes Secondary Critical Point Approach Critical Point is now within the specified time or distance. Radar maps. Database server not found: changes made to local database Database Server may be lost when reconnecting. Use Database Diagnostics System Secondary Synchronization to re-synchronize. Any changes made while nodes are not connected will Database Node Missing result in their data being overwritten with the current database System Secondary when they reconnect. Routes Secondary Data Log disabled Unable to log to DataLog database. and System Secondary Manual chart updates are temporarily disallowed. GoTo locations. and Manual chart updates. System Secondary Database Connection Database Connection Has Failed System Secondary Database is initializing. 7-26 65900010 . PI Lines. The node(s) listed are switched off or not connected to the network. During a brief initialization period Database Initializing updates to Routes. GoTo locations. PI Lines. Radar maps. Exporting a backup of changes System Secondary is recommended. Routes Secondary Critical Point Off Route Critical point is too far off the route. Database Database synchronization has failed. Some local changes lost when reconnecting. CMAP eToken Mismatch Insert Correct eToken And Restart The System Charts Primary Colors Not Approved The colors are potentially unsafe. the copy Charts Secondary operation must be performed again. To correct the problem. This potentially affects Routes. Display Primary Critical Point Abeam Ship is abeam a Critical Point. Changes may Database Updates System Secondary need to be imported from back-up.

Increase the turn rate order to improve steering Low Turn Rate Order Autopilot Secondary effectiveness in this mode. Monitor steering closely. Use the external knob to manually Display Secondary adjust backlight brightness. especially if high winds are influencing the vessel.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Warning Description Owner Priority Enterprise Server App The PBN Enterprise Server application is not running PBN Primary Down External Route External route data from the selected source is degraded. Maneuver Time Time to trial maneuver is less than 30sec. Targets Secondary Mariner Object Database The mariner object database has corrupt data for one or more Display Primary Is Corrupt mariner objects and these mariner objects are being ignored. Turn Rate Order lower than minimum recommended. Multiple Interfaces On A switched SCU is communicating over multiple interfaces Autopilot Secondary SCU PBN System Error PBN Enterprise Server is not running VMFTVAS Primary PCIO Comms Failure PCIO acknowledge Comms Failure PCIO Primary 65900010 7-27 . No Response: The system is unable to communicate with the Monitor Comms LCD through its serial port. Routes Secondary Degraded/ Unusable Heading Joystick An interface to the heading joystick has failed Autopilot Secondary Interface Failure Interswitch Request Network The Interswitch request failed. Monitor Data Display Secondary Use the external knob to manually adjust backlight brightness. Secondary Failed Radar The mute length setting is longer than recommended or is Long Mute Length System Primary unlimited. Bad Data: The LCD monitor failed to acknowledge a command.

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Warning Description Owner Priority Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the Predicted Path Mismatch Targets Primary predicted path is always ground stabilized. System Tracks Almost Tracking 95% of the system maximum number of targets Targets Secondary Full Temporary Authorization System is only temporarily authorized System Secondary Test targets failed Turning on/off moveable test targets failed Targets Secondary TM Reset The system will reset the ship's plotted position momentarily. Steering Control Control of the heading command and the ability to activate track Autopilot Secondary Received control is available at one or more stations. Display Secondary There is a discrepancy between the number of top units Top Unit Conflict Radar Primary configured on this node and the rest of the system 7-28 65900010 . Routes Secondary Station in SIC changed The new station in control is: <node ident> Primary Control Slave Only Display The interswitch and config file slave only displays are Radar Primary Conflict incompatible The interswitch and config file slave only transceivers are Slave Only Tx Conflict Radar Primary incompatible The autopilot has transferred steering control to this system. This system has relinquished steering control. Predicted Vector Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the Ownship Primary Mismatch predicted vector is always ground stabilized. Route Leg Skipped The ship has skipped one or more legs of the route plan. Target vectors and own ship vectors are water stabilized but the Predicted Ship Mismatch Targets Primary predicted ship is always ground stabilized. Autopilot or Steering Control another device or system will control steering until control is Autopilot Secondary Relinquished transferred back to this system.

Tracks Almost Full Tracking 95% maximum number of targets Targets Primary Network Transceiver Control Loss Mastership of the Transceiver was taken by another operator. On systems with track control available. Track keeping performance may be degraded if the Autopilot Secondary STW entered speed does not match the actual speed. Routes Primary Off the notifications are automatically switched on whenever Track mode is engaged 65900010 7-29 . Secondary Radar Water Temperature Sensor Water Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable The system will not provide messages to indicate planned course changes because 'Wheelover Notifications' is switched off on the Wheelover Notifications 'Monitor Route' menu.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Warning Description Owner Priority Track Control Stopped Track control stopped. Routes Primary Track control is providing heading orders based on manual water Track Control Using Man speed.

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Caution Description Owner Priority Absolute Humidity Sensor Absolute Humidity Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Aggregated Generic Data Degraded/Unusable Sensor Aggregated Generic Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Bow Ground Speed Sensor Bow Ground Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Change in Distance Sensor Change in Distance Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Course Over Ground Sensor Course Over Ground Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Date and Time Sensor Date and Time Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Datum Offset Sensor Datum Offset Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Depth Below Keel Sensor Depth Below Keel Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Depth Below Transducer Sensor Depth Below Transducer Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Depth Below Waterline Sensor Depth Below Waterline Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Dew Point Sensor Dew Point Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Distance To Quay Sensor Distance To Quay Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Unusable Warning Docking Speeds Sensor Speed And Distance Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Unusable Warning 7-30 65900010 .

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Caution Description Owner Priority Engine Mass Based Fuel Sensor Engine Mass Based Fuel Consumption Rate Value Consumption Rate Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Power Sensor Engine Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Propulsion Power Sensor Engine Propulsion Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine RPM Sensor Engine RPM Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Speed Sensor Engine Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Thrust Value Sensor Engine Thrust Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Torque Value Sensor Engine Torque Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Engine Total Revolutions Degraded/Unusable Sensor Engine Total Revolutions Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Engine Total Energy Value Sensor Engine Total Energy Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable External Route External route data from the selected source is degraded. Routes Secondary Degraded/Unusable Fuel Consumption Corrected Sensor Fuel Consumption Corrected Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 65900010 7-31 .

3 Magnetic Course Over Ground Sensor Magnetic Course Over Ground Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Deviation Sensor Magnetic Deviation Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Heading Sensor Magnetic Heading Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Sensor Heading Sensor Magnetic Sensor Heading Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 7-32 65900010 .Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Caution Description Owner Priority Fuel Consumption Observed Sensor Fuel Consumption Observed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Fuel Density Sensor Fuel Density Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Fuel Heat Value Sensor Fuel Heat Value Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Fuel Temperature Sensor Fuel Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Generic Data Sensor Generic Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Generic Data with Units Sensor Generic Data with Units Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Local Time Offset Sensor Local Time Offset Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable The look-ahead for chart dangers is set short (either less than Look-Ahead Short Charts Secondary one minute. or less than 500 meters).

PBN Current License The PBN current license will expire in: X days PBN Secondary Expiration PBN Weather License The PBN weather license will expire in: X days PBN Secondary Expiration Pitch Sensor Pitch Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Pressure Ground Sensor Pressure Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Propeller RPM and Pitch Sensor Propeller RPM and Pitch Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Propulsion Equipment Sensor Propulsion Equipment Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Data Degraded/Unusable 65900010 7-33 . system inaccuracies may develop and functionality may be disabled.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Caution Description Owner Priority Magnetic Set and Drift Sensor Magnetic Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Magnetic Variation Sensor Magnetic Variation Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Due to maximum latitude being exceeded. A low value for look-ahead time or distance has resulted in a small safety region for detecting chart dangers on own ship's Minimal Safety Region course. Inaccuracies Maximum Latitude generally become more serious as own ship travels toward the System Primary Exceeded pole after exceeding the maximum latitude. Do not rely on the system as the primary means of navigation when operating beyond the maximum latitude. Use the 'Chart Dangers' menu to increase look-ahead if necessary. This may not provide adequate time to take action if a Charts Secondary danger is detected.

See the Sensor Sensor Data Fault Sensors Primary Status (under System. Sensor Data Fix The data used to fix a sensor is not corroborated with external Sensors Primary Uncorroborated sensors Set and Drift Sensor Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Ship Overall Efficiency Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Corrected Integrity VisionMaster Corrected Sensors Primary FT Degraded/Unusable Ship Overall Efficiency Sensor Ship Overall Efficiency Observed Integrity VisionMaster Observed Sensors Primary FT Degraded/Unusable 7-34 65900010 . Charts Secondary Some sensor data is unusable or degraded.Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Caution Description Owner Priority Rate of Turn Sensor Rate of Turn Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Relative Humidity Sensor Relative Humidity Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Relative Wind With Sensor Relative Wind With Relative Direction Integrity Relative Direction Sensors Primary VisionMaster FT Degraded/Unusable Roll Degraded/Unusable Sensor Roll Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Rudder Angle Sensor Rudder Angle Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Rudder Equipment Data Sensor Rudder Equipment Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded Unusable The chart's safety depth is set shallower than the ship's max Safety Depth Shallow Charts Secondary draft Safety Height Low The chart's safety height is set lower than the ship's height. Diagnostics) for more details.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Alarms Caution Description Owner Priority Ship Total Fuel Sensor Ship Total Fuel Consumption Rate Value Integrity Consumption Rate Sensors Primary VisionMaster FT Degraded/Unusable Ship Total Power Sensor Ship Total Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Ship Total Propulsion Power Sensor Ship Total Propulsion Power Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Specific Fuel Rate Corrected Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Corrected Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Specific Fuel Rate Observed Sensor Specific Fuel Rate Observed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Speed Over Ground Sensor Speed Over Ground Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Stern Ground Speed Sensor Stern Ground Speed Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Temperature Sensor Temperature Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Time Sensor Time Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Total Set and Drift Sensor Total Set and Drift Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable Transducer Data Sensor Transducer Data Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 65900010 7-35 .

Alarms Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Caution Description Owner Priority True Wind With Relative Sensor True Wind with relative direction integrity VisionMaster Direction Sensors Primary FT Degraded/Unusable True Wind With True Direction Sensor True Wind With True Direction Integrity VisionMaster FT Sensors Primary Degraded/Unusable 7-36 65900010 .

• Specify variable speeds to be used on remaining segments of a monitored route. see Route ETA. see Creating a Route. see Importing and Exporting a Route. see Required Speed. To access the Route sub menus select Routes from the Main Menu list. • Specify the speed for a current leg and future legs on a monitored route. • Displaying route information.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Chapter 8 Routes This section describes route editing. • View and edit SAR pattern routes. • Creating and editing routes graphically on screen. The following topics are covered. exporting or backing up a route. see ETA Calculator. see Search and Rescue. • Monitoring a validated route. display and storage. The Routes sub menu list includes the following: • Monitor Route • ETA Calculator • Route ETA • Required Speed • Speed Planning • Edit Route • Temp Route • Search and Rescue 65900010 8-1 . • Importing. see Route Display Settings. see Monitoring a Route. monitoring. see Edit Route. the system then calculates the speed required to achieve this arrival time. • Specify an arrival time on a monitored route. • Editing a route from a menu. • Calculating the time. • A description of Routes. see Speed Planning. speed and distance between waypoints on a monitored route.

Refer to Chapter 1 `Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ship's Manual. see Monitoring a Route Plan. To view abbreviated data on the currently monitored route left click on the Routes tab in the lower right of the screen. 8-2 65900010 . depending on system configuration.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide • File Import / Export • Route Display Settings The Routes sub menu list will also include External Route.

12 The geographic location. On ships installed with VisionMaster FT track control. calling in point. If a waypoint has both an approaching leg and a departing leg. legs are displayed as straight lines between two waypoints. see External Routes • Temporary Routes . The route plan is represented as a thicker dashed line. The wheel-over (WO) line may be displayed perpendicular to the approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn. which can then be transmitted and distributed to all nodes on a network for display and monitoring. temporarily routes can also be used to steer the ship onto a planned internal route When a route has been imported or created all the details of the route can be viewed and edited from the Edit Route sub menu. in the same colour as the route. There are three types of routes: • Internal Route Plans .A temporary route is a route that starts at own ship’s CCRP. represented by a line where rudder movement should be activated to accomplish a planned turn. see Temporary Route. The distance is configurable to be appropriate for the ship’s turning characteristics. • External Routes . Waypoint legs are represented as thin dashed lines. etc. the system automatically generates a turn at the waypoint to indicate the planned path of the ship. The saved internal route can be monitored from the Monitor Route sub menu. 11 A geographical Lat/Lon location on a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s planned route (for example. which cross the route track at a relatively short distance before the turn begins.These are routes created by and stored at an external device.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Routes A route consists of a number of defined waypoints 11 and adjoining lines (legs).). course alteration point. Temporary routes are intended for one-time manoeuvres and deviations from pre-planned internal routes. and can be edited quickly on the video circle. or it may have been created on another ship’s VisionMaster FT system and copied using the file Import/Export function.An internal route can be created and saved at a single VisionMaster FT console. 65900010 8-3 . Waypoints are marked by circles. Wheel-over 12 marks are represented by lines.

a route that is opened for editing from the Edit Route sub menu may be edited independently on each node. only one route may be monitored in a multi-node system. In addition. Unlike a monitored route. The same route monitoring information and monitored track is displayed on all nodes. This is done from the File Import/Export window. 8-4 65900010 . Routes saved to the database can also be loaded for monitoring from any node on the network. 13 Persistent data is stored in a standard relational database management system (RDBMS) format. Multi-node Support On a multi-node system internal routes are saved and retrieved from a 13 database .Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide It is advisable that routes created by the operator should be backed up to an external device (usually a USB memory stick). regardless of which node the operator began monitoring. an external route that is displayed on a particular node may be specified independently for each node.

To add a waypoint do the following: 1. If the waypoint to be added is the first in the route. 2. Adding a Waypoint There are two screen options initially available when adding waypoints: • Add Waypoint. you must first select Edit Route. then either waypoint option can be selected. When Edit Route is selected waypoints can be created anywhere within the video circle.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Creating a Route To create waypoints. With Edit Route displayed. A semi transparent window appears at the point where the selection was made. by selecting the Routes menu. You can select to annotate routes on screen (with waypoint and wheel-over numbers. or • Add Waypoint to Beginning. right click in the video circle at the point where the waypoint is to be placed. planned leg speed and leg bearing data) by selecting the display options from Route Display Settings. Click on either the Add Waypoint or Add Waypoint to Beginning field from the window. 65900010 8-5 .

g. An additional waypoint is created. 8-6 65900010 . Select Add Waypoint to Beginning from the window. do the following: 1.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Add Waypoint Add Waypoint is selected where the insertion of a new waypoint is to be made after the last waypoint. To add a waypoint to the beginning of a route. Select Add Waypoint from the semi transparent window. To add an additional waypoint. position the cursor at the required point and select Add Waypoint again. see Editing a Route. 2. see Editing a Route. if the last waypoint on the route was W5 then the appended waypoint will be W6. To view the waypoint details click on the Edit Routes Waypoints tab. or a radius value modified by the user. do the following: 1. To view the waypoint LAT/LON position select the waypoint and click on the Edit Routes Waypoints tab. position the cursor at the required point and select Add Waypoint to Beginning again. see Editing a Route. 2. Add Waypoint to Beginning Add Waypoint to Beginning is selected where the insertion of a new waypoint is to be numbered before the first waypoint in the route e. To add another waypoint before the first waypoint. e.g. To add a waypoint to a route. the new waypoint becomes W1 and all other waypoint references are moved up one digit accordingly. When three or more waypoints are created the system displays the turn radius at each waypoint (except first and last) using the system default radius. The screen shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the waypoint selection was made. When two or more waypoints are created a straight route leg is drawn between each waypoint. The new waypoint becomes W1 and the first waypoint changes to W2. The screen shows a coloured circle at the cursor point when the waypoint selection was made.

A new waypoint is created at the selected route leg position.g. adjoining legs and turn radii change to an editable colour. Hold down the left key and use the trackball to move the waypoint around the screen. the route's attributes change as the waypoint is moved. do the following: 1. Changing a Waypoint's Position A waypoint's position can be changed directly on screen. do the following: 1. The new waypoint and its wheel-over are automatically numbered depending on their position on the route. The cross hair cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Inserting a Waypoint A new waypoint can be inserted at a selected point along the straight segments of a route leg. A wheel-over line is automatically created with the waypoint. When a waypoint is selected the waypoint circle. To numerically specify an exact LAT/LON position for the waypoint refer to Editing a Route Plan. The distance between the wheel-over line and the start of the turn depends on ship turning characteristics as configured in the system. To insert a new waypoint. Move the cursor over the waypoint to be edited. Release the left key when the waypoint is at the desired location. 3. The position of inserted waypoints can be modified as described in `Changing a Waypoint's Position'. 2. e. Left click on a waypoint to select. or by entering a Lat/Lon value in the Waypoints tab folder. Right click on the route leg where you want to insert a waypoint and select Insert New Waypoint from the semi- transparent window. if the waypoint is created on the leg between waypoints W3 and W4 then the new waypoint becomes W4 and all subsequent waypoints on the route are re-numbered accordingly. The wheel-over line moves in accordance with any changes made to the waypoint location. The wheel-over line is drawn across the route leg immediately preceding a planned turn. 65900010 8-7 . To change a waypoint's position on screen. together with a wheel-over line.

or. To change a turn radius do the following: 1. When the turn is created. The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. The route and wheel-over lines are redrawn as the turn radius is changed. or in the Waypoints tab folder. or as a result of numeric adjustment of the turn rate. 8-8 65900010 . do the following: 1. see Edit Route. The radius can also be adjusted numerically. if this is the first turn. see Editing a Route. Changing a Waypoint's Turn Radius A waypoint's turn radius can be manually changed. The route data shown in the Waypoints tab folder also changes to reflect the revised co-ordinates. When a waypoint is deleted all waypoint references are adjusted accordingly. see Edit Route. it is set to the default radius. Right click on the waypoint to be deleted and select Delete Waypoint from the semi-transparent window. 2. 3. Click on the small dot at the centre of the radius. With the dot highlighted hold down the left key and use the trackball to drag the radius dot to the desired position. either on screen or in the Waypoints tab folder.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Delete a Waypoint A waypoint's position can be deleted either directly on screen. To delete a waypoint from a route. its turn radius is set to either the previous turn’s radius.

The Dangers tab folder lists objects and areas that could endanger the safety of own ship on the route currently opened from the Route tab. 65900010 8-9 . The Dangers tab will only appear if Safety Checking has been selected in the system configuration. The Critical Points tab folder allows the operator to insert alerts. saved. validated and managed from the Route tab folder. leg and turn data) to be edited. along a route. Refer to Chapter 1 `Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual. in the form of alarms and warnings. The Waypoints tab folder enables all the route's attributes (waypoint.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Editing a Route Edit Route The Edit Route sub-menu includes the following tab folders: • Route • Wpts (Waypoints) • CPs (Critical Points) • Dngrs (Dangers) Internal routes are opened.

delete a route from the list of previously saved routes.the system checks the validity of the loaded route.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Route Tab Folder Routes are managed from the Route tab folder of the Edit Route sub-menu. The route name and current date are added to the Load Route list. or save changes to the route under the same name. • Open .save a newly created route. • No Errors/Errors . However the route must have no errors before it can be loaded for monitoring.load a previously saved route for editing. • Clear/New . • Save As . The folder is divided into the following areas: • Route • Total Distance and Duration • Description and Notes Route From the Route area of the folder you can perform the following route management functions: • Save . the previous version of the route is overwritten and the revised date for the route changes accordingly as indicated in the list of available routes (if displayed). A route can be saved even if it does contain errors. 8-10 65900010 . • Delete . If the route's attributes do contain errors the route cannot be validated and the button changes to display Errors with a yellow background. or to rename an existing route.used when either creating a new route. if there are no errors in the route the button displays No Errors in the system background colour.clear an existing route from the screen prompting the user to save an unsaved route if necessary.

refer to Edit Route . If changes to the route's attributes are not validated by the system the No Errors button changes to Errors with the button's background colour and route's name in yellow. To check for errors on a route: 1. A Route Validation Messages window is displayed. To manage a route do the following: To save a route: 1.enables the operator to edit all waypoint and leg attributes for the edited route via a separate movable window. The route name is entered. 2.generate a new route that is a mirror image of the original route. or if the changes made to a route are to be saved under a new name. • Print . To check the error messages click on the Errors button. The validation process only checks the geometry of a route. If the route has no errors the message {No validation messages} appears. Click the OK button to confirm. Route 2*). click on the Save As button.g.Dangers. 65900010 8-11 . see Route Editor Table.To save a route click on the Save button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes • Editor Table . The route is correctly validated and can be loaded for monitoring when required. To check the route against dangers. Any errors on the route appear in the messages field. the current time/date is listed in the Open Route window and a temporary prompt appears confirming that the route plan has been saved.if a printer is connected to the system (either local or network) a print of the currently loaded route can be made. 2. If changes to a route have been made the route name shows an asterisk after the name (e. 3. A window appears prompting to enter a name for the route. Enter a name using the screen keypad and click on the keypad OK button. • Reverse .

2. 2. the route is cleared from the screen. scroll down the list if necessary. Don't Save or Cancel the closure. With the selected route displayed click on the Clear/New button. To clear a route from the video circle: 1. To delete a route from the route list: 1. the Description field contains a description (if any) of the selected route. Select the route to be opened from the list. and with the route selected click on the OK button. Click the Yes button to confirm deletion. The Delete Route window appears prompting to select a route to delete and displaying a list of existing routes on the workstation with the last modified date of each route. 3. The route is deleted and the file name removed from the list. 3. Select the required option. a Close Confirmation window appears prompting to Save. 2. The route data appears in the Route folder and a graphic representation of the route appears on screen. Click on the Open button.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To open a previously saved route: 1. The screen prompts to confirm deletion of the selected route. assuming the displayed location contains the route. Select the route to be deleted from the list. and with the route selected click on the OK button. Click on the Delete button. 8-12 65900010 . Below the list. The Open Route window appears prompting to select a route to open and displaying a list of existing routes on the workstation with the last modified date of each route. scroll down the list if necessary. Below the list the Description field contains a description (if any) of the selected route. If unsaved changes have been made to the route.

The ETD displays the current date and time and the ETA displays the total route time value added to the current date and time as the estimated time of arrival. For example. the total route time will decrease and the route's average speed will increase accordingly. to first save the changes to the current route click Cancel and then the Save button. The changes will not be saved to the current route. 2. Total Distance and Duration The Total Distance and Duration area calculates the total route distance. and average speed are read only values which are recalculated as the route is changed. These values are updated each time the Clear/New button is clicked. The route distance. ii) Or. i) To draw the reversed route to include the changes made to the current route click OK. If the current time is set to local and a time zone offset has been applied in Time Management that time offset is shown as a plus or minus figure after UTC. 4. 65900010 8-13 . hours and minutes and the average planned speed made by own ship over the entire route. Click the Reverse button. critical points and other attributes assigned to that route. 3. time. When a route has been reversed a temporary confirmation prompt appears. To save the reversed route click on the Save As button and enter a name using the screen keypad. the total route duration in days (if needed). If you have made any changes to the route an Action Required message appears requesting confirmation of route reversal.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes To reverse a route do the following: 1. The Time Zone is displayed as UTC. Open the saved route you wish to reverse from the routes database. The route is re-drawn as a mirror image of the current route with the same number of waypoints. No name is assigned to the reversed route. if the speed for a leg is increased.

from Month to Year) click on the side arrows. With the correct ETD/ETA data displayed click on the OK button. A screen keypad appears from where you can enter text. 8-14 65900010 . 2. An editing window appears directly below the selected field. The field data changes to green (editable) and the specific data is highlighted. Move the cursor inside the respective field and left click. 3.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To change the ETD/ETA data do the following: 1. Description and Notes To add a description of the route or create notes do the following: 1. 2. to move the date or time forward click on the Up arrow. To move the highlight back or forward (e. The text is saved in the Description or Notes field. Click inside the ETD or ETA field on the specific data to be changed. With the required text entered click on the keypad OK button. To move the date or time back click on the Down arrow.g.

The Save and No Error/Error functions in the Waypoints tab folder are the same as described previously in the Edit Route . To select the first waypoint in the route plan click the << button. W3). or to select the last waypoint in the route plan click the >> button. The folder is divided into the following areas: • Route • Waypoint • Approaching Leg • Turn • Departing Leg Route The Route area enables the currently monitored route to be saved and validated. 65900010 8-15 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Waypoints Tab Folder The Waypoints tab folder displays all the waypoint and leg attributes for the route being edited. to select the next waypoint in the route plan click the > button. To select the previous waypoint in the route plan click the < button.Route Tab.g. When a route has been saved its name is displayed above the Save/No Error buttons. Waypoint The Waypoint area enables you to quickly navigate between waypoints and includes the following editing functions: • create a new waypoint • delete an existing waypoint • enter a waypoint label • change the LAT/LON position of a waypoint To edit the Waypoint data do the following: The Waypoint area displays the waypoint currently selected (e.

Left click in the blank field to the right of the currently selected waypoint. 2. To change the Lat/Lon position of the waypoint click in the Lat/Lon data fields. Manually enter a Lat/Lon position by using the numbers and navigation buttons on the keypad and click OK. 8-16 65900010 . if W1 is selected then the new waypoint becomes W2 and all subsequent waypoints are automatically re-numbered. see below. also on the route plan. i. the text becomes editable (green) and a drop down keypad appears. The system creates a new waypoint on the route leg midway between the selected waypoint and next waypoint i. Select the waypoint by using the Waypoint navigation buttons. the route is re-drawn and all subsequent waypoints are automatically re-numbered. Enter an identifying label using the keypad and click OK. Navigate to the location in the route where you want the new waypoint created and left click on either the previous waypoint or the next waypoint and then click the New button. or by specifying its LAT/LON position numerically.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To enter a label for the waypoint: 1. 2. 3. The waypoint is moved to the entered position. To delete a waypoint: Navigate to the waypoint to be deleted using the navigation buttons and click the Delete button. The system deletes the selected waypoint from the route. the screen keypad appears. To centre the display on the selected waypoint click the Goto button. To create a new waypoint: 1. To specify a waypoint Lat/Lon position: 1. There are a number of ways of defining the Lat/Lon position for the selected waypoint. 2. Move the waypoint to the required position. and if the Waypoint Label tick box is enabled in the Route Display Settings. either directly on screen.e. The name appears in the label field.

the path taken by a ship or plane that maintains a constant compass direction.the leg distance between each waypoint.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes ii. To place the waypoint at a specific geographic object select Query. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click at the required location. v. To place the waypoint at own ship's CCRP select Ownship. a Chart Query window appears with a list of objects in the immediate area (see Chart Query). iv. An Offset window appears where you can set a range and bearing offset from the current position. • Leg Bearing . To place the waypoint at a selected location on the chart display video circle select Chart. iii. 14 A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same angle. before the system raises the Off Track alarm.) • Off Track Limit . Approaching Leg The Approaching Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of the leg approaching the selected waypoint: 14 15 • Rhumb Line or Great Circle • Leg Speed .the bearing of the leg in degrees. 65900010 8-17 . Select the object from the list. To specify a range or bearing for the waypoint select Offset. the waypoint is repositioned to that location. Following such a circle plots the shortest distance between any two points on the surface of the Earth.the distance the ship can stray from the route leg’s track line. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click. Click OK on the Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the chart object position. 15 A circle drawn around the Earth such that the centre of the circle is at the centre of the Earth. The following leg attributes are read-only which automatically change if the route data is changed: • Leg Distance . the waypoint is repositioned over the chart object and a red circle filled with a red shaded background is drawn around the waypoint.estimate average speed for the route leg (maximum speed 99 Kn.

the maximum turn rate is 1200°/minute. Often the turn speed will be the same as the approaching and/or departing leg.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To edit the Approaching Leg data do the following: 1. the text changes to green (editable).speed of turn. However if the turn rate data is modified the turn speed is used to calculate new turn radius data. The speed of turn is used to calculate the turn rate based on the displayed turn radius data. the system provides the flexibility to enter different values. Move the trackball left or right to change the values. • Turn Radius . • Speed . Turn The Turn area enables you to edit the following turn attributes: • Turn Rate . 8-18 65900010 . Move the trackball left or right to change the values. before the system raises the Off Track alarm. To change the turn rate. The speed for each leg shall be less than or equal to the Own Ship’s configured maximum speed. This is useful when it is important to strictly adhere to a specific turn rate due to vessel type or conditions. the text changes to green (editable). turn radius or speed of turn click in the relevant field. To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field and make the desired selection. the maximum speed is 99 Kn • Off Track Limit . 2. However.the maximum turn radius is 10 NM. The turn rates for each turn must be less than or equal to the Own Ship’s configured maximum turn rate.the distance the ship can stray from the route leg’s track line. To change the leg speed or off track limit click in the relevant field.

• Off Track Limit . which departs from the selected waypoint: • Rhumb Line or Great Circle • Leg Speed . The maximum speed is 99 Kn. To change the leg speed or off track limit click in the relevant field the text changes to green (editable). 65900010 8-19 . To change the departing or approaching leg from Rhumb Line to Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field. 2. and turn speed from the preceding leg. Turn rate is calculated based on turn radius and turn speed. The first waypoint of a route inherits turn radius from a system configurable default value. but turn rate may also be used to adjust turn radius. Default Leg and Turn Attributes The first leg of a route inherits planned speed and off track limit attributes from system configurable default values. Subsequent waypoints inherit turn radius from the preceding waypoint. Move the trackball left or right to change the values. and turn speed from the preceding leg’s planned speed. To edit the Departing Leg data do the following: 1.the measured angle of the leg in true degrees.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Departing Leg The Departing Leg area enables you to edit the following attributes of the leg of the route. • Leg Bearing .as in turn attributes The following leg attributes are read-only values which automatically change if the route data is changed: • Leg distance .estimated average speed for the route leg. Subsequent legs inherit attributes from the preceding leg.the leg distance between each waypoint.

When a route is opened for editing or monitoring the system continually searches the chart database and mariner objects database for objects and areas that intersect the route plan safety region. A graphic representation of the danger is displayed across a the affected area of the route and a description of the danger er. Any dangers related to that segment are listed in the direc irectory. the number being dependent on the number of waypoints on the route. with the dangers separated into the number of leg and turn segments on the route. Navigate to the required route segment by clicking on thehe + box. including its LAT/LON position. To view a route segment's dangers click on the Dangers rs + box. Route dangers are listed in a directory tree. If the List Cautions check box is ticked the directory tree will also include cautions related to that segment. To view dangers or cautions on the display do the following: g: 1. 3. 8-20 65900010 . The operator must rely on own ship safety region for de detecting dangers while the ship is on a temporary route. WARNING! Temporary routes are not separately safety checke ked. Each Leg or Turn segment is further divided into Dangersers and Cautions sub directories. To view the dangers on the video circle click on each dananger in the list. 2.Routes Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Dangers The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to view objects and areas that could endanger the safety of own ship on the edited route. appears in the Description field.

the safety region is displayed along the length of the route. 5. To view cautions on the route repeat the procedure above. Display Safety Regions The Dangers tab folder also includes the option of displaying the route safety region. To move up the list click the arrow. As each danger is highlighted it is shown on the video circle. To navigate to the next danger in the list click the arrow. 65900010 8-21 . To display tick the Display Safety Regions check box. The route safety region is divided into segments and is defined as follows: Route safety region buffer = cross track error limit + ½ ship beam.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes 4.

If the critical point label check box is ticked in the Route Display Settings. the CP number is also shown on screen. As the cursor moves over the route the letters ADD CRTP are displayed below the cross hair. Critical Point To generate critical points on a previously saved route open the route plan from the Route tab of the Edit Route sub menu.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Critical Points The Critical Points tab folder enables the operator to create specific LAT/LON positions on a route which are defined as critical points. The Critical Points tab folder is divided into the following areas: • Route • Critical Point The Route area enables the currently monitored route. Click on the required position. displayed in the route name field. a blue square is drawn at that position on the route and the window shows the abbreviation CP1 with its LAT/LON co- ordinates. to be saved and validated. To create critical points on a route do the following: 1. The selected route will appear on screen. An alarm or warning alert is generated when own ship is in the proximity of each critical point on the route (the alert can be triggered by either a specified distance or time). 2. 8-22 65900010 .Route Tab. Move the cursor to the position on the route where you want the first critical point to be placed. For a description of the Save and Error functions see Edit Route .

hold down the left button and move the trackball. Enter a label name using the keypad and click the keypad OK button. As each CP is created the blue square of the previous CP is displayed as a smaller orange square and the Critical Points window shows each CP's label and LAT/LON position.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes 3. select the CP and click in the field to the right of the label. and with the required CP label shown click in the LAT/LON fields. its colour changes from blue to turquoise and the No Errors button changes to Errors. The CP can be moved either up or down the length of the route. to select the next CP click the > button. CP2 etc. For a description of the position options available refer to `How to edit waypoint data' in Edit Route . 5. The CP is moved to the new position. To create more critical points continue to click on the required positions on the route. If a CP is moved away from the route. Or: 1. Move the cursor over the CP in the route. 65900010 8-23 . or to select the last CP click the >> button. a drop down keypad appears enabling you to select a position for the CP. Clicking the Goto button centres the video circle on the selected CP. The label appears next to the selected CP (if the label tick box is enabled in the Route Display Settings). 4.Waypoints Tab. To select the first CP in the route plan click the << button. the screen keypad appears. In the Critical Points tab navigate to the CP using the navigation buttons. To change a CP label from the default CP1. To change a CP's position do one of the following: 1. To select a previous CP in the route click the < button. 2. or away from the route. There are a number of ways of defining the LAT/LON position for the selected CP. When a LAT/LON position for the CP has been selected click the keypad OK button. When the required CP position is shown on screen release the left button.

shown in metres. The Ownship proximity changes to displaying the trigger value in minutes. enter the required alert message and when finished click the OK button on the keypad. To change the alert trigger to time. the critical points that were on that route track segment remain in their original place. The CP is removed from the screen and list. When own ship's proximity to a CP is less than the distance shown an alert is raised. Or 1. To generate alert text click in the Description field. As the cursor moves over the CP the letters DEL CRTP are displayed below the cross hair. 2. In the Critical Points window navigate to the CP to be deleted using the navigation buttons and click on the Delete button. 8-24 65900010 . Right click on the CP and select Delete Critical Point from the semi- transparent window. To change the alert setting to a Alarm click on the Generate Alarm radio button. a screen keypad is displayed. Each CP can be assigned a type of alert (Alarm or Warning) with the default alert set to Warning. The operator can define the text to be displayed when an alert is raised during route monitoring. When a route track segment is moved or deleted. Using the keypad.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To delete a critical point do the following: 1. The CP is removed from the screen and list. Although Critical points are associated with a route they are not associated with route track segments. To change the proximity time click in the field and move the trackball left (to decrease) or right (to increase). with the trigger being the proximity of own ship to a CP. Move the cursor over the CP to be deleted. The CP alert trigger defaults to distance. click on the drop down arrow to the right of the field and select Time.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Route Editor Table The route editor table enables the operator to monitor and edit all aspects of the route that has been opened from the Edit Route folder and is displayed on screen. 65900010 8-25 .inserts a new waypoint between two existing waypoints  Delete . Click on a waypoint. The four buttons to the right of the check boxes enable the following route editing actions:  Add . the waypoint and its adjoining legs are displayed in white. The route editor table displays the edited route's name and lists all the route's waypoint attributes and leg attributes as fields in a spreadsheet.tick this box to automatically scroll the table to display selected waypoint data. The Route Editor table is only available when the system is in Standby.tick this box to only display columns containing leg specific data  Auto Scroll .  Insert .deletes the selected waypoint from the route and redraws the route  Reset . The three check boxes at the top of the table enable the following display options:  Waypoint Data .tick this box to only display columns containing waypoint specific data  Leg Data . To move the waypoint hold down the left key and use the trackball to drag the waypoint to the desired location.resets selected waypoint data to default values To edit waypoint or leg data directly on screen: 1. 2. To open the route editor table click on the Editor Table button in the Route tab of the Edit Route sub menu.adds a new waypoint to the end of the route.

To change the waypoint's turn radius click on the small dot at the centre of the radius. To save any changes to the currently edited route click on the Save button. If changes to the route result in validation errors the Errors button at the top of the table will display a yellow background and the route name is also shown in yellow. If waypoints are added or deleted the table will redraw. for more information see Routes Tab Folder. The following waypoint data is read-only on the route editor table:  The estimated time of arrival (ETA) showing the date and time to the wheel-over. otherwise the ETA to the next waypoint. 8-26 65900010 .g.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 3. if a wheel-over exists for the waypoint. Route 2*). To re-size the table to automatically fit all current waypoint data click on the Auto Fit button. If changes to the edited route have been made the route name shows an asterisk after the name (e. The following editable data for each leg/turn segment is displayed as read- only in the Speed Planning Setup window:  Planned Speed  Minimum Speed  Maximum Speed Waypoint Data on Route Editor Table The following waypoint data can be edited on the route editor table:  Label. hold down the left key and use the trackball to increase or decrease the radius. clicking the Reset Min/Max Speeds button calculates and resets the minimum and maximum speed values over each leg of the route. shown in degrees per minute  Turn radius of wheelover  Turn speed of own ship  Turn cross track error (XTE) . the route is saved and the asterisk removed from the name. If manual changes have been made to planned speeds over a route leg. the name given to the waypoint  Latitude/Longitude values  Turn rate through wheelover. As edits to the route are made the data in the table automatically changes.the distance by which ownship's position can deviate left or right from the route plan. or changes to the ETA. Click on the button to view the validation errors.

the bearing angle of each leg  Leg Time . To place the waypoint at a specific geographic object select Query. Click in the LAT/LON data field. ii. Select the object from the list. 2. To clear the existing label. Manually enter a Lat/Lon position by using the numbers and navigation buttons on the keypad and click OK. a Chart Query window appears with a list of objects in the immediate area (see Chart Query).  XTE .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Leg Data on Route Editor Table The following leg data can be edited on the route editor table:  Speed . There are a number of ways of defining the LAT/LON position.the limit of deviation from the planned route at which activation of an automatic off-track error alarm occurs. shown in metres. click the Clear button. To change the waypoint LAT/LON position: 1.  Leg Type . hours and minutes) Editing Data on the Route Editor Table To edit route data in the route editor table do the following: To change the waypoint label: 1.the leg distance between each waypoint  Bearing .planned ground speed of ownship along route leg. i.a rhumb line or great circle. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click. the text becomes editable (green) and a drop down keypad appears. the text changes to green (editable) and the screen keypad appears.the estimated time for leg traversal (in days. Enter a label name using the keypad and click the keypad OK button. The following leg data is read-only on the route editor table:  Distance . Click in the label field for the selected waypoint. The label entered appears next to the selected waypoint (if the Show waypoint labels tick box is enabled in the Route Display Settings). 65900010 8-27 . the waypoint is repositioned over the chart object and a red circle filled with a red shaded background is drawn around the waypoint.

Left click in the field to set the revised value. The route will change dependent on the values entered. Move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the value. 2. 8-28 65900010 . or speed and XTE leg data: 1. iv. the text changes to green (editable). Click OK on the Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the chart object position. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click at the required location. v. To place the waypoint at a selected location on the chart display video circle select Chart. to change to Great Circle click on the drop down arrow to the right of value and select from the list. To change the leg type: The leg type defaults to Rhumb Line. To place the waypoint at own ship's CCRP select Ownship. To change the turn waypoint data. Click in the required field. the waypoint is repositioned to that location.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide iii.

 Dngrs (Dangers) . The Monitor Route window contains the following tab folders:  Route .displays read only data monitoring own ship's progress against a route plan. 65900010 8-29 .displays data on critical points that have been added to a route.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Monitoring a Route Monitor Route The Monitor Route window enables you to monitor all aspects of a route against own ship's course.lists dangerous objects and areas that intersect the route plan safety region.  CPs (Critical Points) . The monitored route must be initially saved and validated in the Edit Route sub menu.

When a route is loaded for monitoring. the ship’s cross-track distance from the route is displayed and whether the ship is to the right or left of the track. then route monitoring will stop. In some cases the system may begin monitoring a leg that is not the closest leg. If none of the route’s legs meet the criteria. If the ship’s COG deviates more than the bearing criteria. This will normally occur when own ship manoeuvres abruptly toward or away from the closest leg. A summary of the active leg of the monitored route is also shown on the Route tab in the lower right area of the screen. this is referred to as the `bearing criteria'. 8-30 65900010 . During route monitoring. To monitor own ship's progress against a route. monitoring automatically starts on the leg closest to the ship that is within the bearing criteria. temporarily.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Route The data shown in the Route tab folder is calculated internally from the monitored route and is read-only. the ship's COG must be within 110 degrees toward the planned track and within 80 degrees away from the planned track. Where monitoring values are not currently valid the field displays a series of dashes. so that. the bearing criteria are not met. then route monitoring will automatically start when the ship comes within the monitoring criteria of a route leg.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes The information displayed is as follows: Route Summary • Name The name of the route currently monitored.g. Leg & Turn • Leg Bearing The bearing of the currently monitored route leg. or UTC with a plus or minus figure if the current time is set to local and a time zone offset has been applied. • ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at wheel-over • Time Zone UTC. • XTE Alarm An alarm is raised if the XTE exceeds the value shown. • Leg TTG Time to go along the leg to wheel-over based on present ship speed. R = ship is right of track. Ship State • Ship State The state of ship on route e. • Planned Spd Planned speed in kilometres • Present Spd Present speed in kilometres • Required ROT Required rate of turn based on present ship speed • Spd Min/Max Minimum and maximum planned speed for upcoming turn. • XTE Cross Track Error is the distance off track. L = ship is left of track. • Leg DTG Distance to go along the leg to wheel-over. • Turn Radius Turn radius shown as NM • Plan ROT Planned rate of turn in degrees per minute. • Next Leg Brg Bearing angle of next leg of route. 'Sailing To W2 (2/5)' denotes next waypoint on route and total number of waypoints. • Next Leg Dist The distance to next leg in NM 65900010 8-31 .

• ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at the end of the route using own ship SOG for this leg and planned speeds for future legs. UTC + 02:00) Route Summary Info • Distance The total distance covered by this route • Duration The total duration of the route at planned speed shown in hours and minutes. 8-32 65900010 . • Avg Speed The average speed of the vessel over the route.g. • Route If a description has been entered at Edit Route .Route Tab it will Description appear in this column.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Overall • Distance & Distance and time to go to the Time To Go end of the route using distance along legs with own ship SOG for this leg and planned speeds for future legs. • Time Zone Time zone UTC (if Local time is selected the local offset is shown as a + or . • Modified The date and time that the route was last modified.e.

Alerts take the form of operator messages. Highlight the route to be monitored from the list and click on the OK button. Click on the Load Route button in the Route Summary area. The route and its data are removed from the screen and Monitor Route tab folder. With the route details shown in Monitor Route. If an alert is not acknowledged after a period of 30 seconds the Alert is then escalated to an Alarm. left click again to fix the value.0º. • Req ROT The maximum rate of turn angle Difference that own ship may move from the Limit route track defaults to 10. The Load Route window appears with a list of all the previously saved routes. 2. • Course The maximum bearing angle that Difference own ship may move from the route Limit track defaults to 25. the route data is displayed in the Monitor Route sub menu. above the Show Menu button. • Backup Backup navigator alarms are raised Navigator if the wheelover notifications are not Alarm acknowledged when the check box is ticked. click on the Clear Route button. their name and last modification date.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Settings • Wheelover Alerts will be displayed in Notifications monitoring mode when the check box is ticked. To monitor a route do the following 1.0 /min. 65900010 8-33 . To change the Settings values left click in the respective field and move the trackball left (to decrease) or right (to increase). which appear. To clear a route: 1. The route appears on screen and if the route meets the monitoring criteria.

To edit a currently monitored route. saved and then reloaded from the Monitor Route tab folder. To change a currently monitored route. click the OK button. 5. 3. the monitored route on screen is replaced with the new version. 8-34 65900010 . do the following: 1. 6. As the route is changed the screen shows the monitored route in the original position. Save the changes made to the route. Make the required edits to the route.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Editing a currently monitored Route When a route is being monitored the route is rendered in the non-editable monitor colour (red). A currently monitored route can only be changed from the Edit Route tab folder. for details refer to Edit Route - Waypoints Tab. 4. and open the currently monitored route from the Load Route window. The system displays a warning stating that the route being saved is the currently loaded route for monitoring and that changes will not affect the monitored route. When you are monitoring a route and open the same route for editing the system creates a duplicate route with the edit route mode superimposed over the monitored route in the editable colour (pink). 2. select Edit Route. Navigate back to the Monitor Route tab folder and reload the revised route. Click the Clear / New button to remove the route from the Edit Route folder.

Display Safety Regions The Dangers tab folder also includes the option of displayingg the t safety region for the monitored route. When the button is clicked the Leg or Turn at the specific area where ownship is on the monitored route expands.Dangers. refer to Edit Route . The Show Present Leg or Turn button enables the operator to check for dangers and cautions at the current leg or turn of the monitored route.Dangers. 65900010 8-35 . Any dangers and cautions related to that segment can be accessed from the navigation tree.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Dangers The Dangers tab folder enables the operator to view objects and areas that could endanger the safety of own ship on the currently monitored route. see Edit Route . For information on the route safety sa region. WARNING! Temporary routes are not separately safety checked. For a descripti iption of dangers. The operator must rely on own ship safety region for detecting dangers while own ship is on a temporary route. cautions and route safety regions. The information presented here is the same as the information ion in the Dangers tab folder of the Edit Route sub menu.

No data is displayed when a route is first loaded. see Edit Route . its alert trigger and own ship proximity trigger (distance or time).Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Critical Points The Critical Points tab folder enables you to select and view position and alert trigger details on critical points that have been generated in the Critical Points tab folder of the Edit Route menu. click on the Goto button. To select the first CP on the route click on the < button. click on the > button. The next CP in the route is selected and its data shown in the folder. When CPs are selected from the tab folder the screen symbol changes from a square to a rounded triangle. along with all other chart and target positions.Critical Points). Own ship. Routes can be loaded for monitoring and cleared in the same way as described for the Route tab folder. the type of alert generated (Alarm or Warning) and any CP description that has been generated. The field to the right of the < button will show the abbreviation CP1 (unless the CP label has been changed from the default. CPs are shown as red squares in Monitor mode. 8-36 65900010 . are moved in accordance. When a CP has been selected the folder shows the point's LAT/LON position. the Route area shows the name of the monitored route. To view position and alert trigger details on further CPs. The bottom of the folder displays the selected CP DTG and TTG status. When a route is loaded. To centre the screen on the selected Critical Point.

 Speed . hours and minutes) to travel to the end of the monitored route.the calculated average speed to make the ETA indicated at end of monitored route.  ETA is the date and UTC time own ship is expected to arrive at the Distance based on the speed. Select a waypoint from the list and click the OK button. The distance shown against the selected waypoint appears in the Distance field.  Time . Click on the WP. the following default values apply:  Distance defaults to 1. If the ETA Calculator is opened when there is not a monitored route plan.. 2. With a route loaded for monitoring.. the following Action Required window lists the waypoints in the route and the current distance of each waypoint from own ship. 65900010 8-37 .  Time is the time it takes to travel the Distance based on the speed.the estimated time (in days. To select a different waypoint on the route: 1. speed and distance between waypoints on a monitored route. button.  ETA . The window includes Monitor Route:  Distance .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes ETA Calculator The ETA Calculator window enables you to calculate the time.represents the ETA (date and time) of own ship at end of route.the distance own ship must travel to the end of the monitored route.0NM  Speed is own ship's current SOG. or for the selected waypoint. click on the ETA Calculator sub menu from the Routes menu.

When the distance and speed values are changed the Time and ETA values are automatically updated. or right to increase the value.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To change the ETA Calculator values do the following: 1. 8-38 65900010 . Enter in the required time values using the keypad and click OK when complete. a numerical keypad appears below the field. a navigation keypad appears. Click OK when complete. 3. When the Time value is changed the Speed and ETA values are automatically updated. to decrease. 2. Click on the left or right arrows to navigate to the data to be changed and with the text in highlight click on the up/down arrows to change the values. with the value shown as green move the trackball left. When the ETA value is changed the Speed and Time values are automatically updated. To change the Distance or Speed values click in the respective fields. To change the Time value click to the left of the value. To change the ETA value click on the value to be changed.

the text changes to green (editable). • Speed .0 kn if no changes were made to the approaching and departing legs for each waypoint on the route. To change Route ETA settings do the following: 1. see Edit Route – Waypoints Tab. 2. Click the button again to return to the full Route ETA window. The button changes to display the speeds for present leg and future legs. Manual speed defaults to 0. To hide the speed options click the Hide options button.0 kn. When speed values are entered.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Route ETA The Route ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) enables the following settings to be changed or selected on a monitored route: • Waypoint selection . Each leg of a route may have different speed settings selected. To change the speed for the present leg or future legs to the planned speed entered at the Edit Route menu select the Planned radio button. or any planned speeds given when the route was edited.click on the drop down arrow to select a waypoint on the monitored route. The planned speeds show 10. or planned speeds selected. To enter a speed for the present leg or future legs select the Manual radio button and click in the Manual field. Move the trackball right to increase the value and left click again to accept the value. either from the speed based on own ship's SOG. The field to the right gives the calculated distance (in nautical miles) from own ship to the select waypoint. 1. 2.enables the speed for a route's present leg (based on the waypoint selection) and the speed for future legs to be changed. the system then calculates the ETA based on the selected speed values. 65900010 8-39 .

Click the Calculated radio button to see the speed required to meet the desired ETA on the current leg and remaining legs based on the manual speeds entered. With the correct ETA data displayed click on the OK button. 3. Click inside the Desired ETA field on the specific data to be changed.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Required Speed Required Speed enables the user to specify a desired arrival time for any selected waypoint on a monitored route. To change the desired ETA and required speeds do the following: 1. When a desired arrival time is entered the system calculates own ship speed required to the present leg. To move the date or time back click on the Down arrow.g. To move the highlight back or forward (e. Select the waypoint from where the speed calculations are to be made. to move the date or time forward click on the Up arrow. iii. from Month to Year) click on the side arrows. and speed required for the remaining legs in order to achieve this arrival time. To change the ETA: i. 8-40 65900010 . 2. To specify a speed for the current leg and remaining legs select the Manual radio buttons and click in the Manual fields. The field data changes to green (editable). 4. Move the trackball right to increase the value and left click again to accept the value. When the desired arrival time is set the system calculates the speed required on the present leg and remaining legs of the route in order to achieve the specified ETA. the text changes to green (editable). iv. the selected data is highlighted and an editing window appears directly below the ETA field. The required speeds are shown in the Calculated fields. ii.

5 `Route Based Speed Control’ in the Optional Features User Guide.lets the operator to choose whether the current ship’s speed should be assumed for the current leg of the plan. • Speed Command Setting . section 3.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Speed Planning Speed Planning allows the operator to manually specify a plan for speeds to be used on remaining segments of the monitored route. Click on the Edit Speed Plan button at the bottom of the window. 2. as defined in `Ship State' on the Monitor Route . The Speed Planning Setup window appears on the chart display.when set to Manual. Note that before speed planning begins the window displays no data on the currently monitored route. Speed Planning Setup Speed Planning Setup allows the operator to create a speed plan that can be subsequently used to control the speed of the ship along the monitored route to any desired ‘Arrival Waypoint’. 65900010 8-41 . 3. • Current Leg Speed Command . The Speed Planning Setup window includes the following areas: • Arrival Time Planning . provides a simple way to initialize all speed commands. It also enables a desired arrival time (for any given waypoint) to be specified. From the Routes menu.enables an arrival time for a waypoint to be selected. open the Speed Planning window. To activate Speed Planning on a monitored route: 1. Own ship must be sailing on the monitored route before speed planning can commence. Load the route to be monitored from the Monitor Route . and see recommended adjustments to planned speeds needed to achieve this arrival time.lets the operator choose whether speed commands should be calculated (based on arrival time) or manually adjusted. • Initialize Manual Speed Command . Planned speeds or computed adjustments to these speeds may subsequently be used to control the ship’s propulsion system.Route Tab. 65900014.Route Tab. and see what arrival times result from these plans. For a description refer to Chapter 3.

8-42 65900010 . Arrival Time Planning The Arrival Time Planning area includes selection of the arrival waypoint and desired arrival date/time. the list displays all the remaining waypoints along the monitored route. max speed. etc. The Arrival Waypoint field defaults to displaying the last waypoint on the route plan.). The system selects Assume current speed and Limited Required Speed options.displays arrival times for the various choices of speeds (planned speed.shows planned speeds and limits for each leg and turn of the route. and the speed table is updated accordingly. if own ship is sailing to D9 waypoint on the route. For example. the desired arrival date/time field is calculated by assuming that ownship will complete the current leg at the current speed and complete the remaining legs at the planned speed. To change the arrival waypoint click on the drop down arrow. all waypoints from D9 onwards will be available for selection.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide • Speed Table . When a waypoint is selected. • Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time To Go .

It includes two settings: Assume current speed and Allow speed change. • Assume current speed forces the speed of the current leg to be equal to ownship’s present ground speed. 1. When the desired date/time data is changed. Current Leg Speed Command The Current Leg Speed Command area allows the operator to select how the speed of the current leg will be affected. such that the desired arrival date/time is achieved. If the Speed Command Setting is Manual. 65900010 8-43 . and possibly (depending on settings made in the Route Editor Table) the speed command values in the speed table. Click on the left or right arrows to navigate to the data to be changed and with the text in highlight click on the up/down arrows to change the values. click the radio button next to the option. To the right of this field is the desired arrival Time To Go before own ship reaches the end of the route. If the setting is Limited Required Speed. This value is then used 16 to compute the Required Speed . the required speed values in the speed table. Click OK when complete. • Allow speed change enables values other than ship's current ground speed to be used for the speed command on the current leg. The text changes to green (editable) and a navigation keypad appears. 2. the system automatically updates the calculated time to end of route. then the system may change the speed command for the current leg to achieve the desired arrival time. 16 Required Speed is the speed own ship needs to travel for a given route segment. To change the leg speed command. To change the arrival date/time click in the field.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes The Desired Arrival Date/Time allows the operator to enter the date and time that they wish to arrive at the arrival waypoint. then speed commands may be edited for the current leg. 3. Note that the Desired Arrival Date/Time value only has an effect if Limited Required Speed is selected.

the Initialize Manual Speed Command buttons become active and the Leg/Turn values in the Speed Command column become editable. 2. 17 Limited Required Speed is the required speed for each segment but limited to the minimum and maximum speeds of each segment. To change the Manual Speed Command settings. Once the Manual radio button has been selected. 17 • Limited Required Speed . do the following: 1. limited to Ownship’s max speed. • Manual allows the operator to manually enter a speed command for each leg.instructs the system to compute the speed commands required to arrive at the ‘Arrival Waypoint’ based on the Desired Arrival Date/Time. limited button to match the required speeds. It includes two settings: Manual and Limited Required Speed. Click the Required Speeds button to make all speed commands for each segment match the required speeds. When this option is selected the system will not compute the speeds necessary to arrive at the `Arrival Waypoint’ as entered in Desired Arrival Date/Time’. Click the Planned Speeds button to make all speed commands for each segment match the planned speeds. 8-44 65900010 . Click the Required Speeds.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Speed Command Setting The Speed Command Setting area allows the operator to select how the speed commands are entered into the plan. limited to the min and max speed for each segment. 3.

click the Cancel button. If the speed command is outside the Minimum/Maximum speed limits the value is displayed in yellow. the text changes to green (editable). Left click again to exit edit mode. Click in the required field of the Speed Command column for the Leg/Turn. based on speed values in the Leg/Turn segments: • Planned . To accept the entered speed click the OK button on the message.based on leg/turn speeds entered in Speed Command. 65900010 8-45 . • Latest Possible . or right to increase. to cancel the monitoring and edit the speed command to be within the speed limits. • Earliest Possible .based on leg/turn speeds in Max Speed. 2. an Action Required message appears.based on leg/turn speeds in Planned Speed. • Ordered . If monitoring of the speed plan begins by clicking the Begin Monitoring button while any manually entered speed command is outside the limits. Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time to Go The Arrival Date/Time (UTC) and Arrival Time To Go fields show the following data in their respective columns. Move the trackball left to decrease the value.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes To manually enter speed commands for each leg/turn segment: 1. • Desired .based on leg/turn speeds in Min Speed.based on leg/turn speeds in Required Speed.

or last waypoint on route. • Arrival WPT . • List of Leg/Turn segments and specified Speed Commands • Estimated Arrival Time . the Speed Planning Setup window reappears.selected arrival waypoint. When speed orders and/or arrival times are changed in Speed Planning Setup the Begin Monitoring button must be clicked again in order to enter the revised values in the Speed Planning window.the arrival date/time and TTG specified in the Ordered column of Speed Planning Setup. To change the speed command values click the Edit Speed Plan button.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Monitoring Speed Planning When the required selections have been made to the speed plan click the Begin Monitoring button. are displayed in the Speed Planning window: • Speed Command Setting . 8-46 65900010 . the plan is locked and the system begins monitoring based on the speed plan. configured in the speed planning setup window. The following read-only values.the arrival time based on the speed commands presented in this window.the current speed command as selected in Speed Planning Setup. • Intended Arrival Time .

Further waypoints can be created in the same way. Creating and Editing a Temporary Route To create and edit a temp route do the following: 1. either independently. a waypoint circle is drawn at the selected point and a turn radius drawn representing the value in the Turn Radius field. 65900010 8-47 . 2. The length of the line segment represents the value shown in the Waypoint DTG field (default value 2000 metres). speed. in Temp Route mode the letters TMP WYPT are shown just beneath the cross hair. To add waypoints to the temp route move the cursor into the video circle chart window. turn statistics and waypoint DTG default values. A temp route may be used to join and transition to a previously planned route. from Temp1 to Temp2) and turn radius are created.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Temporary Route Plans A temporary route (temp route) can be created and displayed on screen. The speed value is taken from own ships current SOG and the turn radius is a system configurable default value. an adjoining route leg (i. Left click at the required position to create the first waypoint. The Temp Route tab folder displays off track limit. underneath the COG dashed line. 4.e. Select Temp Route from the Route menu and click on the Create/Edit button. 3. A short straight segment starting at the bow of the ship and in the direction of the ship’s COG is drawn. The segment is displayed as a purple dotted line. To create more waypoints left click at the required position. All temp routes originate from own ship's CCRP and is shown as a dotted line. The previous waypoint is now labelled TempWO(1). or in addition to a currently displayed planned route. The end of the line segment is labelled as TempWO(0) (if Show waypoint labels is ticked in the Route Display Settings). The temp route is edited and monitored independently of the planned route via the Temp Route tab folder.

click on the Start button in the Monitoring Controls. 3. The Wheelover DTG is changed by adjusting the Waypoint DTG. therefore increasing the waypoint DTG is the preferred option when the temp route is to be used to make a significant course change. With a temp route created and validated. Monitoring a Temporary Route The temp route must pass route validation before it can be monitored. a temporary prompt appears and validation errors must be repaired in Create/Edit mode before monitoring. The Overall. If a temp route is invalid. The temp route now becomes the monitored route. see Monitoring Routes. Own ship begins sailing along the first leg of the route towards TempWO(1).Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 5. When own ship has passed the wheelover DTG the field changes to displaying Past on a red background. To clear a non-monitored temp route from the chart window and Temp Route folder click on the Clear button. 2. To monitor a temp route do the following: 1. Selected Turn or Waypoint DTG default values may be changed by clicking in the relevant fields and moving the trackball left or right to increase or decrease the values. If there is a planned route loaded. 8-48 65900010 . the monitoring window will revert to displaying the ship’s status against the planned route. the colour of the route changes to red and the Monitor Route window opens on the Route tab folder with Temporary Route in the monitored route field. The Monitor Route tab folder displays the same monitoring values for a temp route as shown for planned routes. Temp routes are not normally the recommended means to make urgent manoeuvres.

`Temp Route to Route 1'. 4. Load the route to be monitored from the Route tab folder of the Monitor Route window.g. e. Create a temp route as described above. Click Start to begin monitoring the Temp Route. see Monitor Route . In Temp Route mode. the letters under the cursor change from TMP WYPT to ADD RTP. Click on any point on the monitored route. To transition a temp route to a monitored route do the following: 1. The Monitor Route. 3. The system creates an additional waypoint which smoothly transitions the temp route to the monitored route. 2. 65900010 8-49 . move the cursor to the monitored route.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Transitioning a Temporary Route to a Monitored Route A temp route may be used to transition own ship's course to a monitored route.Route Tab. Route tab folder and the Routes button show the route monitoring status. When own ship has sailed past the temp route the monitoring status changes to show the monitored route only.

formed from a series of expanding squares centred upon the start point of the search.formed from a series of parallel legs. • Creeping Line .Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Search and Rescue Search and Rescue (SAR) patterns are specialized routes that can be used to patrol a given area. 8-50 65900010 . moving out from left or right of the initial heading. The size of the square is increased every four legs. The following SAR search patterns are supported (see descriptions and figure below): • Parallel Line .formed from a series of parallel lines at right angles to the initial heading. • Expanding Box . • Sector Search .formed from a series of three equilateral triangles centred on the initial start position of the pattern. placed forward in the same direction as the initial heading.

set to 10 knots. 1. Navigate in the calendar to select the required start date. Left click again to accept the value. a popup calendar appears with the current date highlighted. or right to increase. either: i.based on ownship's current position. To change the ETD. the data changes to green (for editable day time setting) and an editing window appears directly below the field. The button pages through the pattern options described above. 65900010 8-51 .set to the current time. Change the current date only by clicking on the drop down button to the right of the ETD field. To change the SAR default values the following: The total distance and the time it would take to sail the SAR pattern depends on the route properties and pattern parameters. • Speed . The last SAR pattern selected will appear on the video circle and the following default values are applied to each SAR pattern at the time the Search and Rescue menu is displayed: • Heading .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Creating SAR Patterns To create and edit SAR patterns click on Search and Rescue in the Routes menu. 2. Or: ii. Click inside the ETD field. • ETD . • Start Position . To change the heading and speed left click in the field and move the trackball left to decrease the value.based on ownship's current heading. The SAR pattern is changed on the display by clicking on the SAR button that identifies the current pattern.

the text becomes editable (green) and a drop down keypad appears. iv. With the correct ETD data displayed click the OK button. to move the date or time forward click on the Up arrow. Click OK on the Chart Query window to fix the waypoint at the chart object position. a Chart Query window appears with a list of objects in the immediate area (see Chart Query). from Month to Year) click on the side arrows. the waypoint is repositioned over the chart object and a red circle filled with a red shaded background is drawn around the waypoint.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide iii. v. To move the highlight back or forward (e. the waypoint is repositioned to that location. To place the first waypoint at a selected location on the video circle select From Chart. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click. To move the date or time back click on the Down arrow. To place the first waypoint at own ship's CCRP select Ownship. To place the first waypoint at a specific geographic object select Query. There are a number of ways of defining the start position. To specify a range or bearing for the first waypoint select Offset. Manually enter a LAT/LON position by using the numbers and navigation buttons on the keypad and click OK.g. ii. i. An Offset window appears where you can set a range and bearing offset from the current position. The first waypoint is moved to the entered position. Select the object from the list. Move the cursor to the display (a ? is added to the cursor) and left click at the required location. 3. iii. iv. 8-52 65900010 . To change the start position of the SAR pattern click in the LAT/LON data fields.

To change the pattern parameters refer to step 1 above. To change the orientation of the SAR pattern click the Port or Starboard radio button. To change the leg type from the default Rhumb Line click on the drop down button and select Great Circle. To clear a SAR pattern from the display click the Clear button. 6. 5. Parallel Line.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes The following parameter default values apply to each SAR pattern: Parameter Default Pattern Length 5 NM Creeping Line. Expanding Box Separation 1 NM Creeping Line. The route will also generate errors and warnings. 9. This route can then be opened for monitoring and editing in the same way as other routes. To save changes made to a SAR pattern click the Save button and enter a name for the SAR pattern route. To restore the setting values to the default parameters click the Reset button. Parallel Line Width 2 NM Creeping Line. When a SAR pattern is saved the system creates a route. 65900010 8-53 . If a SAR pattern route generates validation errors the No Errors button changes to Errors with a yellow background. Parallel Line Expanding Box Sector Width 5 NM Sector Search 4. 8. 7. Validation errors are rectified in the same way as described in Edit Route – Route Tab. see Monitor Route and Edit Route.

• There are fewer than two waypoints in the route. All attributes of external routes are read-only. and to monitor the route. Monitoring External Routes The External Routes menu is used to select the source of the external route. then system default values are used. • the estimated amount of time and distance before reaching the TO- waypoint based on the current ground speed of the ship. with the exception of leg type and off-track alarm limit. a GPS system). Default Attributes If the waypoint or leg attributes of an external route are not specified. providing they are transmitted to the system in an acceptable format. 19 The waypoint to which the ship is approaching. All external routes are subjected to route validation. Only one external route can be displayed and monitored at a time. 8-54 65900010 .Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide External Routes The VisionMaster FT system can be configured to accept external routes 18 from up to five external sources (for example. 19 • the name of the TO-waypoint while route monitoring. A system by which receivers anywhere on earth can obtain accurate position data. The following external route attributes are displayed on the External Routes menu: • the ship’s cross-track distance from the route and whether the ship is to the right or left of the track. it is not displayed and a warning is raised notifying the operator of an attempt to import an invalid external route. The following functions are not provided for external routes: • track control 20 • return to planned route • saving route 18 Global Positioning System. 20 A return to planned route is a leg that joins a temporary route with a planned route. External Route Validation The external route is considered invalid if any of the following apply: • The latitude of any waypoint is within one degree of a pole. If an external route is considered invalid.

to a maximum of 9 subsequent route legs with their associated waypoints. Each node is able to display an external route independently. Multi-node Support External routes and associated source selection are distributed to all nodes on the network. The system automatically scrolls ahead in the route each time a new waypoint is reached. This means that only a subset of the total number of legs and waypoints in the actual route will be displayed. 65900010 8-55 . This normally includes the route leg from the most recently passed waypoint.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes The system is designed to display the “working” portion of the route received from an external source.

Routes not currently on a console can be imported from an external drive (usually a USB device). Click on the route file to select for import. On a multi-node system a route saved on one node can be accessed and edited on any node on the network. 3. Navigate to the external drive where the route resides (this will usually be a USB device). 2. if successful a temporary confirmation prompt appears. The field below the directory tree will show any valid route object files on the selected device. the file name will appear in the Filename field. Note that this file may contain multiple routes.Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Importing and Exporting a Route The Import/Export sub menu enables you to import or export routes that have been created on a VisionMaster FT. The import/export facility is usually done when operating from a single node. Importing Routes To import routes do the following: 1. 8-56 65900010 . and existing routes can be exported to an external drive. Click the Import button to import the selected route file to your Workstation.

Enter the name of the route to export and click the Export button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Routes Exporting Routes To export routes do the following: 1. A temporary confirmation prompt appears displaying the external directory the route files have been exported to. An Export Routes window appears prompting to check mark the routes to export with all the saved routes on your workstation listed. To export individual routes click on the route in the list. Click the OK button. 3. 2. as routes are selected a tick box appears next to the line. Navigate to the external drive where the route or routes are to be exported to (this will usually be a USB device). 4. to select all for export click the Check- Mark All button. Or. all routes are selected. 65900010 8-57 .

displays a label for each critical point (CP1 etc. • Critical Point labels . defaults to ticked. The following display settings are available: • Display Monitored Route .displays the route currently being monitored.) • Wheel-over labels .Routes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Route Display Settings The Route Display Settings sub-menu enables you to select the graphic display of labels associated with the displayed route. • Waypoint labels .) • Leg bearings . 8-58 65900010 .the wheel-over line is drawn at right angles to the route leg that approaches the associated turn. The bottom of the Route Display Settings window shows a description of the settings as the cursor moves over each setting text.the wheel-over line is drawn parallel to the next leg in the route.displays a label for each waypoint (W1 etc.displays own ship's planned speed between each waypoint.displays a numerical label for each wheel-over (WO(2) etc.) When all display options are ticked the route is displayed as shown below.displays bearing data of each route leg in degrees • Planned speeds . • Perpendicular to leg . The Wheel-over type section of the folder determines how the wheel-over lines are drawn and includes the following radio buttons: • Parallel to next leg .

initially centred on CCRP. An ERBL is used to describe the combination of an EBL and a VRM. Each EBL and its associated VRM are identified by having the same mark/space ratio for the line and ring. or another selected origin point. Each VRM is a ring of long dashes. EBLs display distance and bearing between objects and are shown as a dashed white line drawn on the video circle with its origin initially from the CCRP or another selected origin point. then a small cross appears on the EBL where the VRM intersects.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Chapter 9 Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs) Two electronic bearing lines (EBLs) and two variable range markers (VRMs) are available in both Standby and Transmit modes and can be displayed simultaneously or separately on the video circle. If an EBL is turned On while its associated VRM is turned Off. The first and second VRMs have different mark/space ratio of line dashes. VRMs are used to display a range ring. 65900010 9-1 . When an EBL is switched on the EBL bearing value (degrees) and VRM range value (nautical miles) associated with the EBL are displayed to the right of the button.

As own ship's course and speed progresses the ERBL remains stationary at a fixed point on the video circle.moves the ERBL back to the position centred on own ship's CCRP. After being offset.Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Off-Centring. or its end point dropped. After Offset Origin or Drop Origin has been applied the following option becomes available: • Centre Origin . the ERBL remains at a fixed position on the ground. Carrying and Dropping an ERBL The default position for EBL1/VRM1 and EBL2/VRM2 is centred on own ship's CCRP. When dropped. After Drop origin only has been applied the following option becomes available: • Carry Origin . 9-2 65900010 . when the offset position is fixed the ERBL is in Carry mode. • Drop Origin .the ERBL moves relative to own ship from the location selected in Drop Origin. the ERBL is carried at a constant relative bearing and range from the CCRP. dropped. regardless of the current stabilisation mode (ground or water referenced). When centred the ERBL can be offset.moves the ERBL to a location anywhere on the chart window. • Drop End Point -drops the ERBL's intersection point at a fixed location. • The range and bearing to the end point update every second. The initial options available by right clicking on the EBL/VRM buttons are: • Offset Origin . but carries the origin with own ship.drops the ERBL in a fixed location.

The EBL E lettering and button return to normal. There are two ways of changing the bearing of an EBL. Move the trackball left or right to change the EBL's bearing. A cross oss hair is shown at the point where the VRM intersects the EBL. denoted by the th letter T to indicate true bearing. With the bearing angle correctly set release the left key ke to accept. left click on the EBL button. To change the bearing of an EBL do the following: To change the EBL bearing angle using the trackball: 1. BL. Either er enter the values directly in the EBL field or manually drag the line to the he selected position using the trackball. or the letter R for relative bearing. Changing the EBL Bearing The EBL bearing angles may be true or relative. 3. Previous set ettings are remembered when they are switched off. and the EBL is removed from the video circle. r Alternatively. Left click on the EBL caption button. To turn the EBL off. On the video circle the EBL is displayed as a dashed line at a bearing angle dictated by the EBL L readout. When an EBL is switched on the value of its associate iated VRM is also shown. the cursor changes ch to the following graphic 2. The EBL button is highlighted. the lettering appears bold and the last bearing value entered is displayed. the bearing value and the he VRM range value are replaced by the Off caption.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and nd Bearing Lines Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) Each EBL can be turned on or off independently. although the VRM is switched off. turn the EBL rotary control on the control pan anel to switch on EBL1. 65900010 9-3 . Position the screen cursor over the EBL. 2. To turn on an EBL from the ERBL window. 4. do the followin ing: 1. bea The readout changes in the EBL field and the reciprocal bearing be automatically changes. Click on any point of the EBL and hold the left key dow own.

A semi transparent window appears on the screen with the options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop EBL / VRM. Drop Origin (D) and Drop End Point (E). 9-4 65900010 . Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode. To change the EBL bearing from the Control Panel: 1. 2. Right click on the origin of the EBL on the video circle. Left click in the readout field. Move the trackball left or right until the required readout is displayed. or anti-clockwise to decrease the EBL bearing angle. If both EBLs are switched off. The readout text becomes editable (green).Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To change the EBL bearing from the readout: 1. 3. Changing the EBL Position To change the origination of an EBL do the following: There are two methods of moving an EBL to an off-centre position: 1. Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is selected: 1. The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator and the EBL and its associated VRM caption displays the suffix (C). turning the EBL rotary will automatically switch on EBL1. A floating window appears with the options: Offset Origin. Turn the EBL rotary control clockwise to increase the EBL bearing angle. For a description of these options see Electronic Range and Bearing Lines (ERBLs). If EBL1 is switched off but EBL2 is on then turning the rotary will adjust the EBL2 bearing. Or: 2. With the EBL switched on right click on the caption button.

the EBL/VRM range and bearing are continually updated to the dropped intersection point. 2. move the EBL to the required offset location. the EBL is now in Carry mode and moves relative to own ship. When Offset is selected. When Drop End Point (E) is selected from the EBL readout: 1. 2. As the ship moves. the EBL is immediately positioned wherever the cursor is on the video circle. Or to drop the EBL/VRM at the current position select Drop Origin (D) from the drop down window. Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected: 1.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines 2. use the trackball to move the EBL to the required location and release the left button to drop the EBL. Left click to position. left click and hold on the EBL origin. To re-position the EBL back to own ship's CCRP either right click on the EBL caption and select Centre Origin from the drop down window. With the left button held down. or right click on the EBL dot and select Centre EBL / VRM from the semi transparent window. 3. Using the trackball. Or right click to cancel and return EBL to the CCRP. or right click on the EBL origin and select Drop EBL / VRM. When the cursor is positioned over the EBL origin it changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. The EBL remains stationary in the selected location. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). To move. 65900010 9-5 . the origin of the EBL is indicated by a white dot. the EBL does not move when the cursor moves. To cancel Drop End Point right click on the readout and select Carry End Point. A white dot is displayed at the origin of the EBL and the EBL and its associated VRM caption are shown with the suffix (D). 3. Unlike Offset. When the EBL is offset.

and the range value iss replaced re by the Off caption. the screen cursor changes to the following graphic . When the range is correctly set left click to accept. the VRM is displayed as a dashed circle centred on the CCRP. Left click on the VRM caption button. 2. Either enter en the values in the VRM field or manually change the VRM diameter on the video circle. As the VRM size changes the EBL origin remains constan tant. The default range value ue for VRM 1 is 2. ci The range readout automatically changes in the VRM field. The size of the circle is dicta tated by the VRM range readout.5 NM. The VRM is removed from the video circle. 4. Left click to accept new readout and exit edit mode. To turn the VRM off left click on the VRM caption button. To change the VRM range from the readout: 1. To change the range of a VRM do the following: To manually change the VRM range: 1. 3. Changing the VRM and EBL range There are a number of ways to change the VRM range. 9-6 65900010 .5 NM.n. Left click on any point of the circle line and hold the left key ke down. To turn on a VRM do the following: 1. 2. The VRM range can also be changed in conjunction with the EBL BL bearing. 3. 2. Previous settin tings are remembered when they are switched off. The VRM button is highlighted. the default range value for VRM 2 is 4. Changing the size of the VRM does not change the EBLL bearing. Position the screen cursor anywhere over the VRM circle le line. Move the trackball left or right until the required readoutt is displayed. The readout text becomes s editable e (green). the lettering appears bold and the range value is displayed. Move the trackball left or right to change the size of the circle. On the video circle. Left click in the readout field.Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Variable Range Marker (VRM) Each VRM can be turned on or off independently.

The bearing and range readout values automatically update as the VRM / EBL is moved. Right click on the centre of the VRM on the video circle. Drop Origin (D) and Drop End Point (E). Or: 2.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Electronic Range and Bearing Lines To change the VRM range from the Control Panel: 1. the screen cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. turning the VRM rotary control will automatically switch on VRM1. Hold down the left key and move the trackball left or right to change the VRM range and EBL bearing. The cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator and the VRM and its associated EBL caption displays the suffix (C). Changing the VRM and EBL position To change the position of a VRM and its EBL do the following: There are two methods of moving a VRM and EBL to an off-centre position these are: 1. or anti-clockwise to decrease the VRM range. Release the left key to fix the VRM range and EBL bearing location. Carrying and Dropping an ERBL’ at the beginning of this chapter. A semi transparent window appears on the screen with the options Offset EBL / VRM and Drop EBL / VRM. With the VRM switched on right click on the caption button. Turn the VRM rotary control clockwise to increase the VRM range. If both VRMs are switched off. Where Offset Origin or Offset EBL / VRM is selected: 1. To change both the VRM range and its EBL bearing: 1. 65900010 9-7 . Move the cursor to the intersection position of the VRM and EBL. If VRM1 is switched off but VRM2 is on then turning the rotary control will adjust the VRM2 range. A floating window appears with the options: Offset Origin. 2. 3. For a description of these options see `Off-Centring.

Left click to position. Using the trackball move the VRM to the required offset location. 3. When Offset is selected the VRM is immediately positioned wherever the cursor is on the video circle. Where Drop End Point (E) is selected from the VRM readout: 1. or right click on the VRM origin and select Drop EBL / VRM. 3. 2. To re-position the VRM back to own ship's CCRP either right click on the VRM caption and select Centre Origin from the drop down window. When the VRM is offset the centre of the VRM is indicated by a white dot. Or right click to cancel and return VRM to own ship's CCRP. The EBL and VRM captions are shown with the suffix (E). The VRM remains stationary in the selected location. Unlike Offset. use the trackball to move the VRM to the required location and release the left button to drop the VRM.Electronic Range and Bearing Lines Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 2. In Drop End Point mode. the EBL/VRM readouts are greyed out. As the ship moves the ERBL range and bearing are continually updated to the dropped intersection point. To cancel Drop End Point right click on the readout and select Carry End Point (C) from the drop down. To move. the VRM is now in Carry mode and moves relative to own ship. When the cursor is positioned over the VRM origin it changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. 2. With the left button held down. 9-8 65900010 . or right click on the VRM origin and select Centre EBL / VRM from the semi transparent window. the VRM does not move when the cursor moves. left click and hold on the VRM origin. A white dot is displayed at the centre of the VRM and the VRM and its associated caption are shown with the suffix (D). The only way to change the EBL/VRM values or move the ERBL intersection point is on the video circle. Or to drop the ERBL at the current position select Drop Origin (D) from the drop down window. Where Drop Origin (D) or Drop EBL / VRM is selected: 1.

see `Target Anchor Watch’ in Annex B `Static Site'. which includes Target Data and AIS Info • Multiple Targets • Target Display • AIS Display • Acquisition Zones • Own Ship AIS • Limits and Settings • Test Targets • PAD (Predicted Area of Danger) This chapter also includes information on the tracking and monitoring of targets. selecting a target for echo reference and target repair. 21 Automatic Identification System. using an automated transponder.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Chapter 10 Targets The Targets facility provides information and management of all targets. the option to select a target for anchor watch will also be included. A system capability which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea. For information on this facility. 65900010 10-1 . including locally 21 tracked targets and AIS targets . The Targets sub- menu list is displayed with the following selection options: • Selected Target. If your VisionMaster system is a stationary installation. To open the menu left click on the Targets button in the main menu list.

The length of the vector is determined by the target’s velocity and the currently selected vector time.25 NM to 40 NM. see Cancelling Tracked Targets. if acquisition is attempted over an area containing no radar video) then the target is declared lost and the Lost Target icon (red cross) is displayed. see Acquisition Zones. Tracked targets can be cancelled. 2. The maximum number of targets that can be tracked by the system is 100. Left click on the target to be tracked. providing the targets are within the tracking range of 0. A green broken line circle initially appears centred on the target’s estimated position. Tracked targets may be named in the Target Data tab folder (providing Both is selected in Target Display). If good plot data is not extracted (i.e. If AIS is configured then the target's motion trend vector is shown as a dotted line. A number is automatically assigned to the target if enabled in the Identification area of Target Display. To view data on the tracked target left click on the target dot. Local targets can also be tracked automatically when they enter auto acquisition zones. When the target is established the broken line circle is replaced by a green dot and a motion trend vector indicating the target’s estimated velocity originated from the target's position. When a target is named the name entered appears above the assigned number.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Tracking Targets You can manually acquire individual local targets to be tracked. To track a target do the following 1. if AIS is not configured then the vector is shown as a solid line. 4. 10-2 65900010 . providing they are in the cancellation range up to 40 NM. A green broken line box appears around the dot and the target details appear in the Target Data tab folder of Selected Target sub menu. see Target Monitoring. see Vector Modes. 3.

25NM to 40NM) for both transceivers.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Tracking Targets on a Multi-Node System On a multi-node system target correlation information is distributed across all nodes to ensure target numbering is identical.) Where a target is correlated with a tracked target from an external input. acquired by the operator on a Radar or Chart Radar node are displayed. previously acquired on another node is selected to be tracked the system may initially assign the latest target number to it. The same limits on maximum number of targets tracked apply as for a single radar system. Only local tracked targets.e. along with consideration of the number of times video has been seen or not seen for the target. The system displays the better of the target information obtained. providing the targets are within the tracking range (0. with a single vector displayed at the target position. If the target passes into a blind arc of one radar but is still visible on the other. AIS and local tracked targets take priority over the external input target. targets are acquired as described for a single system. depending on the proximity of the selection made to the targets actual position (see Target Association values in Limits and Settings). the number assigned to the target when it was first acquired. Tracking Targets on a Dual Radar System On dual radar. This number will change to the correlated number once the target is tracked. based on a combination of reported accuracy information from the tracker. Video from both transceivers is used to track targets. (i. regardless of the display priority selected. the target will continue to be tracked as normal without any alarms being raised. When a target. such as a BridgeMaster E. These tracked targets will not appear on other nodes unless the operator manually acquires the same target. 65900010 10-3 .

whether manually. through AIS activation or automatically via an acquisition zone. but the local TRACKS FULL would not since none of the nodes have reached their maximum. If the number of tracked targets is near the maximum allowed (95) a warning is given. a system-wide SYSTEM TRACKS FULL alarm is raised and no further targets may be tracked on the nodes. In this case. When the number of targets reaches the maximum. Multi. 10-4 65900010 . the third node may only track up to 75 targets. If the number of tracked targets reaches 95% of the system maximum a warning is given. but if the first node is tracking 50 targets and the second node 75 targets. the SYSTEM TRACKS FULL alarm would be raised for 200 targets.Node The maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a multi-node system is 200. The warnings and alarms raised for tracked target capacity are independent of the how targets are actually acquired. When the number of targets reaches the maximum a local TRACKS FULL alarm is raised and no further targets may be tracked on the node.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Tracked Targets Capacity Single Node The maximum number of targets that can be tracked on a single node is 100. On a three node system each node may track up to 100 targets individually.

22 World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) is a chart datum model used by chart makers to map the earth’s surface. refer to AIS Display. AIS Target States 23 AIS targets are usually displayed on the video circle as triangles (unless the AIS is a scaled ship symbol) and may be shown in one of the following states: Sleeping A sleeping target is slightly smaller in size than an activated target and is not displayed with heading line or vectors. the length of line being proportional to the vector time. If heading data is missing or invalid the course vector is shown in place of the heading line.  The Sleeping Target filter setting is checked in AIS Display. received AIS transmissions continue to be stored so that known targets can be rendered quickly when conditions indicate rendering should proceed. this name will be used and may not be changed. 22  Own ship's position in WGS84 datum is known. When AIS targets are not being rendered. For information on enabling AIS input and setting AIS filter settings. Activated An activated target is displayed with heading and speed/course vector.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets AIS Targets AIS Rendering Conditions AIS targets are only rendered when the following conditions apply:  There is a valid position and heading for own ship  Enable Input is checked in AIS Display  AIS target messages are being received and are valid. The speed/course vector is a dashed line originating from the centre of the triangle. Names assigned to targets will be distributed across all nodes in the system. including AIS objects. 65900010 10-5 . If neither heading nor COG data is available the triangle is oriented toward the top of the display area. 23 If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned.

The display of sleeping targets may be switched off from the AIS Display sub menu. The ships outline symbol is not displayed if any of the following apply:  When the reference point of the reported position is unavailable. the targets will NOT be activated or raise an alarm if the CPA/TCPA limits are infringed. 10-6 65900010 . the dashed square outline appears centred on the target origin and information on the target is shown in the AIS window. When an activated AIS target’s length and beam exceed the standard AIS symbol triangle. Not used in An AIS target symbol that is not used collision avoidance in collision avoidance calculations when SOG and/or COG are not available is rendered as a dotted line with no vector.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Activated and When an activated target is selected Selected a dashed square outline appears centred on the target origin and information on the target is shown in the AIS Info window.5mm. • When the target infringes the CPA/TCPA limits or bow crossing criteria shown on the Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target sub menu. When the AIS ship's outline is selected to display target tote information. see Acquisition Zones.  When the beam of the outline is less than 7. The default state for a newly acquired target is sleeping. see below. If the display of sleeping targets is switched off. The following criteria will cause a sleeping target to become activated: • When manually selected by the operator. the AIS triangle is drawn with the ship’s outline around it.  When the dimensions of the ship are unavailable. • When the target enters an auto acquisition zone.

such as Aid to Navigation (ATON). To reactivate a sleeping target left click on the target again. The target is deactivated and its heading. all previous target data is restored. Changing an Activated Target to Sleeping An activated. In the event of AIS display capacity being exceeded. AIS Target Display Capacity The target processing capacity for rendering AIS targets and other AIS Nav symbols. All AIS targets can be set to sleeping with one command from the AIS Display window. left click on Set to Sleeping 3. SAR and Base Station at any one time is 240. 65900010 10-7 . Left click on the AIS target. Right click on the AIS target. If the target was activated and selected the selection box remains around the target. A semi-transparent window appears. 2. To set a target to sleeping do the following: 1. or activated and selected target can be manually set to sleeping. AIS targets further away will not be rendered until the maximum capacity has receded. providing it doesn't infringe the criteria listed above. 2. only the closest 240 AIS targets to own ship are displayed and used for CPA/TCPA. A dotted green square appears around the target and the AIS details are displayed in the Target Data tab folder of Selected Target sub menu. speed/course data and identification data is removed from the screen. To view data on an activated AIS target left click on the target again. 4.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets To manually activate an AIS target do the following 1. If the number of AIS targets and AIS nav symbols is near the maximum allowed (95%) AIS Nearly Full is shown as a permanent prompt. An AIS reference and automatically assigned target number will also be displayed. an activated AIS target will display a heading and speed/course vector. If the number of rendered AIS targets and AIS nav symbols exceeds the maximum of 240 an AIS Full alarm is raised. see `Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping' in AIS Display. if enabled in the Identification area of Target Display.

or whe hen it zone enters an Acquisition zone. thee target t infringement symbol and its heading/vectorr are a rendered in flashing red. WARNING! It is important that the operator deactivates non-essential ial AIS targets before the active AIS capacity is reached. If the number of active AIS targets exceeds the maximum an Acti ctive AIS Full alarm is raised. AIS Target Alarm States The following alarms states apply to any AIS target in any state. Lost Activated targets that are deemmed lost are rendered with a red cross ththrough the AIS symbol. If the number of active AIS exceeds the maximum the sysystem will NOT alarm additional AIS targets or sleeping targets. The target maintain ains its last heading and COG/SOG and will ill continue to be dead reckoned until the los lost target alarm is acknowledged. Note that lost AIS targets do not ot generate CPA/TCPA alarms.Targets Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Active AIS Target Capacity The maximum number of active AIS targets on a single node orr multi-node m is 40. 10-8 65900010 . The cro ross symbol flashes while the Lost Ta Target alarm is unacknowledged. When the AIS scaled ship symb bol is used the ship outline is also rendered ed in flashing red.. (with ( the exception that sleeping targets do not raise the Lost alarm):  CPA/TCPA/BCR or Acquisition Zone infringement  Lost CPA/TCPA/BCR When an AIS target infringes the or Acquisition CPA/TCPA /BCR criteria. even ven if these AIS targets are on collision course with own ship. If the number of active AIS targets is near the maximum allowed d (95%) ( Active AIS Almost Full is shown as a warning.

WARNING! If a local node looses communication with the AIS distributing dis node. even when the target remains in the Acquisition Zone. Multi-Node Support for AIS Targets In a multi-node system. WARNING! An AIS target does NOT generate an alarm condition n if its filter setting (Class A or Class B) is switched off. 65900010 10-9 .  The AIS related controls described above will only affec ect the local node. The system will make one node (with an interface to an AIS device)de responsible for distributing the AIS target and own ship data to all other nodes. In a multi-node system:  AIS data will not be distributed if its repeat indicator is set se or the target data is invalid. Refer to o AIS A Display for information on AIS filter settings. but the symboll remains r in red until the CPA/TCPA and Bow Crossing infringement limits its no longer apply. all AIS targets are removed from the local node de display. When CPA/TCPA Limit and Bow Crossing Limit alarms hav ave been acknowledged the AIS symbol stops flashing.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets AIS targets in an Acquisition Zone will remain flashing red unti ntil the AZ Entry alarm is acknowledged (see Alarm Status Indicator). When Wh the alarm has been acknowledged the AIS symbol will revert to its normamal (green) state. one or more nodes may be responsibl ible for interfacing with the device that provides AIS target and own ship sh AIS data.  Acknowledgement of AIS alarm data can only be done e on o the node that the system has made responsible for data distributi ution.

If an infringement is detected an alarm is raised and an appropriate alarm symbol displayed flashing at the target's position. BCR/BCT infringements use ship's bow for reference. so that only lost targets within a specified limit from own ship will raise a Lost Target alarm. target has not yet reached the closest point but will do so). or • the target is cancelled or dropped. see Target Monitoring Symbols. The alarm is cleared when there are no targets infringing the defined limits. For details refer to Limits and Settings. any flashing alarm symbols stop flashing but remain over the target(s) infringing the limits. is removed when: • The target no longer infringes the defined limits. • Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are less than or equal to the limits entered. • The target is cancelled or dropped. using own ship's CCRP for reference.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Target Monitoring All targets are monitored for Lost Target. Lost Target If the system loses track of a target then a Lost Target alarm is raised for that target and an appropriate flashing alarm symbol placed over the target’s symbol. Any flashing Lost Target alarm symbols stop flashing when acknowledged but the alarm symbol remains centred over the lost target(s). CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT Infringement Conditions The conditions for a target to generate an infringement are: • Both CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are positive (i. The Lost Target alarm automatically clears when there are no lost targets. Once the alarm is acknowledged. On dual radar a Lost Target alarm is raised if neither transceiver has seen video in the last six scans. Established tracked targets and AIS targets (both activated and sleeping) are monitored for CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT infringements. The alarm symbol. for definition of limits see Limits and Settings. 10-10 65900010 .e. Lost Target alarms can be raised on all nodes and a lost target alarm range limit may be set. The alarm symbol is automatically cleared if: • the target ceases to report itself as lost. flashing or not flashing.

65900010 10-11 . Only one alarm symbol appears on a target at any one time. CPA/TCPA and BCR Solid circle infringements see Limits Unacknowledged alarm . The order of precedence is: 1.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets The CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values for a target are shown on the Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target sub menu. Acquisition Zone infringement Although the audible alarm may be temporarily or permanently muted (dependent on commissioning) the visual alarm symbol will always apply. or the alarm condition no longer applies.flashing red and Settings Acknowledged alarm ..target manually selected Acquisition Zone in Zone infringement . Target Monitoring Symbols The system shows the following alarm monitoring symbols used for targets. Lost Target 3. CPA/TCPA/ BCR 2. Acquisition Zone Small solid circle infringement -established Unacknowledged alarm – flashing red AZ zone infringement . Small solid dot established and Acknowledged alarm – solid green acknowledged Crossed flashing red lines centred on Lost Target the current target symbol.acquiring Flashing red until Acquisition Zone infringement is established.solid red Dashed circle. unless tracking has ceased.

These values are calculated on individual displays so that a target may. bow crossing) are applied on all nodes in the system. If other nodes have alarms for targets not present on the acknowledging node. have a different CPA/TCPA on each display. Whenever a target alarm is acknowledged on a node. depending on the results from the target tracker.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Multi-Node Support The same target monitoring limits (CPA/TCPA. for example. Each node evaluates the alarm conditions on the targets that have been processed by that node. all targets of the same number on other nodes will have their alarm condition acknowledged. the alarm condition for these targets remain unchanged. 10-12 65900010 .

Using reference targets t for collision avoidance purposes may be dange gerous. own n ship’s s velocity source is automatically selected to be ground based using the he echo reference generated velocity. WARNING! 1.e. Any tracked target can be selected as an echo reference. When a target has been selected as an echo reference. Echo reference targets must only be used for fo the calculation of true speed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Echo Reference Target Echo reference is a method for generating a ground stabilised ed own ship’s velocity by using a tracked target that is known to be stationary ary as a reference point. prov roviding the target is established (i. Only one target can be designated as the echo reference targe rget at any one time. The values es for own ship’s speed will also be degraded. 2. and AIS input is off. The loss of an echo reference target may have ha a major impact on the accuracy of the true speed an and true course values of tracked targets. has not been declared ed lost. therefore the operatorr should s be aware of the errors in target tracking data that th can result. 65900010 10-13 . has a vector). Once selected its velocity is assumed to be zero and an own ship's speed is calculated on this assumption. The accuracy of data reported for tracked target ets may be seriously degraded.

To change the echo reference to another target right click on the target and highlight Select for Echo Reference again. click the Yes button to confirm the data change.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To select a target for echo reference. the target has its true vector removed. 10-14 65900010 . see Sensors Menu for information on sensor sources. Left click on AIS On button. and from the AIS Display window uncheck Enable Input 2. A confirmation window appears. do the following: 1. The echo reference is moved to the other target. and its speed is set to zero. The sensor source window opens with the selected source folder displayed and the current sensor source (REF) in highlight. Change back to the original sensor source (e. 2. Right click on the target to be selected as an echo reference and left click on Select for Echo Reference from the semi transparent window. To cancel an echo referenced target: 1. GPS) by clicking its radio button. R is displayed adjacent to the reference target. The ground stabilised sensor indicators (COG and SOG ) at the top left of the screen show the source as REF.g. 3. Right click on either the COG or SOG ground stabilised sensor indicator and select the sensor source.

The echo reference target velocity is set to unusable when the following apply: • the system is set to standby. Click on the Apply button. • the target is lost for more than 60 seconds. 65900010 10-15 . • the target goes beyond the maximum tracking range. A Lost Echo Reference alarm will be raised if the system is switched to Standby in echo reference mode.e. The echo reference target will be dropped when the following apply: • the system is set to standby. An Action Required window appears requesting confirmation of which other data types should be received from the selected source i. the echo reference data source is removed from the selected target.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets 3. 4. • the target goes beyond the maximum tracking range. • the echo referenced target is lost. if SOG data type has been changed then the system prompts to change the COG data type from echo reference to the sensor source selected for SOG.

see AIS Targets.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Selected Target Functions Selected Target The Selected Target sub menu is the default opening window in the features area of the screen. Tracking is restored if the heading becomes valid within 60 seconds. name or both. The sub menu enables real time data on a selected target to be displayed. A valid heading must be provided in order for the system to track targets. The Selected Target sub menu divides into the following tab folders: • Target Data • AIS Info Targets are identified by number. If a valid heading is not available for more than 60 seconds all tracked targets are dropped from the Selected Target menu. 10-16 65900010 . depending on the identification parameters selected in Target Display. For details on activating and tracking AIS targets. see Tracking Targets. For details on acquiring and tracking targets. When a target has been selected it is tracked and identified on screen with a green broken line box centred on the target origin for tracked targets and AIS targets.

except the target number/name and its type. i.the BCR of the target from own ship's CCRP • BCT . the CPA field continues to show the actual CPA value and the passing point is indicated by a TCPA with a minus value. If the target is NOT projected to cross own ship's bow then both fields are shown as dashed (--.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Target Data The Target Data tab folder shows the following tracking data on a selected target: • Range .the true CSE of target • STW .-). 65900010 10-17 .the BCT of the target from own ship's CCRP If the system is in water stabilised mode (see Sensor Data Display) the following two fields are shown: • CSE . range and true bearing are displayed.the true bearing of the target from own ship's CCRP. If a target is lost or if a valid heading or speed for own ship is not available then any invalid target data.e. The BCR and BCT are only shown if both the crossing time and the distance are positive.the true SOG of target If a tracked target is not established only the target number or name.the TCPA of the target from own ship's CCRP • BCR .the true COG of target • SOG .the true STW of target If the system is in ground stabilised mode the following two fields are shown: • COG . the data reverts to its normal system colour. • True Bearing . • CPA -the CPA of the target from own ship's CCRP • TCPA . is shown in an orange warning colour. If the target approach point has passed. If the target is subsequently found or heading/speed becomes valid.the distance of the target from own ship's CCRP. a target is projected to cross own ship's bow but has not yet done so.

the position quality of the data • Nav Status .the current Latitude/Longitude position of the target • Accuracy . Underway. when finished click on the keypad OK button. Target Data AIS Where the target is an AIS target the Target Data folder includes the following additional target data: • Lat/Lon . • Heading .the target's rate of turn An activated AIS target will also include a Show Tracked Data button. The on screen keypad appears. and if either Name or Both is selected in the Identification area of Target Display the name appears alongside the target. The name entered appears in the Target name field. To name a target: 1. 10-18 65900010 . which enables the option of toggling between displaying tracked and AIS data. 2. e.the target's current bearing • ROT . Click in the target name field below the target identifier. Enter a name for the target using the keypad.g. or above the target number on the video circle.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Tracked targets can be named from the Target Data folder.the target's current navigation status.

AIS targets are shown when there is a valid position and heading for own ship and AIS Input is enabled in the AIS Display window. 65900010 10-19 . see Target Display) • Vessel MMSI • Lat/Lon position of target • Position Accuracy 24 • RAIM in Use Indication • Vessel Type 25 • Call Sign (vessel identification name) * • Destination (vessel route) * • Navigational Status * • Rate Of Turn (in degrees per minute) * 24 RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) provides integrity monitoring of GPS signals. 25 The last four AIS Info data fields only appear when the AIS target is a Class A type. An AIS Full alarm is raised when the amount has been exceeded. An indicator is given when the maximum number of AIS targets that can be displayed has been reached. If a target is set to sleeping (see AIS Targets). it is automatically removed from the folder. AIS Info target data When an AIS target has been selected the current data is shown on the AIS Info folder: • Target number assigned • Name of target vessel (if known) • Class A or B (targets prioritised in order of importance. received AIS transmissions continue to be stored so that known targets can be rendered quickly when conditions indicate rendering should proceed. When AIS targets are not shown. Up to 200 AIS targets and AIS object symbols can be displayed on the chart window at any one time.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets AIS Info The AIS Info tab folder displays alphanumeric information for an activated AIS target.

is displayed: • Target number (ID) • CPA of target • TCPA of target If the target is AIS. targets with negative CPA/TCPA values are excluded from the sorted list. vessel type. 10-20 65900010 . the left hand column displays an AIS triangle symbol adjacent to the target number. destination) may initially be missing as it is transmitted less frequently than the other dynamic information.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Static information (call sign. The User tab folder lists the targets manually acquired or AIS targets activated and selected by the operator. based on distance and time from own ship. The following summary data for each target. Targets are automatically removed from the tote if they are dropped or cancelled by the operator. The Multiple Targets menu is divided into three tab folders: • CPA • Range • User CPA tab folder displays only targets that have positive CPA/TCPA values. Multiple Targets The Multiple Targets menu can display information on up to eight activated AIS and tracked targets. The targets in the Range tab folder are sorted on the target range from own ship. A sleeping AIS target selected for the tote is automatically set to activated.

To sort by TCPA click on the TCPA button to activate and then click the triangle symbol in the TCPA button. to remove a target from the User list right click on the target line and select Remove from the window fly out. 65900010 10-21 . Or. the Target Data folder from the Selected Target sub-menu is displayed with the target's information. In this case the CPA and TCPA information displayed for the target is shown as dashed until a vector is established. Selecting Targets for the User Folder Any target manually selected from the video circle is listed in the User folder. Targets are automatically removed from the list if they are dropped or cancelled by the operator. Viewing Target Data from Multiple Targets Any target in the multiple target menu can be selected for display in the target data window. To select a target click on the target ID (from any of the three tab folders).Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Automatic Sorting of Targets Targets can be automatically sorted from the nearest to the furthest away from own ship by the following criteria: • CPA (default) • TCPA • Range To sort the targets by CPA click on the triangle symbol in the CPA button. including targets which are not established.

The tracking option is available in all presentation modes and motion modes. see Acquisition Zones. or untick to remove the targets from the display. Any AIS targets currently displayed on the video circle will continue to be shown without the AIS symbol. If the system is switched to Standby then all targets are dropped. Targets are only displayed when the system is in Transmit. Targets can be tracked either manually or automatically by auto acquisition. The target display priority can also be changed from the main screen. either AIS Priority or TT Priority.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Target Display The Target Display window shows the display parameters for all targets. The Target Display window is divided into the following areas: • Target Display (including Display Priority) • Identification • Past Position Dots • Other • Number of Targets Target Display The Display Targets check box controls the viewing of all targets on the display. The default selection is AIS Priority. Tick the check box to view all targets (default). The Display Priority button at the top right of the screen shows the current setting. The display priority between AIS targets and tracked targets may be selected. To change the display priority to tracked targets click the Tracked Priority radio button. 10-22 65900010 . Left click on the button to toggle between the two display priorities.

this name will be used and may not be changed. for information. This number represents all the tracked targets on all nodes of the system. see Cancelling Tracked Targets Number of Targets The Number of Targets area includes data:  System Targets . for information see Other Target Display Functions. 26 If the target has an AIS target associated with it and the AIS target has a name assigned. • Off No identification Past Position Dots This area enables the display and editing of past position dots for all targets. Names assigned to targets will be distributed across all nodes in the system. 65900010 10-23 . Other This area enables auto drop mode for targets and vector timeout to be checked.appears on a multi-node system only.  Total Tracked . You can select the target identification to display one of the following: • Num Target numbers only 26 • Name Target names only (the number will be displayed if no name has been allocated). • Both Target numbers and names (the name will be left blank if none has been allocated). for information see Past Position Dots.this number represents the total number of tracked targets only on the node.this number represents all correlated targets processed on the node (locally tracked and AIS).  Local Tracked . Cancel All Targets The Cancel All Targets button enables all tracked targets on a node to be cancelled.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Identification The target identification is displayed adjacent to each target’s vector origin and remains visible as long as the target origin is visible.

To turn past position dots on tick the Display Past Positions check box. As soon as a tracked target is acquired.0 to 40 NM Max number of tracked targets 100 Max tracking velocity 150 knots true Time to display motion trend vector 12 good plots Past Position Dots When past position dots are switched on. up to a maximum of 4.25 to 40 NM Cancellation range 0. The number of dots displayed. the past position data starts to build up. or when an AIS target is activated. not the motion mode. Past position dots are available in all presentation and motion modes providing the system has a working compass.25 to 40 NM Acquisition Range 0. dots are displayed on the screen indicating the past positions of all targets (with the exception of sleeping AIS targets). Dots always match the trail mode.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Tracking Parameters The basic tracking parameters are shown in the following table. 10-24 65900010 . is determined by the length of time the target has been tracked and the time interval selected. Parameter Value Tracking Range 0.

To change the past position time interval: 1. The system default for auto-drop mode is enabled and the setting stored when altered and restored at power on. • It does not infringe the CPA/TCPA or BCR/BCT alarm criteria. it has a motion trend vector displayed. • It is fully established i. • The TCPA is more than 3 minutes ago. To toggle the auto drop targets On and Off tick or untick the check box. Other Target Display Functions Automatic Dropping of Targets The operator can enable an auto-drop mode in which individual AIS or tracked targets deemed not to be a threat to own ship are automatically dropped by the tracker (or set to sleeping for AIS) without an alarm being raised. • The target is not currently selected for display in the Target tote. To turn the line on or off tick the Connecting Line check box. 65900010 10-25 . • The target is astern of own ship. The intervals are displayed ranging from 15 seconds to 16 minutes. The auto drop feature is controlled from the Auto Drop Targets check box.e. The system changes to displaying the position dots in the selected time interval.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets A thin dotted line connecting the target and its associated dots may be selected to be drawn. • The target’s range is more than 10 NM from own ship. Tracked targets are dropped automatically if they meet all of the following criteria: • The target is not in an auto-acquisition zone. • The target has not been selected as echo reference. Select the time interval from the drop down list (the default time is 1 minute). 2. With the Display Past Positions check box enabled click on the drop down arrow next to the Interval time.

10-26 65900010 . tracked targets on dual radar are always dropped without an alarm being raised if they meet any of the following criteria: • The range is more than 40.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide In addition to the auto-drop mode. • No good video data has been extracted by either channel for the last 60 scans. Vector Timeout Times out a vector display that does not match the motion mode.0 NM. • The system has been switched to standby. targets are auto dropped if they meet the following criteria (in addition to the criteria listed on the previous page): • The target is astern of the transceiver connected to channel 1 • The range is more than 10 NM from the transceiver connected to channel 1 In addition. • No good video data has been extracted for the target for the last 60 scans. from all transceivers in transmit. Automatic Dropping of Targets on Dual Radar On dual radar. • Both radar channels have been switched to standby. tracked targets are always dropped without an alarm being raised if they meet any of the following criteria: • The target’s range is greater than the maximum tracking range.

are dropped and removed from the screen. Position the cursor over the target and right click. will also be cancelled on an ECDIS node. 2. 2. From the Target Display window click on the Cancel All Targets button. To cancel all tracked targets do the following: 1. If an echo reference target is selected a prompt will be displayed to indicate that the echo reference target may not be cancelled. `Cancelling Tracked Targets on a Multi-node System'. On a multi-node system a target that has been tracked on a Radar node. The selected target is removed from the video circle and all details relating to the target in the Target Data window are removed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Cancelling Tracked Targets Tracked targets can be cancelled individually or collectively. Left click on Cancel Target. see Tracking Targets. • They are infringing the CPA/TCPA or Bow Crossing limits. The screen prompts to confirm cancellation of all tracked targets. When a target is cancelled all alarms relating to the target are automatically cleared. A semi-transparent window appears next to the selected target with Cancel Target in highlight. All tracked targets. When Cancel All Targets is selected all AIS targets are set to sleeping unless they meet the following criteria: • They are in an auto acquisition zone. If local tracked targets are being displayed then the tracked target is cancelled on the current node only. Select OK to proceed with the cancellation. do the following: 1. 65900010 10-27 . with the exception of an echo reference target. To cancel an individual tracked target. and is cancelled on the Radar node.

10-28 65900010 . 2. it is not available to AIS targets. do the following: 1. Target Repair can only be made to tracked targets. fulfils the following conditions: • The target is being tracked or is active on a Radar node. or if the target has been selected as echo reference. The target's dot. • The target is currently in an acquisition zone on another node. Right click on the target to be repaired and select Repair Target from the semi- transparent window. • A tracked target from an external input. The target's dot and other identifying data are reassigned to the target vector at the new position and a temporary prompt `Target Repair Successful' appears. The target's motion trend vector may be moved around the screen by moving the trackball. • The target is selected in the target tote on another node. a target cannot be repaired on an ECDIS node if the target or any targets correlated with it. If the new position of the target is outside the maximum tracking range or inside the minimum tracking range then the target position remains unaltered and a temporary prompt `Target Repair Aborted' appears. To repair a target. This is done by the operator moving the tracked target origin to a new position. On a multi-node system. 3. such as a BridgeMaster E. Left click on the screen to fix the target at the desired location. right click again and select Abort Repair from the semi-transparent window. The target's vector reverts back to its initial position. ID number and name (if assigned) remain in the original location.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Target Repair The Target Repair facility enables tracked targets to be repositioned if they become separated from their target video. To abort the target repair operation.

will display Aid to Navigation objects  AtoN Virtual – will display virtual AtoNs with GPS co--ordinates  SAR Craft .will display Search and Rescue Craft  Base Station . Class A targets are gen enerally large vessels. CAUTION: An AIS target does NOT generate an alarm condition n if its filter setting (Class A or Class B) is switched off.only class B targets are displayed. AIS Input can only be enabled when valid sensor data is being transmitted.  Class A .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets AIS Display The AIS Display window includes the following areas:  AIS Input  Filter Settings  Other  Target Count All Nodes The AIS Display window may be quickly accessed from the main screen by left clicking on the AIS On button at the top right of the screen. according to importance. Filter settings also enables the display of the following AIS Nav av symbols (if enabled in the system):  AtoN . Filter Settings The system prioritises AIS targets into class A and class B. AIS Input AIS input and the display of AIS targets is turned on or off on all nodes by ticking the Enable Input check box.will display Base Station objects 65900010 10-29 . class B targets being smaller vessels.  Class B .only class A targets are displayed (defaultlt ssetting).

10-30 65900010 . To view data on AIS symbols left click on the symbol. This setting will apply to all nodes on a multi-node system. See the table below. Other When the Display Turn Indicators check box is ticked the turn in indicator for all activated AIS targets are displayed. The Sleeping Targets filter enables the display of sleeping AIS targets ta to be controlled. own ship is approaching Harbour with many y AIS A targets in close proximity. when the check box is unticked sleeping targets are ar not displayed. for example. ATON ATON Virtual SAR Base Station If an AIS AtoN symbol is in an `off position' (floating) the colour of the symbol and text changes from blue to red. sleepi ping targets are displayed.Targets Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide AIS Nav Symbols The icons used for AIS Nav symbols appear blue on the video circle circ when the symbol is in the `on position'. the selected ted object is identified on screen with a blue broken line box centred on the object and the Target Data tab folder of the Selected Target window appears showing tracked data on the object. This function is generally used to reduce the numberr of o alarms when. When the check box is ticked (default state). This setting will apply y to all nodes on a multi-node system. CAUTION: Sleeping targets will NOT generate a CPA/TCPA alar larm or become automatically activated when the display of sleeping targets is switched off. Target Count All Nodes The target count lists sleeping AIS targets and activated AIS targe rgets. this target count includes all nodes on a multi-node system.

The same AIS targets that may be activated on another Radar node will not be set to sleeping. 65900010 10-31 . all AIS targets are set to sleeping on the Radar node that the command was made. If the current watch mode is ECDIS then all AIS targets are set to sleeping on the node that the command was made. providing that the target was activated on an ECDIS node. and on all other ECDIS nodes.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Set All AIS Targets to Sleeping The Set All to Sleeping button allows you to set all AIS targets to sleeping based on the following criteria: 1. and that the target is not currently active on a Radar node. 2. On a multi-node system.

test targets. The Test Targets window is divided into the following areas:  Fixed Test Targets  Moveable Test Targets Fixed Test Targets The Fixed Test Targets area includes a Display check box. When test targets are on a large stationary letter X is displayed near the bottom of the video circle. The targets are a fixed size in both azimuth and range. The facility is available in all presentation and motion modes. 10-32 65900010 . are displayed on the video circle. providing the system has a working compass and is in Transmit mode. The targets are generated every 45 degrees starting at 0 degrees relative to own ship’s heading and increasing in 2 NM increments to 40 NM. Test targets can be displayed and tracked in exactly the same manner as live targets.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Test Targets Test targets include fixed test pattern targets and a number of moveable test targets. When this check box is ticked. although the system differentiates between test targets and tracked real targets. which are stationary relative to own ship. Both fixed and moveable test targets are displayed on the screen as flashing green crosses.

as defined in the table above. and defaults to Test Target 1.9 ) 3.3 to 40 NM) (0º to 359. click the > button.0 NM from 5 324° 15 kn 135° turning unit 65900010 10-33 . Number of Interface Board Test Targets Defined Targets SC2 2 1 to 2 SC3 5 1 to 5 The current moveable test target is shown in a field below the Switch All Targets On/Off buttons.0 NM from 1 36° 15 kn 270° turning unit 3.0 NM from 4 252° 15 kn 90° turning unit 3. the velocity and current position data may be defined. initial position and velocity data may be defined for each test target. True Bearing.9º ) (0 to 75 kn) (0 to 359. The table below defines the Range. To select the next moveable test target. the > button will be greyed out when Test Target 2 is selected. When movable test targets are active.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Moveable Test Targets The number of user definable test targets is determined by the type of radar interface board installed in your VisionMaster system.0 NM from 3 180° 15 kn 25° turning unit 3. If your system only includes two test targets. The table below defines the number of targets each interface board supports. Before the Moveable Test Targets are activated. Speed and True Course default values and range.0 NM from 2 108° 15 kn 180° turning unit 3. Test Display Range True Bearing Speed True Course Target (0.

Other moveable test targets are removed from the screen. When active the target's velocity and current position may be changed from the default parameters. The three buttons at the bottom of the Test Targets window have the following functionality:  Reset . A fixed test target pattern is displayed flashing on the video circle.  Reset All To Defaults . 10-34 65900010 . When a moveable test target is active (Target Active box ticked). Move the trackball left or right to change to the required value. the value changes to green (editable). The Target Active check box is automatically ticked and all moveable test targets are displayed on the video circle with decaying video trails. although their video trails remain.resets all moveable target parameters back to their default values. tick the Display check box.  Reset All . its initial position remains the same while its current position updates.g. Changing Moveable Test Target Parameters When a moveable test target is inactive (Target Active box unticked). Test Target 1) untick the Target Active check box. left click in the field to set the new value and exit edit mode. To change any enabled test target parameters click in the field. showing the history of the targets' movement. its initial position (range and true bearing) may be changed from the default parameters. click the On button.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Using Test Targets To switch Fixed Test Targets on.resets all moveable test targets to their initial positions. To switch on all moveable test targets.resets the currently selected test target to it's initial position. To switch off all moveable test targets click the Off button. To display only the moveable test target selected in the target field (e.

fixed at 0. 3. Click on the selected target again to display the Target Data tab for the selected test target. If the TCPA shows as a negative value. and click Select STW Source from the drop down list. it is advisable to make own ship stationary. Note the target's range and other attributes. 1. 7. In Moveable Test Targets select Test Target 1and tick the Target Active check box. Apart from Range and True Bearing all other target data will be displayed in amber. Select the test target on the screen by clicking on the beginning of its video trail. 6. To do this. Select Test Targets from the Targets menu and ensure the Fixed Test Targets Display check box is unticked. go back to the Test Targets window and re-adjust the target's true course accordingly.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Using Test Targets as a Training Exercise The following training exercise using movable test targets may be undertaken. Adjust the speed and true course of Test Target 1 so that it is heading in an approximate direction towards own ship. As the test target moves closer to own ship and the TCPA moves towards zero. 2. In order to make the CPA/TCPA calculations easier to visualize.kn. 5. 65900010 10-35 . In the STW window select Man sensor data source. 4. note how the range comes to match the calculated CPA. right click on STW on the Sensor Data Display. and confirm selection.0.

To enable test targets on both channels click the Both button. but with the addition or three tab buttons: Channel 1.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Test Targets on Dual Radar On dual radar. When test targets are displayed on both channels the numbers 1 and 2 appear next to the large stationary X at the bottom of the video circle. 10-36 65900010 . To enable test targets on a specific channel click the required Channel 1 or Channel 2 button and define the test target values as described previously. Reset All To Defaults to be made. test targets can be displayed and tracked separately for each channel. The Test Targets window for dual radar includes all the functionality described previously for single radar systems. the window enables all test targets. Channel 2 and Both. or selected for display and tracking on both channels. When test targets are displayed on a specific channel the channel’s number appears next to the large stationary X at the bottom of the video circle. fixed test targets and moveable targets for both channels to be switched on and off and Reset All.

Targets that the system decides are not existing targets are automatically acquired. There are two annular and two polygonal acquisition zones available. the polygonal zone parameters are created and edited only on the display. Any targets found in an auto acquisition zone are marked by a flashing acquisition zone symbol (see Target Monitoring Symbols in Target Monitoring. An AZ Full alarm is raised when the next trackable target enters the zone after the limit has been reached. There is a limit on the number of trackable targets within all active zones.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Acquisition Zones An acquisition zone is a defined annular or polygonal area of the display. or AIS Target Alarm States in AIS Targets) and an AZ Entry alarm is raised. The acquisition zone symbol is temporarily turned off if the zone is being edited. When an acquisition zone is being edited its line colour changes from green to light purple. which can be turned on and off. When an acquisition zone is active the zone parameters are shown on the display as a solid green line. 65900010 10-37 . The acquisition zone symbol is turned off when the AZ entry alarm is acknowledged. When the system is in Transmit mode. The AZ Full alarm is cleared when the number of trackable targets falls below the limit. AIS targets are activated when entering an acquisition zone in both Transmit and Standby mode. or the zone is turned off. The annular zone parameters are edited from the Acquisition Zones window. or on the display. targets that enter the area are automatically acquired and tracked.

The start degree number changes from white to green (editable). Click inside the Start field. 2. If the zone is switched off (inactive) the zone appears on the display when the parameters are changed.0 40. 10-38 65900010 .0 Start Depth (in long distance units) 0. To change the End bearing repeat the procedure above. 3. To edit the zone range: 1.4 2. The start degree number changes from white to green (editable).Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annular Acquisition Zones The initial annular acquisition zone definitions are as follows: The initial system zone definitions are as follows: • Zone 1 4 to 5 NM long distance units and 270° to 90° • Zone 2 12 to 14 NM long distance units and 270° to 90° An annular acquisition zone can be edited by changing its radial position and depth. To edit the zone bearing: 1. You can edit both the Bearing (the radial angle of the zone) and the Range (the depth of the zone).0 Bearing 6° 354° To create acquisition zone parameters from the Acquisition Zones window do the following: With the Acquisition Zones window opened and the zone active (On) click on the Edit button of the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or Zone 2). and by changing its start bearing and end bearing within the limits defined below. Click inside the Start field. Acquisition Zone Limits Parameter Min Max End Range (in long distance units) 1. Move the trackball left (to decrease the numerical degree) or right (to increase).

which are entered directly on to the chart display. To create acquisition zone parameters directly on the video circle do the following: 1. Move the cursor into the display and left click to create the first start point of the acquisition zone. 3. diagonally opposite the first point. Polygonal Acquisition Zones A polygonal acquisition zone is a randomly shaped zone constructed from operator defined zone points (maximum of 10). Click on the New button of Zone 1 or Zone 2 and move the cursor to the desired location in the chart display. To create or edit a polygonal acquisition zone. do the following: To create a polygonal zone: 1. the Active and Edit buttons are disabled. Move the trackball left to decrease the range of the zone from ownship. which defines the bearing and range. To shorten or widen the zone range click in the End field and change the range as described above. 2. 3. As the Start range is changed the End range numerical degree changes proportionally. Polygonal lines may be drawn up to a maximum distance of 40 NM from own ship. The cursor is shown with the letters `Add' below the cross hair and the `New' button changes to Cancel. Move the cursor to the required end point of the zone. or right to increase the range from own ship. 65900010 10-39 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets 2. Click on the Edit button of the zone to be edited (Zone 1 or Zone 2).

Click the Edit Off button of the polygonal zone to be edited. To create the polygonal shape continue the process. Note that targets in an edited zone are not activated. When the last zone point has been entered the polygonal shape is created. the last zone point (maximum of 10) must be entered at the first point. Left click in the display. The zone point circles are removed. the button changes to Submit. Move the cursor and left click again. 3. Move the cursor to the first point. with the zone to be edited shown in purple (edit mode) with all zone points displayed. a second zone point is created and the two circles are joined with a straight purple line. Repeat the process for all other zone points.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 2. The zone is activated (shown with a green line) and the Edit is switched off. hold down the left button and use the trackball to drag the point to the required location on the screen. When the zone is changed to the required shape and position click the Submit button. 2. the zone line changes to green and the zone is auto activated. 3. the first zone point is created and is shown on the screen as a small purple circle. 10-40 65900010 . the cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. Left click on the point. In edit mode all acquisition zones are displayed on the screen. To edit a polygonal zone: 1.

The Ownship fields display the following read only information: • Name of vessel • Class (A or B) • Vessel MMSI • Heading (HDG) bearing • Current latitude position • Current longitude position • COG • SOG • Type • Call (i. Position. ownship) • Destination • Status • IMO number. The navigational status of own ship includes the following states: • Underway • At anchor • Not under command • Restricted manvre • Constrain draught • Moored • Aground • Fishing • Sailing 65900010 10-41 . The data for Heading.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Own Ship AIS The Own Ship AIS window includes the following tab folders:  Own Ship  Messages Own Ship The Own Ship AIS window displays AIS data for own ship. COG and SOG is received from the specific sensors.e.

The message is deleted and removed from the list. The AIS object's details are displayed in the AIS Info tab folder of Selected Target. When all messages have been selected the message icon returns to the standard system colour.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide If one of these states does not apply the Status field displays: Unknown. Messages The Messages tab folder displays messages that have been generated from an external device. The messages may for example have been sent from another ship in the area. To highlight the message sender in the target tote click on the Select Vessel button. AIS messages are used to convey to the operator information that requires attention. To delete a message select the message in the received messages window and click on the Delete button. When a message has been received the Message icon is displayed in amber. Left click to view information on the message. The MMSI number of the vessel that sent the message. an audible indicator is given and the message is shown in the Messages folder. 10-42 65900010 . the time the message was received and the message detail are displayed in the Message Info window.

1 to 20. The value changes from white to green (editable). When this happens an alarm is raised. To change the infringement limits do the following.0 NM 1 to 99 minutes 65900010 10-43 . the alarm is cleared automatically when there are no targets infringing the defined limits. 1. When the limit has been correctly defined left click to enter value and exit edit mode. 2. Parameter CPA/BCR TCPA/BCT System default value 0.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Limits and Settings The Limits and Settings window defines the following: • CPA/TCPA limits • Bow crossing (BCR/BCT) limits • Target Association settings and limits • Lost Target Alarm enablement and lost target range limit setting A target is considered dangerous if it infringes the defined limits set in this window. Click inside the field to be changed.2 NM 10 minutes Range of values 0. Move the trackball left (to decrease the limit) or right (to increase). Closest Point of Approach & Bow Crossing Limits The system default values and the minimum/maximum infringement limits for CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT are shown in the table below.

5 kn to 10 kn If target association settings are changed the settings defined in the table above may be re-applied by ticking the Standard Setting or Loose Setting check boxes. such that any of the values becomes greater than the limits. the target association will split and each target will then have a unique ID. For a description of Lost Targets and the symbology used.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Target Association Target association enables the system to decide if a target tracked or activated on one node is the same as a target tracked or activated on other nodes. leading to multiple targets being displayed in the same position. If targets change course.1 NM to 100 NM. The difference in the target's range.0 ° 5. The minimum/maximum values are 0. The default maximum range limit distance is 10 NM.05 NM to 1.1° to 5. Lost Target Alarms This area enables Lost Target alarms to be raised on all nodes and a lost target alarm range limit set.0 kn Loose Setting 0.0 kn Range of values 0. Note that setting these values too high may result in targets which are separate being considered the same target. Target Association Parameter Distance Angle Speed Standard Setting 0.0° 1. so that any lost targets within a specified maximum limit from own ship will raise a Lost Target alarm. If targets do associate then they will be shown with the same ID on all nodes.00 NM 0. bearing and velocity values must be less than the association limits for a target to be considered the same. see Target Monitoring.2 ° 5. The default values for Standard and Loose settings and the minimum/maximum limits for Target Association are shown in the table below. There are two defined settings for target association: Standard and Loose.06 NM 1. whilst setting the values too low may mean that targets that are the same are not correlated. 10-44 65900010 .18 NM 2.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets Collision Avoidance Criteria Collision avoidance must be carried out in strict compliance with the COLREG (Convention of the International Regulations for the Preventing of Collisions at Sea). VisionMaster calculates relative velocity in both ground and sea stabilisation modes and presents individual target CPA/TCPA data. VisionMaster is designed in such a way as to minimise errors in the collision avoidance calculations which result from the sensors selected for stabilisation. 65900010 10-45 . This same data is used when evaluating whether a target is infringing the operator selected CPA/TCPA and bow crossing limits. particularly when ground stabilisation is selected. Relative velocity is fundamental to the activity of collision avoidance. different sensors may contribute to the possibility of errors in calculation and caution should be used when interpreting the data. however. In practice.

If all three display options have selected from the PAD menu the video circle chart display will display the following features additional to the PAD (see the figure below): • PPCs . For information on accessing data on targets refer to Selected Target. Open the PAD sub menu. 10-46 65900010 . To select display options for PADs do the following. the Limits and Settings opens from where you can adjust the CPA limit. The boundary of a PAD associated with a target is drawn such that. The window displays the current CPA limit for targets to own ship and enables the following display options to be selected: • Predicted Areas of Danger (PADs) • Predicted Points of Collision (PPCs) • Intercept Lines 2.these are located within the boundaries of its associated PAD and are shown as a round dot marked on the target’s course vector where own ship's CCRP may intercept the target. if ownship were to change its course to move toward any given point on the boundary and the target were to continue with its current velocity. the shapes of PADs adjust accordingly. If own ship's CCRP crosses over a PAD boundary.Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide PADs Predicted Areas of Danger (PADs) are outlines that are drawn on the video circle to mark an area that needs to be avoided in order to prevent a CPA violation to own ship by an established tracked target or active AIS target. The size and location of PADs depends on own ship's CPA limit (see Limits and Settings) and speed. PADs are only displayed for a target when the system can calculate the CPA of that target. 1. plus the target's position course and speed. the display of the PAD is disabled until the CCRP is no longer within its boundaries. the target would be at the CPA limit when own ship reaches the PAD boundary. If the CPA limit is changed. To change a target's CPA limit click the Target Limits and Settings button.

The shape of the PAD may also change as ownship and target approach each other. the target and its vector flash red) the PAD and intercept lines will also flash red in sequence with the target. to intercept with the target at the PPC. If a target associated with a PAD goes into an alarm state (i. If ownship speed is less than the target speed. This line represents the course of ownship. If ownship speed is greater or equal to target speed. see below. based on present speed.these are lines that connect ownship's CCRP to the PPC. then one of the following is generated: • Two distinct PADs • A merged PAD with two PPCs • A donut-shaped PAD • No PAD 65900010 10-47 . then only one PAD is generated.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Targets • Intercept Lines .e.

Targets Radar/Chart Radar User Guide When a target is manually selected (i. the target appears in the User tab of the Multiple Targets menu) a cross hatch will appear within the boundaries of the target's PAD. 10-48 65900010 .e.

 Video .enables switching the system between standby and transmit mode. 65900010 11-1 . pulse length selection and radar fine tuning to be made.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Chapter 11 Radar The Radar menu provides access to the following radar/video functions:  Transceiver .enables video processing controls and trails mode selection to be made. see Sector Blanking.  Interswitch –provides selection and information on transceivers connected to an Interswitch. This chapter also describes the effect on the video display when a transceiver has been configured with blank sectors active.

In addition. click the radio button adjacent to the mode. 11-2 65900010 . a prompt is displayed and the slave remains in Standby. the Standby/Transmit toggle button displays Transmit and the transceiver starts transmitting radar pulses. Only when the transceiver informs the connected display(s) that the warm up period has ended is the text and count removed and the normal standby text displayed. To switch between operational modes. Operational Mode The system can be in one of two operational modes: Standby and Transmit.Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Transceiver The Transceiver window displays the selected transceiver's alpha identity (A to F if a six-way Interswitch is connected. see Interswitch). a textual status and a count appears in the Transceiver sub menu. either because of interswitching or from power-on. A slave display can only be switched to Transmit if its associated master display is in Transmit mode. The count starts at 0 and increment each second up to a maximum of 999. when the system is in standby following power up it may also be warming 27 up . When a display is connected to a transceiver that is in warm up. See Transmit and Standby Modes. When the system is switched to transmit the message Radar Standby disappears from the video circle. its status (Master or Slave) and the scanner unit the transceiver is connected to (X-band or S- band). Transmit can be selected only when the warm up period has ended. The following controls are available when operating as a Master display: • switching the operational mode between standby and transmit • changing the pulse length • changing between AFC and manual tuning If the Transceiver has been selected as a Slave at the Interswitch window the Pulse Length and Tune functions are unavailable. If Transmit is selected on a slave display when its master is still in Standby (NOT transmitting).

see Radar Fine Tuning. Tune The radar fine tuning adjustment and tuning control selection in the Transceiver sub menu is reflected in the Tune field. Pulse Length and Tune adjustment can be made for each channel.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Pulse Length The current pulse length selection in the Transceiver sub menu is reflected in the pulse length toggle button below the transceiver identity field. For information on pulse lengths. For information on adjusting the radar tuning. see Radar Transmission Pulse Length. If either transceiver is set to Standby a confirmation prompt is generated. below the Video Processing Controls.Transceiver On a dual radar system the Transceiver window includes separate tabs for Channel 1 and Channel 2 where specific selections of Standby/Transmit mode. 65900010 11-3 . Dual Radar .

Relative or True  Trails .  Auto Anti-Clutter and Enhance Video mode  Vector Mode . see Vector Modes. see Video Processing Controls. For a description of the trails mode. For a description of setting the video processing levels. see Trails Mode in Chapter 5. For a description of the vector modes. Dual Radar – Video On a dual radar system the Video window includes separate tabs for Channel 1 and Channel 2 where specific selections of controls and Gain/anti-clutter adjustments can be made for each channel. 11-4 65900010 .Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Video The Video sub-menu enables the following settings and mode selections to be made:  Video Processing Controls .selection of trail type.enables adjustment of the Gain setting and the anti-clutter (Rain and Sea) settings.

• if the interswitch is two-way then only transceivers A and B may be set up.). • the transceiver identification is fixed at A. transceivers that are unavailable for selection are greyed out. Nodes that are not communicating with the Interswitch are greyed out. Status The Status area displays the current transceiver settings for each node (e. 65900010 11-5 . E and F may be set up.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Interswitch The Interswitch sub-menu is divided into the following areas: Request for Display and Status. To request Master or Slave status of the available transceiver. Display (B) etc. B. display identifier and transceiver identification are determined from the interswitch. Request for Display The Request for Display area lists the Transceivers fitted to the system with their alpha identifier.g. • if the interswitch is six-way then all transceivers A. C. Up to six transceivers can be connected to up to six displays. The number of transceivers that may be set up is dependent on the interswitch status as follows: When no interswitch is fitted to the system: • the Master/Slave selection is fixed at commissioning with the system defaulting to Master. The transceivers available for selection are highlighted. but their connection details are displayed. When an interswitch is fitted to the system: • the master/slave display. click the relevant radio button. D.

The Status area displays the node identity with Dual Radar in brackets. TxRx (A) for Channel 1 and TxRx (B) for Channel 2) then both Transceivers may be set to Master. then one channel must be set to Slave. if the other channel has selected the same transceiver as the Master. If different transceivers are selected for each channel (e. if Master is selected on TxRx (B) for Channel 2 where the same selection has been made for Channel 1. then Channel 1 will automatically switch to Slave. The current Transceiver selection and Master/Slave status for each display are displayed below the node identity. A transceiver can be selected from its associated channel as a Master for controlling that scanner unit. For example. the Interswitch window enables each display radar channel to be associated with any one of the transceivers in the system. 11-6 65900010 . or as a Slave.Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Dual Radar – Interswitch If your system is dual radar with an Interswitch.g. If the same transceiver is selected for both channels.

If the level falls below an optimal video level a low video alarm is raised.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Radar Alarms The following series of radar alarms may be raised by the system. Video Failed A Video Failed alarm is raised under the following conditions: • If there is a detectable fault with the scan converter card such that it prevents the radar picture from being updated. or • the radar is in standby. The low video alarm is cleared when: • the monitored video level is greater than or equal to an optimum video level. • If there is a detectable fault with the presentation of the radar video on the screen. 65900010 11-7 . Interswitch Communications An Interswitch comms alarm is raised if the Interswitch is no longer communicating with the Processor. (e. Texture Loss) Video Failed is displayed in red the video circle when this alarm is active. Communications Alarms Transceiver Communications A TX comms alarm is raised if a valid message has not been received from the transceiver for more than 4 seconds. PCIO Communications with Processor A PCIO USB comms alarm is raised within 10 seconds if the physical connection between the PCIO unit and Processor is broken.g. The alarm is raised regardless of the display’s standby/transmit status. PCIO Communications with SC board An SC PCIO comms alarm is raised within 10 seconds if the connection between the board and the PCIO unit is broken. Video Alarms Low Video Level The signal level of the video received from the transceiver is monitored at regular intervals when the display is in transmit.

g. Azimuth Error An azimuth error alarm is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and either: • the number of azimuth pulses between heading markers is greater or less than a margin of error of 5 pulses centred on a nominal value of 4096 pulses. AFC Mode Error An error is raised if the AFC mode of the transceiver does not match that of the displays. Pulse Length Error An error alarm is raised if. Standby/Transmit Error An error is raised if the state of the transceiver is different to that requested by the display. Transceiver BITE A Transceiver BITE alarm is raised when there are failed BITE parameters or the system is connected to a BME or BM II transceiver. after a delay no greater than 4 seconds. the display’s requested pulse length does not match the pulse length of its connected transceiver. Heading Marker Error When the transceiver is in transmit an error alarm is raised if a heading marker has not been received for more than 10 seconds.Radar Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Transceiver Alarms Trigger Error A trigger error alarm is raised when the transceiver is in transmit and there are fewer valid triggers than expected. If a heading marker has not been received for more than 30 seconds the Master Display automatically switches the connected transceiver to standby. but a small error persists for a period of time (e. 4095 pulses per rev are received continually). 11-8 65900010 . or • the number of pulses per revolution is within the margin of error. This will cause a picture clear.

i.e. The outer arc line defines the channel 2 blanking sector. with the outer/inner arc line positions retained. Sector Blanking on Dual Radar On a dual radar system both top units may have different blanking sectors active. Sector blanking for channel 1 top unit may have the same start and stop angles as channel 2 top unit. 65900010 11-9 . and the inner line defines channel 1 blanking sector. For example. If the blanking sectors for channel 1 and channel 2 do not overlap the angles will be drawn relative to the radar channel’s video origin. or a different set of start/stop angles. the start and end angles are not the same. a double arc line is drawn for each sector. an arc line is drawn at the relevant angles around the outside of the video circle bearing scale. blank sector 2 start angle cannot start before blank sector 1 stop angle finishes. indicating the arc that is being blanked. When sector blanking is configured for a particular transceiver. When sector blanking is active on dual radar and both top units have the same start and stop angles.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Sector Blanking A top unit may have one or two blanking sectors active. Blank sectors do not overlap and do not blank more than 340 degrees of the radar picture. that transceiver will not transmit in any active blanked sector defined for it and the video in that sector is blanked. If a transceiver has blank sectors active.

.

 Access to the Chart 1 Catalog and Color Diagram. see Manual Chart Update. see Chart Databases.  Manage manual updates to charts. display update summaries. including chart types. see Chart Dangers.  A description of charts. see Chart Query.  Highlight and view information on specific chart areas and geographic objects.  Specify the order in which charts engines are used for rendering. or disable configured chart engines.  A description of the chart projection types. chart rendering. see Chart Settings. Accessing Charts Menus To access the Charts sub-menus left click on the Charts button in the main menu list.  View and mark a list of potential chart dangers that own ship is headed towards on present course. factors that may affect chart accuracy and indications of chart overscale. The following topics are covered.  Match the chart with the radar video. 65900010 12-1 .  View detailed read-only information about the chart currently displayed. see Chart Legend. and display chart permissions.  Change default chart contour and depth settings. install charts from an installer utility. see Chart Projections.  Configure the display settings for the chart. see Chart Tools. see About Charts. see Chart Depths/Heights.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Chapter 12 Charts This section covers all aspects of chart information.

Vector chart types include SevenCs S57 (ENC). Vector charts are electronic chart data stored in a database. Radar information has priority over chart information. In order to reduce clutter. the ENC data undergoes a conversion process. If the heading becomes invalid. SevenCs VPF and C-MAP charts. Charts are displayed such that the radar is not substantially masked.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide About Charts Chart Types The system allows vector charts to be displayed within the video circle in either Standby or Transmit mode. The result of this conversion is the creation of the System Electronic Nautical Chart (SENC) database. The chart features are restored when the range scale is reduced. Raster charts (ARCS) are not permitted. When S57 charts are installed. scale orientation. Only vector format charts are available on Chart Radar. chart features are suppressed at a range scale of 96 NM. 12-2 65900010 . chart information is removed automatically from the screen within one minute. The Charts facility will only be available if the system has been configured for Chart Radar. The chart is drawn on screen based on processing of the various stored data elements. It is this database that is accessed and displayed by ECDIS and Chart Radar. Chart Data on a Radar Display Chart information uses the same reference and coordinates criteria as the radar and AIS. obscured or degraded. CCRP and azimuth stabilisation mode. including datum.

One can think of the windows in a display as a series of planes parallel to the surface of the monitor. In coordinate geometry. and each makes different assumptions about the exact size and shape of the earth. Factors affecting Chart Accuracy A position plotted on a navigational chart is only as good as the accuracy of the chart. if the offset to WGS-84 is known and provided in the chart file. The windows are therefore stacked along the Z-axis. the level of detail provided by different types of chart data may vary greatly depending upon the geographic location. and the Z-order information thus specifies the front-to-back ordering of the windows on the screen. If a chart is based on another datum. These correction values may not be perfectly accurate throughout the geographical area covered by the chart. VisionMaster FT uses the datum known as World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS-84) Ellipsoid Earth model. While WGS-84 is the present standard for accurate mapping and display of position information. allowing for radar video to be inserted in the proper z-order such that `suppressed' chart objects appear below the radar video. the system offsets the chart to WGS- 84. these charts may sometimes use old survey data where more recent surveys do not exist. Therefore it is important to understand the factors which may limit the accuracy of vector charts. X typically refers to the horizontal axis (left to right).Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Chart Rendering 28 The rendering of Chart data adheres to the z-order guidelines. Charts and all chart objects are displayed using the WGS-84 datum whenever possible. Y to the vertical axis (up and down). there are hundreds of data in use. Chart Datum The chart datum is the mathematical model used by a chart maker to map the earth’s surface. This means that a given latitude and longitude can correspond to different locations when plotted on charts that are derived from different data. and `over radar' chart objects appear above the radar video. However. 28 The term `Z-order' refers to the order of objects along the Z-axis. It is therefore important to be aware of the datum of the displayed chart. Offset correction values used for the chart are computed as average values for the entire chart. and Z to the axis perpendicular to the other two (forward or backward). 65900010 12-3 . These factors are detailed below. Datum discrepancies become more important when using larger-scale charts. Survey Data Vector charts are generally based on recent hydrographic survey data.

For example. and Chart Index. Compilation Scale Chart data is compiled at a specific scale. The Chart Legend window also shows the datum of the displayed chart. and under Chart Index. they are displayed at their compilation scale. For more details on chart prompts. a warning displays information about the chart’s datum. When the range scale is selected at a larger scale than the chart's compilation scale a permanent prompt appears with the message `Chart Overscale'. the level of detail and expected accuracy available on a chart is also related to its navigational purpose. Chart Overscale There are two ways in which the system indicates that chart data is being displayed at a larger scale than its compilation scale: the overscale prompt and the overscale pattern. Navigational Purpose In addition to the compilation scale. A chart's compilation scale is shown in the Detail tab folder of the Chart Legend menu. 12-4 65900010 . see Chart Overscale. This scale is called the chart’s compilation scale. Coastal or General. see Legend Detail. which shows the scale and other details of all charts in a selected chart database. When charts are first selected for display. see Prompts in Chapter 7. indicating the level of detail that is available on the chart. Harbour. A chart's navigational purpose is shown in the Detail tab folder of the Legend menu under Chart Usage/Scale. under Chart Usage/Scale.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide When displaying a chart that was created using a datum other than WGS- 84. Codes used to identify various known chart data are listed in Annex C – Chart Datum Codes. Approach. Alarms. based upon the hydrographic data from which the chart was created.

considering ALL enabled chart databases.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Display Overscale Prompt The display overscale prompt appears as Primary Display Overscale when any of the following conditions are met: • The largest scale chart at the centre of the display is overscaled. • An overscaled vector chart from the most detailed usage level is displayed. Chart One Presentation Library The Chart One Presentation Library contains an index of chart symbols. Larger Scale Available Prompt The Larger Scale Chart Available at Ship prompt is shown when the largest scale chart under the ships position. The scale of each chart can be viewed in the Chart Index window. 65900010 12-5 . Overscale Pattern The overscale pattern is displayed over charts if the scale ratio of the display is more than double the compilation scale of any charts in the display. see Chart 1. as used on vector charts. The overscale pattern is a series of closely aligned dotted vertical lines across the whole of the chart display. in most cases the display is covered by several charts. A chart is considered to be overscaled if the range scale of the display is larger than the compilation scale of the chart at the screen centre. is not displayed. see Chart Tools.

• Chart Index . see Chart Copy.displays details of all charts for a selected d cchart database.Charts Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Chart Tools Chart Tools is the opening sub-menu on the Charts menu. For information on installing charts see Chapter C 3 `Chart Installation' in Volume 2 of the VisionMasaster Ship's Manual. see Chart Match.  Chart Copy .displays chart license and permit expiration ex on installed charts. • Chart Installation  VPF/DNC .correct the display of any discrepancies between the radar video and the chart. CAUTION: Switching to the Chart Installer utility requires shu hutting down all navigation functions at the VisionMaster er FT station. see Installing VPF Charts. and enables an S-63 permit file or a 7Cs 7 hardware ID to be exported to an external drive.enables the installation of C-MAP and/or SevenCs charts onto the system from a separate chart installer utility. see Chart Index.enables charts successfully installed on one node to be copied to other nodes on a multi- node system.  Chart Installer . see Chahart Permissions.display a chart updates summary in a separate window. • Chart Permissions . 12-6 65900010 . From Chart Tools you can select the following functions: • Chart Match . see Chart Updates Summary. • Chart Updates Summary .enables the installation of VPF charts to be made without requiring the VisionMaster application to be shut down.

The operator specifies the range and bearing adjustment by selecting two points on the video circle. This offset persists until the chart match is cancelled. or to proceed move the cursor into the video circle. The lower field in Chart Match prompts to click on a Radar Object. To return to the previous chart position untick the Chart Match Applied box. the cursor displays CM below the cross hair. 6. The fields below prompt to click on a chart object and the Select Points button changes to Cancel Selection. 65900010 12-7 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Tool Functions Chart Match The Chart Match facility allows the operator to correct a discrepancy between the radar video and the video circle. 5. The Chart Match fields change to displaying the position (nautical miles and bearing) of the chart object and the Chart Match Applied tick box becomes active. 2. Click on the required chart object. Chart Match includes the capability to specify a range and bearing adjustment to be applied to any loaded chart in order to alter the chart’s relative position to the own ship’s CCRP plotted position. Click on the radar object (return). 4. or until all the charts displayed on the screen at the time of the selection are no longer on the screen. Click on the Select Points button in the Chart Match area. Tick the Chart Match Applied check box. To cancel the chart match click on the button. an offset can be created that is applied to the video circle. 3. By selecting the radar object and the chart object to be matched. To reposition the chart do the following: 1. The chart is shifted so that the radar return and the chart object are displayed at the same location on the display.

Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Updates Summary The Chart Updates Summary enables update information on SevenCs chart databases. A Charts Update Summary window appears displaying details (if any) of chart updates on the currently loaded SevenCs chart database. To access the window click the Show Summary button. and updates made by the operator using manual chart update to be displayed in a secondary window when the system is in Standby mode. The information shown in the summary report for each of the update files is dependent on the chart database selected. For an S-57 database the following columns are shown: • Reference name of the chart • Issuing Authority • Chart issue date • Application date and time • Chart edition number • Chart update number • Number of actions associated with a chart update • Chart update type (Manual or Automatic) • Status of the update (Applied. Click on the drop down list to select another SevenCs database. Rejected. or Deleted) • Chart errors detected. 12-8 65900010 .

The subsequent window shows the following columns: • Chart Name • Chart Edition • Update Date • Update Type • Update Action • Status Click the Refresh Updates button to update the list to include in the list chart updates made on other nodes. To sort the list into required priorities click on a column button. select Manual Chart Update from the drop down list. to sort by issue date click on the Issue Date button. the update rejection is logged by the system and a warning of this action is shown. For example. the system provides automatic registration of the databases and a record of updates is kept in the CMAP database. 65900010 12-9 . Viewing Manual Chart Updates To view a summary of chart updates made by the operator. C-MAP Updates For CMAP charts. all chart updates are displayed from either the earliest or latest date.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts If an update is not properly applied or the update is out of sequence the update is terminated.

Click the Launch ChartHandler button. 12-10 65900010 . The system opens the SevenCs ChartHandler. Click the Install All button. this may be a CD. When the VPF/DNC charts have been successfully installed click the Quit button to close the ChartHandler application. 4. 2. a VPF/DNC Chart Installation popup window appears. The VPF/DNC Chart Installation window shows the date and time of installation in the Last Modification field and the number of chart sets installed in the Chart Count field. DVD or USB memory stick. 5. refer to Chapter 3 `Chart Installation' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ships Manual (65900011V2).Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Installing VPF Charts The Chart Tools menu enables VPF charts and DNC charts to be installed directly from the VisionMaster application when the system is in Standby. 6. Select the chart source directory and click the OK button. Or. If no charts have been previously installed the window displays Database Empty in the Last Modification field. When charts are being installed a popup window appears over the ChartHandler showing the progress of installation as a percentage figure. From the ChartHandler application click the Browse button and navigate to the root directory that contains the chart data. 1. to install selected chart files highlight the files and click the Install Charts button. the chart files appear in the ChartHandler list and the Action buttons become active. To install VPF/DNC charts click the VPF / DNC button. 3. For more information on using the SevenCs ChartHandler. The Browse For Folder window is removed.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Updating the Primary Chart Database when installing VPF Charts
When VPF charts are being installed while VisionMaster is running the
system creates a replica of the existing chart database and updates the
replica with the VPF charts that are being installed. This allows the operator
to continue navigating using the existing charts during installation. After
installation is complete, the replica database is swapped with the pre-
existing database and the replica becomes the new primary chart
database.
If a replica exists at the time of the VPF chart installation, the system
updates the replica and allows the operator to continue navigating with the
primary chart database during installation. After installation, the primary
database is replaced with the updated replica.
A replica will not exist if there is not enough disk space to store it, or if the
making of the replica is currently in progress. If a replica of the database
does not exist at the time of the VPF chart installation, an option to proceed
with the installation appears. If the option to proceed is given, the primary
database is updated during installation; the display of the primary database
is disabled until the update of it is complete.

65900010 12-11

Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Copy
The Chart Copy feature allows you to copy charts installed locally to other
nodes in a multi-node system.
Chart copy operations can be performed while VisionMaster is running on
all nodes, and charts will continue to be displayed during the copy process.
When a copy operation is performed, the charts are placed in a staging
area on the remote node, separate from any charts already installed on that
node. After a copy operation has completed successfully, the node needs
to be restarted to activate the copied charts.

A C-Map database must be initially installed and registered locally
at each node before Chart Copy for C-Map charts is started.

To copy a chart database to other nodes, do the following:
1. To select the chart type to be copied click on the Chart Copy
button. The subsequent screen enables the chart type to be
selected from a drop down list.
The Charts at Local Node area provides information about locally installed
charts for the selected chart type. The information provided depends on the
chart type. For S-57, ARCS, or VPF charts a Last Modification date and
time is provided to indicate when the charts were last updated. For C-Map
charts, an Issue Number, Issue Date, and Update Date are provided.

The Charts at Remote Nodes table provides the latest available
information about charts installed at remote nodes. The same chart time,
date and update information is provided for charts on remote nodes as is
provided for the local node.
The Status column provides an indication of whether the charts on the
remote node match the locally installed charts. If the charts do match, then

12-12 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Matches Local Charts is displayed in green. Otherwise, Does Not Match
Local Charts is displayed in yellow. The Status column also provides
current progress information once a copy operation is started. The buttons
in the Action column enables you to start or cancel chart copy operations
for individual nodes.
The Copy Local Charts to All Nodes button allows you to copy the local
charts to all nodes, while the Cancel All Copy Operations cancels all
active copy operations.
2. To start a copy operation to specific nodes on the system (i.e. the
nodes displaying Does Not Match Local Charts) click on the
Copy Local Charts to this Node button in the Action column.
3. Or, to copy the selected chart database to all remote nodes on the
system, click the Copy Local Charts to All Nodes button.
4. When the copy process is started the Status column provides
current information about the progress of each active copy
operation. If a copy operation fails for any reason (e.g. remote
nodes becomes unavailable), the reason for the copy error is
displayed in the Status column. Once the copy operation is started,
the Action column button will change to Cancel Copy Operation.
5. To cancel the copy operation click the Cancel Copy Operation
button while the copy is in progress, the copy will be cancelled and
any partially set of copied files will be removed from the remote
node.
Once the copy operation is complete, the Status column will display a
Copy Complete, Reboot Node message in yellow. This indicates that the
newly copied charts can be activated by restarting the remote node. After
the node is restarted, the chart information displayed for that node will be
automatically refreshed to match the newly activated charts.
When a C-Map database is copied to a remote node, any existing licenses
installed on that node are automatically applied to the replacement charts
when they are activated on reboot.
If a problem is encountered during the activation of copied charts on
restart, a Charts Activation Error warning is raised, with a description on
the reason for the failed activation.

65900010 12-13

Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Chart Permissions
The Chart Permissions area includes the
following access buttons:
• Show Permissions
• Export S-63 Permit
• Export 7Cs Hardware ID
• Export ARCS User Permit

The Export ARCS User Permit selection is only valid if your
system is configured as a Total Watch and a presentation option of
the Total Watch includes an ECDIS. For details on this function
refer to the ECDIS User’s Guide (65900012).

Show Permissions
When in Standby, information on
chart license and permit expiration
can be viewed by clicking on the
Show Permissions button. A tabular
window appears over the video circle
with the following columns, based on
the chart database selected from the
drop down list:
 License (SevenCs)
 Product (CMAP only)
 Chart (DirectENC only)
 Expiration Date
 Region (C-MAP only)
 License Type (ARCS only)
Permits and Licenses
When a chart license or permit is about to expire a warning is generated. If
the CMAP license has expired the system stops displaying the respective
charts. The system will accept new licenses and cell permits using
electronic media. For details on installing license files and/or cell permits
see Chapter 3 `Chart Installation' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster Ship's
Manual.

12-14 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Export S-63 Permit
A SevenCs S-63 is a piece of information that is intended to provide
additional system protection and authorization for the chart database. The
operator is required to send the permit file to UKHO in order to activate an
S-63 account. The permit number is based on the Sperry Security block
PIN.
To export an S-63 permit file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a memory stick, into a USB port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export S-63 Permit
button. The subsequent window
displays the external disk drive and
prompts to choose the location to
export the S-63 permit.
3. Navigate to the location where you
want the permit exported to by clicking
on the + button to the left of the
directory folder.
4. To enter a filename for the permit click
in the Filename field and enter a name
using the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted
and a name entered click the Export
button, the S-63 permit is exported to
the location as a .txt file. If successful a
temporary prompt is displayed
confirming that the permit has been
exported with the selected location detailed in the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation, click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.
Once installed S-63 charts will be displayed even if cell permits have
expired.

65900010 12-15

Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Export 7Cs Hardware ID
To export a 7Cs Hardware ID file do the following:
1. Insert an external device, such as a memory stick, into a USB port
at the rear of the VisionMaster PC.
2. Click on the Export 7Cs Hardware ID
button. The subsequent window displays
the external disk drive and prompts to
choose the location to export the
hardware ID file.
3. Navigate to the location where you want
the file exported to by clicking on the +
button to the left of the directory folder.
4. To enter a name for the ID file click in the
Filename field and enter a name using
the screen keypad.
5. With the export location highlighted and a
name entered click the Export button,
hardware ID file is exported to the location
as a .txt file. If successful a temporary
prompt is displayed confirming that the file
has been exported with the selected
location detailed in the prompt.
6. To cancel the export operation, click the Cancel button. The Tools
menu re-appears.
7. When the file has been exported, select the route directory (i.e.
E:\), click the Eject button and remove the external device from the
PC.

12-16 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Index
Chart Index catalogues each chart for all loaded chart databases. The
Index facility includes the option to move the display location to any
selected chart.
To access the Chart Index, click on the Show Index button. A tabular chart
index window appears over the video circle.

The charts are listed in their respective databases. The database list in the
Chart Index may be reversed by clicking on the Database field. The index
shows the name of each chart. Vector chart names (SevenCs, C-MAP etc.)
are based on their ENC alphanumeric code; raster chart names (ARCS)
include a short description of the location covered. Other details include the
chart's compilation scale (see Chart Facility) and their usage level, e.g.
Overview, Berthing etc.
When the Chart Index window is first opened no
chart outlines are displayed unless Draw Chart
Outlines is updated.
To display the charts for a specific database,
click on the Draw Chart Outlines drop down
arrow and select the required chart database
from the list. The display will show the coverage
of the charts within the current display area as a
series of red chart boundary rectangles.

65900010 12-17

Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide

Go To Chart
The Go to Selected Chart feature works in a similar way to the Goto
function (see Off Centre, Pan and Goto), which enables the centre of the
chart display to be moved to known locations or a specific location.
To display a particular chart, select the chart by clicking on its selection box
to the left of the list. The selected chart is highlighted in the Index.

The Go To Selected Chart button only changes the displayed
location. It will not necessarily display the selected chart if its
database is not currently enabled. If a different chart database is
enabled, the operator will need to select the desired chart from the
Chart button drop down list.

Click on the Go To Selected Chart button, the
display is re-drawn to the selected chart and the
chart boundary is shown as a cross hatch. TM
limits are switched off and a temporary prompt
displays TM Limits Off.
TM limits are re-enabled and the navigation chart
displayed when the Centre button is clicked.

12-18 65900010

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts

Chart Settings
The Chart Settings sub menu includes two tab
folders:
• Features
• Symbology
The Features folder enables you to choose a
chart display mode and enable/disable custom
display settings from a list of chart format features, additional to those
displayed on the currently selected mode.
The Symbology folder enables you to customise display settings for all
chart databases and display settings for specific charts (e.g. C-MAP or S-
57 chart databases) from a list of available settings.
The currently selected chart display mode (i.e. `Base Chart Display' or
`Standard Chart Display') is shown as a permanent prompt, see Prompts.
Chart Display Suppression
The display of charts is suppressed if the display is `unstabilised’ i.e. the
current presentation mode is in H UP. To display charts change the
presentation mode to N UP or C UP, see Presentation Modes.
The selection of chart sets and the application of custom features is
governed by the current range scale, see Range Scales. All sets are
available and custom features can be applied at range scales of 12 NM and
below, whereas at higher range scales chart sets and functions are
disabled as follows:
 at 96 NM Base chart only is available;
 at 48 NM Base and Standard charts are available;
 at 24 NM Base, Standard, Other and Custom charts are available.

65900010 12-19

`Base Chart Display' or `Standard Chart Display') is shown as a permanent prompt. Base The Base display mode is the minimum chart content that cannot be removed from the display. other aids to navigation and fixed structures • Chart scale boundaries • Scale. It is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation. see Safety Checking • Isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour • Isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as fixed structures.enables a customized selection of display settings to be defined from the Standard and Other settings lists.includes all Standard and Other display settings listed in the Custom Display Settings list  Custom . beacons.e. etc. The currently selected chart display mode (i. VisionMaster FT includes the following three types of chart display modes:  Base  Standard  Other . overhead wires. • Buoys. range and north arrow • Units of depth and height • Display mode 12-20 65900010 .Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Features The selection of the display mode defines the behaviour used by the chart engine when rendering chart data. see Prompts. Base display settings consist of: • Coastline (high water) • Own ship's safety contour.

Other The Other display mode includes Standard features. Customizing Display Settings The custom display settings list allows chart settings to be enabled or disabled when the display mode is in Custom.deselects all the chart settings in the Standard and Other lists. see below. 65900010 12-21 . There are three buttons available for selection: All. By default. A description of each function is given below the custom settings list when the cursor moves over the function. None and Default. Custom A custom feature set allows the operator to customize the chart display by enabling or disabling specific settings from the Other and Standard lists. This display mode is intended to be used as a minimum during route planning and route monitoring. • All .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Standard The Standard display mode includes all features defined by Base. all the Standard settings are enabled for the Custom feature set. • None . plus the additional features listed in the Standard display settings list.selects and displays all the chart settings in the Standard and Other lists. plus all remaining chart features as listed in the Other settings list. To enable or disable individual chart settings in Custom mode tick the check box for the required function. • Default .selects and displays the Standard default chart settings only.

12-22 65900010 .Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Symbology The Symbology folder lists the display settings available for all chart types and all other configured chart databases (as listed in Chart Databases).

Overscale Pattern Overscale pattern displayed on charts that On are shown at a more detailed scale level than their compilation scale. when selected. Setting Name Setting Description Default Value Data Quality Pattern Pattern indicating the quality of chart data Off Official Boundary Boundary between official and unofficial On data. Simplified Symbols Simplified symbols from the presentation Off library used. 65900010 12-23 . 29 Scamin Filtering Suppresses chart symbols based on their On SCAMIN attribute. enabling the operator to focus on the most useful navigational information for the current display scale.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Chart Symbology Display Settings The chart symbology display settings listed below are. As the chart display is decluttered. SCAMIN also helps increase the chart re-draw performance. Also. some chart providers may not apply SCAMIN. Shallow Pattern Shallow pattern displayed on waters Off shallower than the safety contour. Two Shade Depths Controls whether two or four water depths Off shades are used. The application of the SCAMIN attribute by the producer of the ENC data is optional. displayed on all chart databases. The primary function of SCAMIN is to declutter the chart display. 29 SCAMIN is an attribute (defined by the IHO S-57 standard) that can be used to tag ENC chart features to be suppressed above a certain display scale. it may not be available consistently across different ENC charts.

Setting Name Setting Description Default Value Ignore Time Display chart objects regardless of their S. Off 30 Attributes 57 date and time dependency attributes (PERSTA. To display all ENC objects outside their date/time dependency. Text Outline Outline around text symbols to provide On contrast. Other objects. such as seasonal buoys. are only displayed over a certain period (defined as IHO S-57 parameters PERSTA to PEREND).Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide The chart symbology display settings below are available for the ENC (S- 57) chart database. the light sectors emanating from coastal lighthouses will be shown on screen. Text Scale Factor Scaling factor that defines the size of text 2. shape. 31 Light Sector Areas Light sector highlighting. 30 Date-dependent objects. the ENC chart objects are displayed and a permanent prompt `Chart Ignores Date and Time’ appears informing the user that ENC information displayed may be incorrect for the present real date and time. DATEND) Light Distinction Provides non-standard symbology for fixed Off lights so they can be easily distinguished from floating lights. tick the Ignore Time Attributes check box. PERENC. 31 The light sector will be shown only if the actual light source is visible on the chart display. and colour to reduce clutter of the display. such as a traffic separation scheme. object Off names). When this setting is switched on. Off Text Symbol Filtering Suppresses overlapping chart symbols of Off the same size. 12-24 65900010 . on a higher scale ratio range scale where the coastline is visible. at lower ranges where the light source is not shown on the chart display the light sector will not be visible. Text (Important) Display text information important for On navigation Text (Other) Other textual information (e.g. Off Lights Description Lights textual description. DATSTA. may have a date on which they are introduced (DATSTA) and/or discontinued (DATEND).0 displayed on the chart. For example. The system defaults to not displaying any ENC object with one of these attributes outside its effective date/time.

non-symbolized area boundaries. Lights Leg Lengths Real light leg lengths. Setting Name Setting Description Default Value Coverage Boundaries indicating chart coverage. Off Boundaries Danger Symbol Danger symbol displayed for dangers in On waters shallower than the safety contour. Off Text (Important) Text important for navigation. Off Boundaries Text (Generic) Generic textual information.g. None Low Accuracy Tags marking low accuracy chart objects. On Text (Other) Other textual information (e.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts The chart symbology display settings below are available for C-Map chart databases. chart object Off names) 65900010 12-25 . Off Tags Plain Area Plain. Off Text Light Sector Areas Lights textual description. Off Lights Description Lights textual description.

0 the chart. Off Text Outline Display outline around text to provide contrast. shape.selects and displays the default chart settings as defined in the tables above. TOD Level 1 Display Tactical Ocean Data (TOD) Level 1 On chart data. Symbol Filtering Apply filtering that suppresses overlapping chart Off symbols of the same size.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide The chart symbology display settings are available for VPF chart databases.  Default . Using the Symbology Buttons The following buttons at the top of the Symbology tab folder are available:  All . and colour to reduce clutter. TOD Level 0 Display Tactical Ocean Data (TOD) Level 0 On chart data. Setting Name Setting Description Default Value GeoSym Apply beautification to improve the appearance On Beautification of GeoSym symbology.  None .deselects all the chart settings. TOD Level 4 Display Tactical Ocean Data (TOD) Level 4 On chart data.selects and displays all the chart settings. On Text Scale Scaling factor that defines the size of the text on 2. Text Information Display text information. TOD Level 2 Display Tactical Ocean Data (TOD) Level 2 On chart data. 12-26 65900010 .

used to display geographic areas between 0 degrees and 80 degrees latitude north or south. Whenever the displayed region changes (due to scale change. If preferred projection is unavailable in the displayed region.. the lines of longitude (measuring east-west position) converge at the poles and the lines of latitudes (measuring north-south position) are equal distance apart.000 or above) where Mercator can view regions up to 85 degrees North/South. the lines of longitude are straight vertical lines equal distance apart at all latitudes. 33 In a Polar Stereographic projection the lines of longitude emanate from either the north or south pole (depending on which hemisphere is being displayed). The Polar Stereographic projection can be used to display any region of the earth. On a globe. The preferred projection is local to each node and is persisted. this stretching is exaggerated near the poles. then the system will select an `Active Projection' from the available projections that are supported by the current chart engine. and horizontal distances are stretched above and below the equator.000. if the preferred location is Mercator but the chart is displaying a high latitude region the Active Projection will automatically change to Polar Stereographic to render the chart display. TM reset or Goto) the system attempts to the use the preferred projection to render the chart and all other synthetics. panning. 32 A Mercator projection is a method of showing a map of the globe on a flat surface.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Chart Projections There are two primary projection types supported by the VisionMaster system: 32 • Mercator 33 • Polar Stereographic Mercator is the default chart projection. including the north and south poles (up to 90 degrees north or south). The exception to that is with non-navigational scales (1:1. 65900010 12-27 . and lines of latitude are displayed as concentric circles around the pole. In a Mercator projection. For example. The Chart Projection menu allows the operator to specify which of the two projection types they prefer to use for display.

12-28 65900010 . Chart Depths/Heights The chart depths/heights window enables you to change the default settings of own ship's safety depth/height and shallow/deep shading contours. At high latitude regions. The minimum height is the distance from the surface of the charted water to the lowest point of the overhead obstruction. whereas CMAP is only displayed in Mercator projection. The defined safety depth value is reflected in the Chart Legend Detail tab folder. Safety Depth and Height The safety depth is the minimum depth required by an underwater object for own ship to pass over safely. The default values for Safety Depth and Height are 30 metres. CMAP charts are restored when the chart enters a geographic region where Mercator is allowed. The safety height is the minimum distance required by an overhead obstruction for own ship to pass under safely. If the safety height is set at a value less than the configured value of own ship's height a Safety Height Low Caution is displayed. If the safety depth is set at a value less than the configured value of own ship's maximum draft a Safety Depth Shallow Caution is displayed.node system any changes made in Chart Depths/Heights are distributed and persisted across all nodes. using Polar Stereographic projection. The minimum depth is the distance from the water surface to bottom of own ship's keel. On a multi. CMAP charts are suppressed and a permanent prompt Chart Suppressed at High Latitude appears.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide SevenCs vector based charts are displayed in all chart projections. plus a safety buffer against variations in the water level from the time the water was charted to the present time.

WARNING! The chart shading based on the defined contour urs may not always be accurate due to the geometry of the depth d contours in the area. The default value for deep contour is 30 metres (minimum value = Safety Depth). as well as limitations in the he system chart data at any given time. refer to the Detail tab in Chart Legend sub menu. as appropriate to theth navigation area. The operator must take these th factors into account and use all available source rces of information regarding depth. Click the th left key again to set the value. 65900010 12-29 . The default value for shallow contour is 2 metres (maximum value = Safety Depth). Changing Chart Depth/Height Values To change the default values click in the required field and mo ove the trackball left to decrease the value or right to increase. and areas with special conditions co are considered dangerous if their depth is less than own ship’s safety saf depth or no depth is defined for that object. and other data issues. For an illustration of deep and shallow contour areas on a cha hart display. Contours. with the shallow water areas indicated ted by lighter shades. variances between data content on overlapping g charts.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Shallow and Deep Contours The Deep Contour and Shallow Contour areas are highlighted ed on the Video circle by colour shading. These limitations m may include non-availability of user-specified depth contours urs. When own ship's safety depth is changed the deep/shallow contour co colours may change although the contour outlines will remain on the video v circle. The contour and depth values set for the selected chart are alsoals shown in the Detail tab in Chart Legend sub menu. prohibited areas.

12-30 65900010 . click on the database in the enablement list and click the Down button between the Enablement and Disablement fields. The database is moved to the Disablement list. 2. To enable a previously disabled chart database click on the database in the disablement list and click the Up button between the Enablement and Disablement fields. Click on a chart database in the Enabled list. The database is moved to the Enablement list. Enabling and Disabling Chart Databases The chart databases are listed in the Enabled field in the order in which they will be used for rendering chart data. 2. The higher a chart database appears in the enabled list the sooner it will be selected for rendering. To disable. To change the chart database priority. if the database is neither at the top or bottom of the list then both the Up button and Down button to the right of the list become available.e.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Databases The Chart Databases window lists all the currently enabled and (if applicable) any disabled chart databases. all chart databases that have been configured for the system are listed as enabled. The databases with the highest priority are listed at the top of the Enabled field and the lowest priority at the bottom. When the system is in its initial state. the first time the system is run. Click on the Up or Down button to move the position of the chart database within the list. i. To disable or enable a chart database: 1. or to disable or enable a chart database do the following: To change the chart database order of priority: 1.

SevenCs supports both official and unofficial data. The CMAP chart engine supports the following chart databases: 34 • CMAP Professional (CD version) 35 • CMAP ENC 36 • CMAP Professional+ (Upgraded DVD) The SevenCs chart engine supports the following chart databases: 37 • S63 (encrypted S-57) 38 • S-57 39 • VPF (vector product format) • DirectEnc (ChartWorld). All official ENC chart data must comply with data standards set by members of the International Hydrographic Organisation (IHO) and published in their document S-57.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Supported Chart Engines and Databases The VisionMaster system supports CMAP and SevenCs chart engines. unless it has been explicitly disabled by the operator using the `Official Boundary' custom chart setting for the SevenCs engine. 65900010 12-31 . 39 Unofficial chart format. An unofficial chart database is data which does not comply with the S-57 Edition 3 document. The official boundary line is always displayed to distinguish official and unofficial data. Official chart data is known as Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC) data. implementation based on IHO S57 standard. 34 CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format. 35 Official S-57 charts converted to CMAP's proprietary chart database format. An Unofficial Data permanent prompt is shown whenever chart data from an unofficial source is displayed. 36 Professional+ is an extended version of CM93v3 charts supplied on DVD. Official and Unofficial Chart Data Chart databases may be classified as Official or Unofficial chart data. Edition 3. format. 37 Encrypted official chart format. All C-Map data is considered unofficial. 38 Unencrypted official chart format. C-MAP and SevenCs presentation libraries are supported. implementation is based on IMO S63 standard. Unofficial data is not certified for safe navigational and the operator should refer to paper charts for unofficial data regions. and structure of VPF are specified by the MIL- STD-2407. see Settings. The content.

The information displayed in the Detail folder is divided into the following sections:  Chart Usage/Scale  Contours/Depths  Format/Date/Provider  Geodesy  Units To view the read-only information on each section click on the + box.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Legend The Chart Legend sub menu enables you to view read only information on every chart currently visible on the screen. From this folder you can choose the chart whose legend information will be displayed in the Detail folder. The Chart Legend window is divided into three tab folders: • Select • Detail • Updates Legend Select The Select folder displays the names of all the charts currently displayed on the screen. The set of charts displayed in the Select folder will automatically update itself to match the cells most recently displayed on the screen. Legend Detail The Detail folder displays all the chart legend information on the chart selected from the Select folder. 12-32 65900010 . see Legend Detail. The available charts are listed in Chart engine (C-MAP or SevenCs) folders. all component fields show No Chart Available. If there is no chart data available for the geographical region being viewed.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Chart Usage / Scale The chart usage scale displays the navigational purpose (e. Contours / Depths The Contours/Depths information includes depth and contour values for the selected chart based on the requested values from the Chart Depths/Heights window. This safety contour is displayed on the chart with a bold/emphasized line. Deep Contour and Shallow Contour All vector charts contain information about the contour and shape of the sea floor at a particular depth. if the Deep Contour value is increased from the default of 30 metres to a value ranging from 31 to 50 metres then the Deep Contour read- only value will display 50. this line defines the area that the ship can never safely cross. The contours of the chart will always increase to a higher value than the minimum values set in Chart Depths/Heights.g. One chart may have a set of contours for 3 metre. Harbour) and scale of the selected chart (see Compilation Scale in Chart Facility). 65900010 12-33 . 5 metre. For further emphasis the water that is deeper than the actual safety contour is displayed in a different colour to the water shallower than the actual safety contour.e. 10 metre. For example. Safety Contour The safety contour value defines which of the depth contours available in the chart will be selected as the actual safety contour that is displayed in the chart legend. Each chart contains depth contour information with varying levels of detail based on the survey that was originally performed to create the chart. and 15 metre depths. 8 metre. The deep contour and shallow contour define where the shading on the chart image will change. A less detailed chart might only have contour information for 5 metre and 30 metre depths. Two Shade Depths is unchecked in Custom Features). When four depth shades are used there are different shades for `very shallow' waters and `very deep' waters. this information is called Depth Contour. The deep and shallow contour values are only applicable when four depth shades are enabled in Setting Custom Chart Features (i.

there is effectively is no applicable safety contour for that chart and the legend shows No Contour Available. If the defined safety depth value is not available in the chart. Format / Date / Provider The Format / Date /Provider displays data on the chart's data format. edition and update information. Units Units show the chart depth and height units (defaults to metres). Safety Depth The safety depth is the depth threshold at which spot soundings should be displayed with or without emphasis.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide The safety contour value is defined by the operator selected safety depth value in Chart Depths/Heights. The actual safety contour value is always greater than or equal to the requested safety depth value. the next deeper contour is selected. Geodesy The Geodesy section provides datum information (WGS84) and WGS84 shift Lat/Long data. 12-34 65900010 . If no contour is available in the chart that is equal to or deeper than the requested safety depth. The Safety Depth value set in Chart Depth/Heights is reflected in the Safety Depth field. data provider. The illustration below shows a typical chart annotated with contour areas and safety depth areas.

Details for a particular chart update action can be viewed by selecting it in the tree. respective update actions will be shown in the update tree.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Legend Updates The Updates folder displays the date and time of any updates applied to the selected chart. On CMAP ENC charts. the chart object associated with the update action can be highlighted on the display (where applicable) by ticking the Highlighting On check box. The action details are listed at the bottom of the window. Each update can be expanded by clicking on the Edition + box. 65900010 12-35 .

12-36 65900010 .enables you to Create a Chart Update and Modify a Chart Update. Added chart objects are displayed using the same symbology as ENC chart data but with a manual update symbol superimposed. An example of a manual update symbol on a chart object is shown below. The Manual Chart Update sub-menu includes the following tab folders: • Display .Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Manual Chart Update The manual chart update facility enables the operator to add chart objects to the currently enabled chart. Multi-node Support On a multi-node system manual chart updates are saved and retrieved from a database and may be distributed and available among all system nodes.enables importing or exporting of chart updates. • Layers . • Edit .enables the management of layers used for grouping manual chart updates.enables the selection of chart update types and layers to be displayed. • I/O (import/export) .

edit. or danger classification. To confirm the layer rename click the Yes button. Select the layer from the list and click the Delete Selected Layer button. To create. The layer name appears in the Layers list. or to cancel click the No button. 2. a delete confirmation window appears. Layers provide a way to group sets of related manual chart updates. Select the layer from the list enter the new name in the Layer Name: field as described above. 2. To enter a description of the layer click in the Layer Description field and enter a description using the screen keypad. The layer is removed from the list when deleted. To rename a layer: 1. 2. or to cancel the deletion click the No button. time period. The display of chart updates within layers can be controlled from the Display folder. a rename confirmation window appears. and click the Rename Selected Layer button. Groupings may be made based on different criteria such as geographic region. To delete a layer: 1. see Displayed Chart Updates. Click in the Layer Name: field. The selected layer is renamed in the list. rename or delete a chart layer do the following: To create a new layer: 1.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Manual Chart Update Functions Chart Layers The Layers tab enables you to create. Chart updates can also be imported or exported based on their layer grouping. Using the keypad enter a name for the layer and click the Add New Layer button. 3. see Create Chart Update. If more than one layer is created the field lists the layers alpha- numerically. and delete layers. navigational mode. To confirm layer deletion click the Yes button. see Importing or Exporting Chart Updates. 65900010 12-37 . the screen keypad appears.

creates a new chart object on an existing chart.  Add Deletion Mark .adds an annotation mark to an ENC chart object. The following screen allows you to specify the layer.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Edit Chart Update The Edit tab folder is divided into two areas: Create Chart Update and Modify Chart Update. If no layers have been created the update will associate to the default layer.  Add Annotation Mark . 12-38 65900010 . object type and symbol. The Create Chart Update area includes the following links:  Create New object  Add Annotation Mark  Add Deletion Mark The Modify Chart Update area includes the following links:  View/Edit Chart Update  Delete Chart Update Create and Modify Chart Updates Create Chart Update The Create Chart Update area of the Edit tab folder enables you to do the following:  Create New Object .adds a deletion mark to an ENC chart object. To create the chart object on a specific chart layer click on the Layer drop down arrow and select from the list. Create New Object To create a new chart object onto an existing chart do the following: 1. Click on the Create New Object button. 2.

click on the Type drop down arrow and select from the list. click on the Manually Create. Move the cursor into the chart display. 8. The following object types are assigned:  Areas  Beacons  Buoys  Danger Points  Geo Shapes  Lines  Nav Marks  Other Points 4. The screen prompts for a LAT / LON position. button. To select the object type. 10. With the object type selected click on the Symbol/Description drop down list and select the object symbol. or points added to the line or area. the screen cursor displays MO EDIT. The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description drop down list includes a brief description of the selected symbol. If the object type created was an area or a line the window includes the option of starting a new area or line by clicking on the Start New Area/Line button. Click in the area where you want the object positioned. move the cursor to another area of the screen and left click. 9. 65900010 12-39 . or to add points to a line or area object. When the object is created. To change the object's parameters click in the respective fields. Each left click results in a new object of the selected type being created. 7. 5. Objects with point geometry are highlighted with a white box. The object appears with a white highlighting.. more editable fields will become available in the window such as Position and Notes. 6.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts 3. To create a new object with a manually specified position. line or area objects are highlighted with small white circles at their individual points. To create the same object..

To exit Create New Object click the Done button. 12-40 65900010 . For details on creating specific chart objects refer to Creating Radar Maps in the Navigation Tools chapter. Click in the LAT/LON fields.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide The Manually Create… button can also be used to manually specify the position of additional points for a line or area objects. enter a position using the screen keypad. 11. the objects created are fixed in position and the view returns to the Manual Chart Update menu. A symbol is created in the position specified. 12. and click the OK button. The list of chart objects in the Type drop down list is the same as the list of Radar Maps.

depth contour) the line is displayed in red. a buoy or navigation marker) or an area the object or area is highlighted in a transparent red background with a red outline. 2. 65900010 12-41 . Update the Notes field in the window with the desired annotation information. c. line or point) on the chart display and add a note to the annotated chart object. To annotate a chart object do the following: 1. If the object is a line the red colour changes to a dotted line annotation mark. The white box around the object is removed but the i symbol remains. the screen prompts to select the chart object to annotate. If the object is an area the background colour changes to a small dotted background with a dotted outline. With the required object selected click the OK button. b. If the object is a line (e.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Add Annotation Mark The Add Annotation Mark feature allows you to highlight an object (an area. and the view returns to the Edit Chart Update menu.g. Click the ENC chart object you want to annotate. Click on the Add Annotation Mark button. If the object is a point (for example. The Chart Update View/Edit menu confirms the annotated symbol status and gives a brief description in the Chart Object Info field. 4. 3. If the object is a point a white box appears around the chart object with an i symbol next to the object. The method of highlighting is dependent on the object selected: a. To exit Add Annotation Mark click the Done button.

2. 2. symbol description and its current position.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Add Deletion Mark The Add Deletion Mark facility operates in the same way as Add Annotation Mark. To edit the object's attributes: 1. as the cursor moves over the object it changes to a bidirectional arrow indicator. The difference being that the deletion mark is symbolized with a diagonal orange line through the object. 3. The subsequent window lists the selected object type. 12-42 65900010 . To move the object to another layer click on the Layer drop down arrow and select from the list of layers. do the following: 1. Click on the chart object to be viewed or edited. tick the Associate with Chart check box. The window prompts to left click on the object to view/edit. To associate the chart update with the current chart. Click on the View/Edit Chart Update button. Modify Chart Update The Modify Chart Update area of the Edit tab folder enables you to do the following: • View or Edit a chart update • Delete a chart update Viewing or Editing a Chart Update To view or edit a chart update. Navigate to the chart object.

With all object editing complete click on the Done button. If applicable. The currently selected point is distinguished by a red highlight circle. hold down the left key and use the trackball to drag the object to the required position. and Display Label will be available in this window. 4. The field directly underneath the Symbol/Description field includes a brief description of the selected symbol. 6. Time Label. Click in the LAT/LON fields and enter a position using the screen keypad. The chart object is updated. 65900010 12-43 . To change the object's position either: a. To change the group type click on the Type drop down arrow and select from the following:  Beacons  Buoys  Danger Points  Lines  Other points As the type is changed its graphic symbol also changes in the symbol/description field and on the display. To change the symbol click on the drop down arrow and select from the list. select the specific point to be edited by moving the cursor over the point and left clicking. 5. If required. 8. Move the cursor over the object. Edit these values by clicking in the desired field. enter notes in the Notes field using the screen keypad. Or b. other editable fields such as Rotation. 7.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts 3. When editing a line or area object.

Click on the Delete Chart Update button. do the following: 1.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Deleting a Chart Update To delete a chart update. Click on the object to delete it. If the Confirm check box is unticked the object is immediately deleted from the screen. 4. Move the cursor over the object to be deleted. 12-44 65900010 . indicating a delete action can now be performed. If the box is unticked then objects are deleted without confirmation. the cursor lines change from horizontal and vertical cross hairs to diagonal cross hairs. If the Confirm On Delete check box is ticked then the screen will prompt you to confirm the deletion. 2. Click the Done button to return to the Manual Chart Update Edit sub menu. To receive system prompts to confirm deletion before any object is deleted tick the check box. The folder prompts to select the object you wish to delete with a Confirm on Delete check box. The cursor displays DEL when moved into the video circle. 3.

Each layer and type currently displayed will have their check box ticked. To select all chart layers and types for display click the Select All buttons. see Create Chart Update. 65900010 12-45 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Display Chart Updates The Display tab enables you to select the layers and object types to be displayed on the currently enabled chart. The Displayed Types lists all the object types that can be selected from the Type drop down list in the Chart Update Creation window. to deselect all for display click the Deselect All buttons. The Displayed Layers area lists the default layer and all the operator defined layers created in Layers. All manual chart updates will be displayed when all check boxes are ticked. Objects that were not associated with a created layer are automatically associated with the Default layer. To suppress the display of a manual chart update for a particular layer or type untick the respective check box.

4. 2. Click on the file to import. The selected chart updates are imported into the Manual Chart Update menu. When complete click the Eject button before removing the external device. Insert the external device containing the chart updates into the PC. 5. Importing Chart Updates To import chart updates do the following: 1. that layer is imported with the objects and the layer defaults to selected in the Display folder. The file identity appears in the Filename field. 12-46 65900010 . The field below the directory tree will show any valid object files in the selected folder. Click the Import button to import the selected file's contents to your Workstation. such as a USB key or 3½ inch floppy disk. (this is usually a USB memory stick). Chart updates not currently on a workstation can be imported from an external drive. Navigate to the directory where the chart updates reside. Manual chart updates that have been produced on a workstation can be exported to other workstations via the external drive. If no external device has been inserted the window prompts to insert removable media.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Importing or Exporting Chart Updates The I/O (Import/Export) tab folder enables you to import or export manual chart updates to and from VisionMaster workstations. If successful a temporary prompt appears confirming the import. If the chart updates are included on a layer. 3.

2. When the required export options have been selected name the file to be exported in the Filename field and click the Export button.manually created chart update objects within a specified geographic area. the export options available are:  All Objects . 65900010 12-47 . the LAT/LON fields for Southwest corner and Northeast corner appear with all values defaulting to zero. If Objects in Area is selected. a layer field with a drop down list appears. 3. Select the external drive where the update is to be exported to. Select the export option required by clicking on the drop arrow in the Export field.all manually created chart update objects on your workstation. 5.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Exporting Chart Updates To export chart updates do the following: 1. select the layer to be exported from the list. If successful a temporary prompt appears confirming the export.all manually created chart update objects on a specific layer. Define the geographic area you want to export from by clicking in the LAT/LON position fields and entering values from the screen keypad. When complete click the Eject button before removing the external device.  Objects in Layer . 4. If Objects in Layer is selected. 6.  Objects in Area .

When a query is activated the selected object. The Chart Query Results folder will automatically display the object information when Query Chart is activated. The Chart Query sub menu includes the following controls:  display the results of the query and navigate to the next object  start a new query or clear an old query  set the query options. line or area is highlighted with a suitable graphic. A chart query can be activated from the Chart Query Results folder. For a description of the different object types see Query Results. see Query Options.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Query The Chart Query facility enables the operator to highlight and view detailed information on specific chart areas and geographic objects in the video circle. 12-48 65900010 . based on the current set of filter options. When Query Chart is activated in this way the query is performed at the right click position. or by right clicking on a chart object in the video circle and selecting Query Chart from the semi-transparent window.

etc. etc. its chart position. and navigation controls.includes echo sounding spots To display a listing of all the objects assigned to each group click on the object group box in the list. Objects List The objects list displays a tree view of all the chart objects. information panel. This includes a description of the type of chart object selected. The objects are divided into the following groups:  Point . and its Dataset reference number (the chart displayed at the query position).  Line . To navigate from group to group. submariner cables. the chart object groups appear in the Results folder with the group the object is assigned to in highlight.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Query Features Query Results The Query Results folder includes an objects list. anchorage areas. point dangers. beacons.includes buoys. Right click in the video circle and select Query Chart. Information Panel The information area contains detailed read- only information for the currently selected object. To open the highlighted group list click on the down navigation arrow. lights. 2. Selecting an Object for Query To select a chart object for query. land areas.includes depth contours. or within the group list click on the up/down navigation arrows.Point . prohibited areas.  Area .includes depth areas. The information changes as other objects are selected from the Objects list.  Cluster . 65900010 12-49 . coastlines. do the following: 1. fishery zones. etc.

To clear all query results from the query menu and also clear any highlighting from the video circle click the Clear Query button. the text file or picture file appears in a separate window on the chart display. At the bottom of the menu. Lines are displayed in red. For Points and Clusters a red circle filled with a red shaded background is drawn around the selected object. or another function is selected. Query results and objects highlighted will be cleared automatically if the range scale is changed. the next left click enables you to query objects directly on the screen. a. After approximately 15 seconds of inactivity. two controls are provided to control the display of query results and highlighting. 4. Show File If the selected chart object has an embedded text file or picture file the Show File button becomes enabled. Areas are outlined in red and filled with a red shaded background c. 12-50 65900010 . The object selected in the Results folder is highlighted on the video circle with a graphic dependent on the group type selected. The Query Off button toggles between On and Off. when activated the screen cursor changes to a ? below the cross. the Query On cursor times out and reverts to Query Off. The screen below shows an example of a text viewer window and a picture viewer window. To view the file click on Show File.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 3. b.

arcs and/or 3D and cluster points)  Area Size . all three of which are based on the current selected range scale of the video circle.search by geometry type (points. areas. At least one check box must be ticked in order to receive query results. lines. large) To include the basic geometry types in chart queries tick their check box.search area as a factor of scale (small. The default values for query area size are as follows:  Small = 10% of the range scale  Medium = 20% of the range scale  Large = 30% of the range scale 65900010 12-51 . The Query Area Size control allows you to select from three different sizes of query region. medium.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Query Options The Chart Query Options control allows you to set the following query options:  Filter .

Safety Checking must be configured as an optional feature in system configuration before the operator can view chart dangers. either: 1.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Dangers A safety checking feature continuously searches the chart database and mariner objects database for objects that could endanger the safety of own ship. with the most recently to least recently discovered. Click on the individual items within the list. As each object item is highlighted its red background is removed. see Chapter 1 `Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual. see Safety Checking. A list of dangerous objects is shown in the Dangers window. Navigate up and down the list using the up/down arrows. or by clicking on Dangers in the Charts sub menu list. Dangerous objects in the list can be viewed in a number of ways. For a description of this feature. a detailed description is given below the list and the danger object is highlighted in the video circle. The objects are displayed in order of age. When safety checking detects a dangerous object a red flashing `Chart Dangers' alarm appears in the Alarm Status Indicator and the Dangers icon to the right of the Alarm Status Indicator is displayed with a red background. 12-52 65900010 . which can be accessed by either left clicking on the Dangers icon in the upper toolbar. 2. The list of dangerous objects is divided into Dangers and Cautions. 3. To mark all listed objects as viewed click on the Mark All As Viewed button.

g..Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts When all dangerous objects have been acknowledged in the Dangers window the red background is removed from the Dangers icon.the chart database. 65900010 12-53 . land mass or a harbour wall). Depth area information will additionally include the following data:  Depth Range Value 1:  Depth Range Value 2: The figure shown with Value 1: usually represents the minimum depth in metres of the Depth Area. although the objects will remain listed.e. The figure shown with Value 2: usually represents the maximum depth in metres of the Depth Area. This value may be 0 or a negative value if the depth area represents height above water (e.  Chart . SevenCs S-57. The system will remove objects from the Dangers list if it has been 120 seconds or more since own ship's safety region and a particular dangerous object last overlapped.g. This information will include the following:  Object Type . Chart Dangers Information The chart dangers information area at the bottom of the window gives detailed information on each dangerous object selected. e. Depth Area. Caution Area  Latitude/Longitude position of object  Database .g.the reference number of the nearest chart to the dangerous object.

or distance (in nautical miles). To change the look-ahead time or distance click on the respective re radio button. CAUTION: Profiles that adjust look-ahead time. based on current SOG. 1. a As the safety checking is done periodically there is a dela elay of a few minutes for dangers in the dangers list to time out after the th look ahead range has been adjusted. This prevents the same e dangers from being added or removed form the list. 12-54 65900010 . and re-alarmin ming due to fluctuations in the ship's course. own ship will travel. click in the field and an move the trackball right to increase the value (up to 60 minutes es or 10 NM) or decrease (to a minimum of 1 minute or 0.Charts Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Danger Settings The following Danger settings can be enabled. but not look aheaddd distance will have no immediate effect on the size of the safety checking ch region if look-ahead distance is currently selected. which is indicated as a white line following the COG from own ship. or the default valu lues adjusted: • Look-Ahead Range • Proximity Limit • Alarm on Cautions • Display Safety Region To change the Danger settings do the following: The Look-Ahead range controls how far in advance an alert is given before a specified range limit is reached. This range may be defined either as time (in minutes). As the he look- ahead value is increased or decreased the safety line lenengthens or shortens and the area the system checks for dangers is s adjusted.5NM). Profil files created in versions before the look-ahead distance paramameter was available may be edited so that the look-ahead distatance parameter is taken into account. To change the time or distance. or distance. The Look-Ahead range controls the safety region. the active field toggles depending on the selection sel made. The length of the safety region line represents the time.

the length and width of the safety region adjust accordingly. As own ship moves across the screen. To display the safety region tick the Show Safety Region check box. The default setting for the generation of Caution alarms is off. the line is redrawn every 30 seconds. The proximity value defines the safety breadth from own ship's path in metres that the system checks for dangerous objects (for example. If the Look-Ahead value or proximity distance limit is changed. 4. To display alarms for cautions tick the Alarm On Cautions check box. As the safety breadth is changed the width of the safety region changes accordingly. 2.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts On a multi. 3. To change the value click in the Added Breadth field and move the trackball left or right. underwater obstructions) that are shallower than the Shallow Contour specified in Chart Depths/Heights.node system the look-ahead range is distributed and persisted across all nodes. 65900010 12-55 .

The Chart 1 Catalog appears as a moveable window. The catalog is alphabetically divided into symbol categories. about symbols on the chart. To view information on a particular symbol click on the chart symbol. Information for that symbol appears in the Symbol Information field. 3. such as names and descriptions. Chart 1 Catalog This feature provides a Chart 1 symbol catalog as described in the S-52 Presentation Library. The catalog acts as a legend so the mariner can look up specific information. do the following: 1. which can be resized to occupy as much of the screen as required. Click on the Chart 1 Catalog button.Charts Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart 1 The Chart 1 facility provides access to the Chart 1 catalog and the SENC color diagram. When running with C-Map chart engine this feature is not available. 2. 12-56 65900010 . The Chart 1 Catalog is only available when using the SevenCs chart engine. To access the Chart 1 catalog. To access the categories click on the arrow to the right of the Chart 1 Category field and select from the drop down list. The Chart 1 Catalog and Color Diagram windows are only available when the system is in Standby.

To access. safety contour and other objects to be adequately displayed. see Chart Symbols in Chapter 14. such as coastlines. For a description and additional access to the color diagram. Brilliance.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Charts Color Diagram The color diagram ensures that any adjustments made to the brightness and contrast settings on the VisionMaster monitor will enable the SENC data. click on the Color Diagram button. 65900010 12-57 .

.

Montserrat ASQ Astronomical Station 1952. Argentina 65900010 Appendix A . Sudan AFG Afgooye. Bermuda Islands BER Bermuda 1957. Greece ATF Astro Beacon E 1945. Gambia BEQ Bermuda 1943. Marcus Island ASX Astro Secor 1966. Portugese Guinea BOO Bogota Observatorio. Bangka Island. Colombia BUR Bukit Rimpah. Indonesia BBE Bathurst Base East End Datum. Tarawa and Gilbert Islands ATB Athens. Antigua ANU A4 Astro 1956. Africa (1960 adjustment of ARC 1950 datum) ASC Ascension Island 1958 ASM Astro 1958. Bonin Islands AUA Australian Geodetic 1966 AUG Australian Geodetic 1984 AUS Australian National BAT Batavia (Djakarta). USA CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969. Africa ARS ARC 1960. Somalia AIN Ain el Abd 1970. Anguilla ARF ARC 1950. Code Description ABI Abidjan.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Code Appendix A Chart Datum Codes The table below lists Chart Datums with their identification codes. Java. Ghana ADI Adindan (30th Meridian). Indonesia CAC Cape Canaveral. Bermuda Islands BID Bissau Base North West End Pillar.1 . Saudi Arabia AMM M36 Astro 1975 adjustment. Ivory Coast ACC Leigon Pillar (GCS No 121). IWO-JIMA. Montserrat ANT DOS Astro A14 1977 adjustment. Accra.

South Africa CAZ Camp Area Astro 1961-62. Lisboa. Senegal DCL DCS-3 Astro 1973 adjustment. Solomon Islands DOM M12 Astro 1983 adjustment. Santa Cruz (DOS 1966-72) DAK Dakar. Dominica. Antarctica CDF Castania Delle Furie. Lesser Antilles FTO Fort Thomas 1975 Adjustment. New Zealand CHU Chua Astro. Marshall Islands EUR European 1950 EUS European 1979 FAH Fahud. Guadalcanal. Oman (Also known as PD Oman) FIN Final 1958. Chatham Island. St Lucia DJA Djakarta New. St Kitts-Nevis.2 65900010 . Sicily CGE Carthage. Portugal (Bessel) CAO Canton Island Astro 1966 CAP Cape Datum. Solomon Islands CZX DOS 66 CZX6.Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Code Description CAJ Castello Di Sao Jorge. Indonesia DOB DOS Astro Gux1. Paraguay COA Corrego Alegre. Tunisia CHI Chatham Island Astro 1971. Grand Cayman Appendix A . Brazil CRA Cruz Astro 1947. St Kitts-Nevis GAA Gan 1970. Addu Atoll GCA GCI Astro (IAGS 1959). Guadalcanal. Lesser Antilles EAS Easter Island 1967 EGT Egypt 1907 EGY Egypt 1930 ENW Eniwetok-Wake 1960. Iran FJD Fiji 1986 FJI Fiji 1956 FLO Observatorio 1939 (Also known as Flores Astro 1939) FOT Fort Thomas 1955.

Diego Garcia ITA Itarare N Base. Taiwan IGB IGN (North Block. Finland HER Hermannskogel. Italy GEO Geodetic Datum 1949. 1951. Catarina JEU British Honduras 1922 JOH Johnstone Island 1961 KAN Kandawala 1933. Iceland HKD Hong Kong 1963 HKE Hong Kong 1980 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan. Thailand IRL Ireland 1965 IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969. Kallio Church. Chile (Also known as Provisional South Chilean HIT 1963) HIU HITO XXV HJO Hjorsey 1955. New Zealand GIZ DOS 1968. Gizo Island. Kalimantan E GTA Grand Turk Astro 1943 GUA Guam 1963 HEL Helsinki. Austria HITO XVIII Astro. Indonesia GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948 GSE Goenoeng Segara (P5) 1933. Lanka KEA Revised Kertau KEG Kerguelen Island 1949 KUS Kusaie Astro Station 3. Kusaie Island. Sumatra.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Codes Code Description GDA German GEN Genoa. Itajuba-Santa. Bellevue) IGN IGN72 Nouvelle Caledonie IND Indian (Survey of India) INF Indian 1954 INH Indian 1975. 1908. Caroline Islands 65900010 Appendix A . New Georgia GOE Goenoeng Dempo.3 .

Philippines MAS Massoua (Eritrea). Mauritius LAT Latvia LCA LC5 Astro 1961. Rome (Also known as Rome 1940) MOG Mogadishu. Little Cayman and Cayman Brac LIB Liberia 1964 (Roberts Field Astro) LIS Lisboa (Castelo Di Sao Jorge). Fiji Islands NAG Revised Nahrwan NAH Nahrwan.Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Code Description LAP Le Pouce. China NAP Naparima 1955. Somalia MOZ Madzansua (Zumbo). Norway Appendix A .4 65900010 . Ethiopia MDD Madrid 1853. Portugal (International spheroid) LUZ Luzon (1911). Viti Levu Island. Egypt OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain 1936 OGC OSGB 1970 (Scientific Network) OGD OSGB 1980 adjustment (Scientific Network) OHA Old Hawaiian. Iraq NAN Nanking 1960. Hawaiian Islands OSI Ordnance survey of Ireland (WOFO Grid) OSL Oslo Observatory (Old). Nigeria MOB Monte Mario 1875. Mozambique MVS Monavatu 1916. Fiji OEG Old Egyptian. Trinidad and Tobago NAR North American Datum 1983 (NAD83) NAS North American Datum 1927 (NAD27) NUM Vanua Levu. Rome (Also known as Rome 1875) MOD Monte Mario 1940. Spain MER Merchich. Morocco MET Mercury Datum (Satellite Reference System Only) MID Midway Astro 1961 MIN Minna.

S Georgia SGM Selvagem Grande 1938. Djibouti PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967 PLN Pico de la Nieves. Guadeloupe. Grenada. Greenland REU Reunion REY Reykjavik. Germany PRI Principe. Madeira Service Hydrographique et Oceanographic de la Marine 1984 (SHOM SHO 1984). Panama PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse (Phare D'Ayabelle).Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Datum Codes Code Description OSN Norwegian (New) PAC Panama Colon. Sao Miguel and Santa Maria. Spain SGA ISTS 061 Astro 1968. Puerto Rico. Canary Islands POE Port Etienne. Sweden 65900010 Appendix A . Sinal Domorro Do Papagaio PRP Provisional South American 1956 PSAD56 PUR Puerto Rico 1927.5 . Mauritania POS New Porto Santo POT Potsdam. Lesser Antilles SAN South American 1969 SAO Sao Braz. Martinique SIL Sierra Leone 1960 SMG GS8 Astro 1953. Iceland SAG Sainte Anne-Island IGN 1951-52. Lesser Antilles SOA South Asia SOO Sao Tome STO Stockholm. Falkland Islands SCK Schwarzeck. Gran Canaria. Borneo SEI South East Island. Seychelles SFO San Fernando Observatory. Greater Antilles QAT Qatar National QUO Qomoq. Azores SAP Sapper Hill 1943. Namibia SEG Segura.

such differences are not plottable. These codes are used where a chart has been compiled by fitting information on more than one datum directly to the chart graticule without making adjustments for the shift between the datums. St Vincent WAK Wake Island Astro 1952 WGC World Geodetic System 1972 (WGS 1972) WGD World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 1984) YAC Yacare. In practice. Appendix A . Mozambique TIL Timbalai 1948 (datum point). Malagasy Rebublic TEC Tete. Uruguay YED Astro Yendegaia XXX OSI & OGB YYY IRL & OGB. then the chart will be subdivided for geographic referencing purposes. They indicate that. Japan TOY Tokyo Astronomical Observatory (Old) 1918 VAR Varesmae (System 1937). Estonia VID HMS Vidal 1967 Astro VIN Vienna (Hermanskogel) IGN 1957 (South Block. Sarawak + Brunei (Everest) TOK Tokyo. UND is used where it cannot be stated with any degree of certainty that positions read from the chart can be related to any one horizontal datum. and the chart may be regarded as being on either datum. Sabah (Bessel 1841) TIV Timbalai 1948 (datum point).Chart Datum Codes Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Code Description SWA South West Africa TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925. there are large parts of the world where insufficient data exists to relate a chart to any specific horizontal datum.6 65900010 . UND Undetermined Code. Tanna). Where it is possible to separately identify the datums to which different parts of the chart are referred. at the scale of the chart. Vanuatu (Also known as Tanna Astro VLE 1957) VOA Fort Charlotte.

13-1 .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance Chapter 13 Brilliance Brilliance Menu The Brilliance menu provides access to the following functions:  Day Night Modes  Brilliance Groups  Chart Symbols  Brightness Check 65900010 Appendix A .

The colour modes include two daylight settings. To select a different setting click on the radio button to the left of the setting. one dusk and two night time settings. click on the Up/Down BRILL buttons on the Control Panel to brighten or darken the colour setting.Brilliance Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Day and Night Modes The Day / Night modes function enables you to select the correct colour setting for optimum display purposes in various lighting conditions. Multi-node Settings On a multi-node system changes to the day/night settings on one node are applied to all other nodes on the system.13-2 65900010 . If no confirmation is given within 10 seconds the system reverts to the previous colour setting. prompting to adjust the monitor's brightness control for optimal setting. and in this case the setting will be applied to the local node only Appendix A . or click the No button to cancel. If the colour setting is changed from Day Bright/Black or Dusk to Night or Night Red the system displays a warning requesting confirmation of the change in setting. When the colour setting is changed the Brightness Check window is activated. Alternatively. dusk or night mode selected. To confirm click the Yes button on the Warning window. The current setting is shown with its radio button highlighted. The commissioning engineer may configure a node not to be affected or capable of making a global day/night setting change. the screen colours change relevant to the day.

constant turn radius. 2.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance Brilliance Groups This feature enables you to independently adjust the brilliance of the following predefined groups: • Chart Symbols • Mariner Objects (Nav Tools) • Alarms / Warnings • Routes • ARPA / AIS data (to extinction) • Tools (includes PI lines. To collectively reset all previously edited groups click the Reset All button at the bottom of the window. rotating cursor.13-3 . 65900010 Appendix A . The bar will return to its previous shaded state and display the new level. The bar colour will appear blue. To reset an individual brilliance group back to the default setting click on the group's Reset button. 4. Position the screen cursor over the control you wish to change. Move the trackball left or right to move the bar to the level required.) • Range Rings • Own Ship (heading line) • EBL / VRM • Control Panel To adjust an individual group or all groups do the following: 1. etc. Left click to set the level and de-activate the bar adjustment. 3. Left click to make control bar active.

which ensures that any adjustments made to the brightness and contrast settings on the VisionMaster monitor will enable the SENC data. safety contour and other objects to be adequately displayed. such as coastlines. While making any necessary brightness adjustments view the visibility of the diagonal line against the background colour. Appendix A . 2. a window appears over the screen with 20 different background colour options and a coloured diagonal line across each background colour. 1. If the line becomes difficult to see the brightness/contrast setting is inadequate for SENC data to be displayed. The Colour Diagram will only be available if the system is configured for Chart Radar and the system is in Standby.Brilliance Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Chart Symbols The Chart Symbols window enables access to a colour diagram.13-4 65900010 . To adjust click on the Color Diagram button.

When a brightness check is performed the operator adjusts the monitor controls while observing the grey box. If the box is clearly visible. increase the brightness setting until it can be just distinguished in the window. The LCD monitors used in the VisionMaster system have a single brightness control. indicating the setting calibrated at system installation. leave the brightness control at the indexed setting. or 4. 2. 3. is marked on the brightness control. Turn the brightness control so that the white index line is at the top position. To perform the brightness check do the following: 1. Turn the brightness control down (anti-clockwise) and observe the grey box in the centre of the window. A white index line.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Brilliance Brightness Check The Brightness Check is a method of accurately setting the monitor's brightness control to an optimal setting. After the brightness check adjustments have been made. the `black level' of the monitor is correctly set.13-5 . 65900010 Appendix A . The brightness check window contains a grey box within a black rectangle. Use the brightness control only if further adjustment is required for visibility. If the box is not visible.

.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Chapter 14 System The System menu provides access to the following system facilities: • User Profiles • Options • Diagnostics • Commissioning • Time Management • Shutdown If selected in configuration. the System menu will also include NAVTEX and Weather Fax. 65900010 14-1 .

and other display settings.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide User Profiles The User Profiles submenu enables you to create. route. Most changes made to a user profile will only affect the profile on that node. Previously created and saved profiles can be selected in the Available Profiles selection drop down list. If you change any of the above values to an applied profile on one node. delete. A profile name must be entered in the Create New Profile field prior to creating a new profile. If no new user profiles have been created the Apply. New profiles can be created either from the currently active display settings or from the default system settings. view and update profiles that contain node specific chart. apply. shared between all nodes within a multi-node system. the exceptions to this rule are changes to the following:  Safety Depth  Deep Contour  Shallow Contour. When a profile is applied. see `View/Edit Profiles’. Appendix A . If no profiles have been created this field is blank. it is generally only applied to that particular node. this edited profile will be applied on all nodes. Delete and View/Edit buttons are greyed out. Multi-Node Functionality The collection of available user profiles is saved and retrieved in a database. For information on changing a User Profile.14-2 65900010 . Saved profiles are maintained by the system and are available after a system restart. save.

The settings list appears with all chart and map features ticked in the Selection folder (see View/Edit Profiles).Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Create New Profile When creating a new user profile. To create the new profile based on the currently selected setting click the From Current Settings. 3. 5. Left click in the Create New Profile field. When a profile name has been entered click the OK button on the keypad. The current settings for the profile selected in the Available Profiles list appear. use the trackball to navigate to the relevant alpha-numeric keys and left click. By default.. Enter a profile name. The screen keypad appears.14-3 . a profile may be created that only contains display settings for routes. all available settings are included in the profile. The keypad is removed and the name entered in the Create New Profile field. or one that only contains settings for charts. To edit the settings refer to View/Edit Profiles. To create a new profile do the following 1. For example. Or: 4. To create the new profile from system default settings click the From Default Settings button. 65900010 Appendix A . button. and also the option of choosing whether or not a given setting is included in your profile. you have the option of selecting values for the various settings. 2.

Select a previously created user profile from the Available Profiles list. select OK to confirm the profile deletion. If successful a temporary prompt appears confirming profile application.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Available Profiles Saved profiles in the Available Profiles list are viewed and edited in the same way as described in View/Edit Profiles. To apply or delete a user profile do the following: 1. To delete a profile click the Delete button. click the Apply button. 3. the system updates the corresponding features with the setting values stored in the profile only on the node where the profile was applied. Appendix A . If successful a temporary prompt appears confirming default settings have been restored. To restore all settings affected by a profile to their default values on an individual node click the Restore Defaults button. To apply a profile. When a profile is to be deleted the system prompts to confirm. When a settings profile is applied. 2.14-4 65900010 .

defines which features of a particular chart engine apply to your profile. with a Profile created and displayed in the Available Profiles field click the View/Edit button. Editing and Selection.ARCS . • Charting . • Charting .enables selection of an alarm on chart cautions to be generated. 65900010 Appendix A .CMAP. VPF . View/Edit Profile . height.14-5 . With a profile setting displayed in the Available Profiles field click the View/Edit button. • Pos/Scale/Orientation Indicators .Editing The Editing tab shows the specific settings contained in the selected profile and enables you to edit these settings.enables selection of a Lat/Lon grid. Two tab folders are available. contour values and IMO display options. Two tab folders are available. The settings are grouped into the following sub-menus: • Chart Dangers . defaults to Load New Best Scale Chart.enables selection of what action the system takes when the currently selected ARCS chart goes off screen.  Selection of look-ahead type (distance or time)  Proximity buffer size.defines depth.  Look-ahead time (in minutes) along ship's COG. Editing and Selection.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System View/Edit Profiles To change a Profile's settings. • Routes .Common . The distance limit in metres used when checking own ship’s path and charted dangers. and adjustment of the following:  Look-ahead distance (in metres) along ship's COG. S-57. • Charting .enables selection of monitored route display settings to be made.

3. Repeat the procedure described above if you require the Proximity Buffer Size to be changed (default 20 metres). click on the drop down arrow and select from the list.ARCS To change the ARCS off-screen chart policy from the default of Load New Best Scale Chart. Click in the required field. 2. Select whether the look-ahead is time based or distance based by clicking the Look-Ahead Type radio button. Charting-Common/C-Map The IMO display option defines the level of chart detail. Where custom selections to a chart are made in User Profiles the Plus option for that set must be selected (together with the Enable Feature Below box ticked in Display Mode) in order to display the chart selections on screen. do the following: Chart Dangers To change the Look-Ahead distance or Look- Ahead time: 1. Charting .System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To edit a user profile. the text becomes green (editable). The selection of ARCS off-screen chart policy only applies if you are running ECDIS on a Total Watch system.14-6 65900010 . The drop down arrow of the display option lists the three charts shown in Display Mode. Move the trackball left to decrease the value or right to increase the value. the default option is Base. Appendix A . with the addition of Plus options for each set. with the required value entered left click to exit edit mode.

Tick the check box of the feature you want to apply to the profile. 5. View/Edit Profile . click the Deselect All button.Selection To change profile selections do the following: To select or deselect profile features: 1. including the selected profile settings. To change the text scaling in Charting click in the Text Scale Factor field and move the trackball left or right to decrease or increase the scaling. To cancel any profile setting changes click on the Cancel button. Click on the Selection tab.14-7 . The settings are saved and the menu returns with the edited profile highlighted in the Available Profiles list. i. 2. To select custom charting and route plan features in the Editing tab folder: 1. When custom settings have been made click on the Save button. 4. if the chart is Standard select Standard Plus. 3. 2. 3. as the cursor is moved over the features a brief description of the feature is displayed at the bottom of the Editing tab folder. To select individual profile features open the navigation tree by ticking the feature sub menu check box and tick the check boxes of the individual features. Click the Save button to confirm selection changes.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Charting and Routes Features The Charting and Route Plan features displayed in the Editing tab folder are dependent on the selections made in the Selections tab folder. To select all the features in the list click the Select All button. or to deselect all the features. The maximum text scale factor is 3. 65900010 Appendix A .e. or click the Cancel button to return to the previous screen. Select the IMO display option from the drop down arrow.0.

g. then the Options window displays the units as read-only information.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Options The Options window displays a selection of common units which are displayed when the system is running. (e. Appendix A . degrees etc.) If the selection of units has not been enabled for the operator at commissioning (which is the default mode). metres. knots.14-8 65900010 .

• Version .displays pulse data. 65900010 Appendix A . • Connection Status .displays the state of the data from the currently selected data source.14-9 . Commissioning and Service Mode' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual. The following diagnostic functions contain read-only information for the non-logged on user.displays version information of all operational system software. • Report . When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the following additional diagnostic features are available: • S/W .displays configuration data on the currently selected transceiver.enables individual datalog files to be viewed and a datalog zip file to be generated and exported to an external device. • Database – this tab appears on multi-node systems only and enables synchronization to the node designated as the master. For a description of these functions refer to Chapter 2 `Diagnostics.enables the Alarm buzzer to be tested.can be enabled to monitor the performance of the system (default mode). • Buzzer .enables reports to be generated and exported to an external device. or monitor the receiver. • Time .displays version information on system components. as shown on the Sensor Data Display. including charting data.displays test results from the transceiver BITE (when connected to a BridgeMaster (BM) E or BM II transceiver). • Tx/Rx Config . antenna RPM and heading marker data on the currently selected transceiver. • DataLog .displays transmission time and total persisted runtime data.displays the connection status of all nodes on a multi-node system. • Sensor Status . • Tx/Rx BITE . • Tx/Rx Data .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Diagnostic Functions Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu includes the following which have functionality for a non- logged on user: • PM (Performance Monitor) .

selected from the Radar menu. When the PM is operational and the monitoring mode tuning level is being adjusted.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Performance Monitor The Performance Monitor folder displays the current operational Transceiver (Tx/Rx). with respect to the heading line. To turn on the performance monitor (PM) tick the check box next to On. Before using the Performance Monitor (PM) select the following operating parameters: • Master Display (Interswitch systems) • Transmit mode • Range scale of 12 NM • Long Pulse (LP) transmission pulse rate • Manual clutter selection with A/C Rain and A/C Sea set to minimum • Radar tuning mode to AFC on • Gain setting at optimum level (if the setting is too low or too high the four tuning arcs may not be visible). Performance Monitor Operation A non-logged on user can operate the PM and adjust the monitor mode (Receiver or System) tune levels to determine if there has been a drop in performance. If sector blanking is active the system displays a warning prompt informing the operator that sector blanking is inhibited while the PM is switched on. The arcs extend from 290° to 320° (S Band) or from 155° to 185° (X Band). four arcs are shown on the video circle. These arcs are approximately 0. Appendix A . In a multi-node system the PM monitor tuning settings are distributed and used by other nodes on the system. see the figure below. In Operator mode the PM switches off automatically after 10 seconds.14-10 65900010 . see Interswitch Control. The precise bearing value will alter depending on the Heading line offset value.3NM apart and start at a range scale of 8 NM.

2. The arcs are spaced at 5dB intervals. Left click in the Tune bar to activate the control and move the trackball to the left to set the tune bar to minimum. it shows a 10dB drop in performance. Select System monitoring mode and repeat steps 1 to 3. The current tuning level is shown as a green bar. do the following: 1. The number of arcs displayed shows the current performance. 3.14-11 . While adjustment is in progress the tuning bar colour changes to blue. Select Receiver monitoring mode by clicking the Receiver radio button. Slowly move the trackball to the right to display maximum presentation of the four PM arcs that should be visible in the following video sectors: 290° to 320° for S -band and 155° to 185° for X-band. 65900010 Appendix A . 4. If during operation performance decreases below the second arc.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System To adjust the Performance Monitor.

• Diagnostic Log Files . however more detail is included. Appendix A . • Verbose . To export these files refer to the instructions below. over a 24 hour period. There are four types of export options available for reports: • Concise . You can quickly access the Reports folder by right clicking on the iHelp button on the lower popup toolbar. Right clicking on the iHelp button also captures a screenshot of the current display. • Complete . this option should only be selected when the fault can best be described by a series of images. • 1 Minute Movie .exe file which is created with the report.this default option contains the same information as the concise report. which is used to form part of the export option.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Report The Report folder enables you to export a system fault report to an external device such as a USB memory stick. with the addition of log files.this option will generate a smaller report than verbose. the movie is then run from an . see below. a screenshot of the display is also made when the Export button is clicked.14-12 65900010 . If the Report folder is not accessed via iHelp.this option enables you to select one or more diagnostic log files.this option contains all verbose information.this option creates 120 screenshot files. making the report file larger. As the 1 Minute Movie option creates a file that will be larger than 10Mb. taken every half second which comprise the 1 minute movie. making it easier to transfer over slow internet connections.

rpt to distinguish it as a report file. 5. If required. The name would typically be related to the fault. Insert an external device into the PC and select the Report tab folder.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System All fault report options are generated as single compressed file. Report(2008-09-23). ‘track fault’ or ‘video error 3’. using the on-screen keypad. or on a separate PC. enter a name for the report. 6..zip on the service desktop.e. with the file extension . 4. 65900010 Appendix A . When complete click the Eject button before removing the external device. enter a description of the report in the Description field. If successful a temporary prompt will appear confirming the export. Select the report type from the three options listed above. The external drive will be listed in the first navigation window. 7. In order to access the files within the report the file extension should be changed to . 3.. The system automatically generates a default filename for the report.rpt files. 2.14-13 . To change the file name from the default of Report (date) click in the Filename field and. If any previous report files are on the device they will be listed in the window below the device navigation tree as . To export a fault report do the following: 1. Click on the Export button to generate the report. this will typically be E:\. i. While the export is in progress the Export button changes to display Wait. based on the current date e.g.

4. Either select individual files by ticking their check boxes. Follow steps 1 to 3 in the previous procedure. 2. When the report is successfully exported a temporary prompt will appear confirming the export.. 5.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To export diagnostic log files do the following: 1. An Action Required window appears listing all the available diagnostic log files. 3. Select the Diagnostic Log Files radio button. While the export is in progress the Export button changes to display Wait. or select all files by clicking the Select All button.14-14 65900010 . Click on the Export button. 6. Click the OK button. and is disabled. Appendix A .. If required. enter a description of the log files in the Description field.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System DataLog The system automatically logs all voyage data to a single relational database management system (RDBMS) located on the ship’s network.14-15 . The following voyage data is logged to the database at a periodic default rate of 5 seconds:  Sensor Information  Own Ship Information  Target Information  Chart Information  Node State The following voyage data is logged to the database on an event-driven basis:  Routes Information  Announcements Information A copy of the configuration file is logged to the database on Node start up. 65900010 Appendix A . On subsequent startups a copy of the configuration file is logged only if the file has changed.

The Data Log Viewer window appears on the video circle (in Standby mode only). listed as tabs:  Announcement (alarms or warnings generated)  CCRS  Chart (with the VMFT system name in brackets)  Position Sensor  LOP fix  Man overboard  Man Overboard User Modified Data  Prompt (list of prompts relevant to the named VMFT system)  VisionMaster Track Control (if enabled). Appendix A . To view datalog files do the following: 1. 3.14-16 65900010 . click on the tab.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide View DataLog Individual log files can be selected from a list and their contents viewed in table format via the Data Log Viewer. To view data on a specific log file click on the Log File arrow and select from the drop down list of xml files. 2. Click on the View Data Log button. The data displayed will include a timestamp and other information relevant to the datalog type selected. The Data Log Viewer window may include the following datalog types. To view log data on a specific type.

65900010 Appendix A . 2. 6... To export a datalog file do the following: 1.. button returns to display Export and the zip file name appears in the window above the buttons. The time period that the export will cover defaults to 3 months back from the current date. If successful a temporary prompt will appear confirming the export. 3.. 4. Click the Eject button before removing the external device. Select the log type to be exported.zip files. such as a memory stick or 3½ inch floppy disk. If any previous datalog or report files are on the device they will be listed in the field below the device navigation tree as . 7. This process may take a long time if all logs are being exported over an extensive period. or All Logs. while the export is in progress the Export button changes to display Wait.14-17 . Click the Export button. The system exports the datalog as a zip file. which includes all available voyage data. this may be specific voyage data as listed above. Enter a name for the datalog file in the Filename field. When the process is complete the Wait. Navigate to the external device sub directory where the datalog is to be exported to. 5.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Export DataLog A copy of the datalog file can be exported to an external device. Insert an external device into the PC and click on the DataLog tab folder. To change the date and time period select the date/time values in the From and To fields and click on the up/down arrows to move the date/time forward or back.

Sensor Data States The data state for each sensor is shown as a table in the Sensor Status tab folder. used to receive the sensor data  Type of data received by the sensor (e. If the data is good the Data State column is shown as a green bar adjacent to the sensor. For example. one Interface may be used to receive COG. i. SOG. Depth and Wind sensor data. Nearly Available. e. DBT (Depth)  Interfaces. then these sensors will also be shown in the table. The data state is restored to green when the sensor data becomes valid. in addition to a data type. Heading data from a Gyro)  Current status of the sensor data. Dead- Reckoned or Unavailable.14-18 65900010 . If a multi-sensor interface is used to receive data from other sensors.e. If the data associated with one or more sensors becomes `not recently sampled' (a degraded state resulting in the Cursor and/or Position displays showing this data in amber) the Data State bar also displays as amber after approximately 15 seconds. Good.g. Appendix A . including port ID.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Sensor Status The system determines the status for received sensor data for each of the four data types (HDG. A separate window displays the following sensor status details:  Sensor abbreviation and its description. If the data associated with the sensor becomes not available (an unusable state resulting in the displays showing this data in red) the Data State bar also displays as red after approximately 50 seconds. COG and SOG) in the Sensor Data Display. STW. View Sensor Status Details To view details on the sensor status click the Details button at the bottom of the window.g.

if Connection Status is accessed from om a node that is switched off or disconnected the table will w show the other nodes with red status. 65900010 Appe pendix A . CAUTION: The table shows the node connection status fro from the point of view of the node accessed. the Status bar adjacent to the node is displayed in red. The bottom of the window includes an Acknowledge All Faul ults button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Each Sensor includes an Acknowledge button (Ack). F For example.14-19 . If a node is switched off. which en enables faults relevant to that sensor to be acknowledged. Click this button to acknowledge all outstanding sensor faults ts on o the system. even though th these nodes may well have a valid connection. If a node is connected to the network the Status column is shown as a green bar adjacent to the node. and therefoefore may not be a true indication of the current status. The connection state for all nodes on the system is shown as a table in the Connection Status tab folder. or disconnected from the network. When the node is switched on or reconnected its status bar changes ch to green. Connection Status The Connection Status folder determines the connection of each ea node on a multi-node system..

This button only appears on nodes configured for Safe Mode. Appendix A . The Safe Mode Activated alarm is removed from the list of Alarms. The operator may also manually enter Safe Mode by clicking on the Enter Safe Mode button at the bottom of the Connection Status tab.14-20 65900010 . a permanent Alarm `Safe Mode Activated’ is generated and the button at the bottom of the tab changes to Leave Safe Mode. the node will automatically disconnect from the network and operate as a standalone node if it detects conditions on the network that prevent it from operating reliably.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Safe Mode If your node has been configured to operate in Safe Mode. To restore normal network communications click on the button. When Safe Mode is entered the node will disconnect from the network and run as standalone.

65900010 Appendix A . or you are getting inconsistencies across nodes.Operational Functions in a Multi-node System) are not allowed during the initialization progress.7 `Announcements' in Chapter 1 `Configuration' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual. The tab displays the identity of the master node. If there are any problems with the alarm buzzer refer to section 7. The alarm buzzer should sound. then nodes should be synchronised to the master. To test click on the Test Buzzer button.14-21 . This function should only be used providing the disconnected node was NOT the master node. Database In a multi-node system. to synchronize to this node click the Synchronize to Master button.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Buzzer The Buzzer folder enables the user to test the operation of the buzzer. If a node has been switched off or disconnected from the system. (the buzzer is located in the Console Monitor). one node is designated as the master node. During synchronization a Database Initializing warning is displayed informing the operator that updates to various functions listed in Database Synchronization (see Appendix A .

Appendix A .System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Dual Radar – Diagnostic Functions On dual radar the following diagnostic functions contain read-only data for each channel: • PM (Performance Monitor) • TxRx Config • TxRx Data • TxRx BITE To view the data for each channel click on either Channel 1 or Channel 2 tab buttons. In PM (Performance Monitor) the monitoring mode (Receiver or System) tune levels may be separately adjusted for each transceiver channel.14-22 65900010 .

including CCRS.displays a group of settings for all the transceivers which the display can operate.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Commissioning The Commissioning menu includes the following functions: • Login .g.displays the video enablement settings and read only data transmitted by the transceiver.enables a suitably qualified user to access locked system processes by entering a user name and password.enables a logged on user to create a group of members (e.displays persistent static data relating to own ship that has been entered in system configuration.displays authorization information and product type for the node. ship admin or seaman).14-23 . • Video . • Login • TxRx • Video • Security • Service (additional diagnostics) 65900010 Appendix A . Commissioning & Service Mode' in Volume 2 of the VisionMaster FT Ship's Manual. • Authorization . field engineer. For a description of the following Commissioning functions refer to Chapter 2 `Diagnostics. • Tx/Rx . • Additional Service diagnostic information. Sensors and Time Management. • Characteristics .displays Communications and PCIO service information on the system. When a user has logged in by entering a user name and password the following additional commissioning features are available: • Security . • Service .

a security string is placed on all nodes in the system. If the authorization state is valid the following message is displayed at the top of the tab folder: The system is fully authorized. Once a feature is purchased. The authorization folder displays a five digit system PIN. • the list of features that have been purchased. For a multi-node system. Any features purchased from the system provider are shown in the Purchased Features field. The PIN is contained on the Sperry Security Block. which is provided and installed when the system is commissioned. Appendix A .g. it will be available on all nodes which are of a compatible product type. which is encrypted when the system is initially commissioned. Total Watch or Chart Radar). The Sperry Security Block also contains the product type identifier for the node.14-24 65900010 . in addition to the security block. This is shown in the Product Type of This Node field. (e. 2 Radars and 1 ECDIS). The security string contains an encryption of the following: • the System PIN • the product types in the system and number of nodes for each product type (e.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Authorization The Authorization tab folder displays the current authorization status of the display.g.

• run normally on that node until 7 days (calendar time) have passed since the authorization initially failed. When the system is in a degraded state.14-25 . In this mode there is no target tracking or chart data available. When a password has been entered and its expiry date has not yet been reached. the node reverts to an unauthorized state. indicating when the password will expire. The system verifies the password and. and this is not remedied by entry of a password the system will do the following: • produce a warning every 15 minutes. repeated once per day. the system will run as fully authorized. Enter the password in the Temporary Authorisation Password field and click the Submit button. if correct. If a security block authorization fails on any node. • operate in a state of degraded functionality after the 7-day period expires. the node is temporarily authorized and a PIN is displayed. A temporary password can be supplied by your VisionMaster supplier on request. the display becomes unstabilised (Head Up mode).Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Unauthorized System If the system is not authorized the tab folder states that the system is unauthorized and will revert to a degraded state of functionality. counting down from 7 days after the authorization initially failed. 65900010 Appendix A . When the node is running on a temporary password. a warning is given. The password will contain: • System PIN • Product type identifier • Expiration date (typically 30 days from the time it is requested). After the password expiry date has been reached.

these will be selectable from the Loading State drop down list. • The radar remains in transmit without adverse effects. Appendix A . The read only data includes own ship length. maximum speed in knots and maximum rate of turn in degrees per minute.14-26 65900010 . If an alternate bow in use has been configured and an alternative bow in use menu selected in the system configuration the Alternate Bow in Use check box is enabled. beam. for example. • The heading marker offset for all top units is automatically adjusted by 180°. When the alternate bow is in use the following changes take place: • The system uses the alternate bow position as the reference point for all data relative to ownship.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Characteristics The Characteristics tab folder displays persistent static data relating to own ship that has been entered in the system configuration. excluding re- building trails and re-acquiring targets. This includes. design speed. height and maximum draft in metres. If more than one ship loading state has been configured. the cursor readout and all position readouts.

highlight Port Monitor in the tree menu and click on the Display Selected button at the bottom of the tab folder. 2. • Port Logging . Available for display to a non-logged on user. To change these default options click in the Combined button to view all data in the same field and click in the Binary button to view data as binary code. A Port Monitor communications window is displayed which can be moved and scaled to suit. 4. Logged data can then be saved to an external device. The Port Monitor window lists the ports previously configured for the system.enables data sent and received from a specified port to be captured and timestamped. 65900010 Appendix A . To view Port Monitor data click on the Communications + button. With all required settings made click on the Start button. 3. Port Monitor 1. The Port Monitor window view options default to separate Received and Sent data fields and data viewed as ASCII.view data received from a selected port and data sent from the display to the port.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Service The Service tab folder displays the following navigation tree items: • Communications  Port Monitor  Port Logging • PCIO  PCIO diagnostic form The Communications sub menu enables the following data to be viewed: • Port Monitor .14-27 . Available for display to a non- logged on user. The Port Monitor window displays real time received and sent data for the selected port and the Start button changes to Stop. To select a port to monitor other than the currently displayed port click on the Port drop down arrow and select from the list of configured ports.

Port Logging The Port Logging window lists all the currently configured ports on the system and provides the option to capture data for the specified port. Appendix A . 3. 1. highlight Port Logging in the tree menu and click on the Display Selected button at the bottom of the tab folder.14-28 65900010 . The options are data sent from the port to the display. 2. to change the data to Binary click on the radio button. To access Port Logging click on the Communications + button. The data defaults to ASCII. Click the radio button as appropriate for the data used on that port. To halt the port monitor process click on the Stop button. Logged data may be saved to an external device (memory stick) via the Report tab folder in the Diagnostics menu. The port monitor stops its updating based on data being sent or received. 4. A timestamp is prepended to each data message.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 5. To clear the data from the Port Monitor window click on the Clear button. The Port Logging window is displayed which can be moved and scaled to suit. data received from the display to the port and combined data (interweaved in both directions).

TSCD and TCSE (Serial Ports 1. The form is a table with each line representing the PCIO serial inputs listed above. The PCIO Diagnostic Form is available for display to a non-logged on user. The system will log the number and source of invalid messages from the PCIO. which will occur as and when a message is received. click on the PCIO + button. 2 and 3) on the PCIO. 1. which is included in a fault report. Any PCIO data errors are listed in a log file.14-29 . Click on the Log Errors button. To access.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System PCIO Diagnostic Form The PCIO diagnostics form records the error rate on received data from serial input ports TSCA. If any data errors are received on these PCIO serial inputs the number of error messages over a selected time period appears against the serial input line. 65900010 Appendix A . A Serial Input Error Level Diagnostic Form is displayed. when error testing the button appears with a red background. highlight PCIO diagnostic form in the tree menu and click on the Display Selected button at the bottom of the tab folder. 2.

Dual Radar – Commissioning Functions On dual radar the following commissioning functions contain read-only data for each channel: • TxRx The Video tab folder includes separate enablement settings and read-only data for SC Board 1 and SC Board 2. Appendix A . 4.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide 3.14-30 65900010 . The number of errors received in the default time of one second will appear on the serial input line. Error logging is stopped and the button returns to the system colour. To change the time period over which the errors are received. To quit error logging click on the Log Errors button again. click on the drop down arrow and select from either 10 seconds or 60 seconds.

The Select Source button enables selection of other time sources. Local Offset To set a local time offset do the following 1.The window also displays the sensor (e.14-31 . The time current time selected (UTC or Local) is displayed in the Position tab at the lower right of the screen. (local time represents time offset applied.enables the selection of UTC or local time. if configured. Select the direction of the local time offset by clicking on the East or West radio buttons. left click again to exit the edit mode. • Time Sync Source . Enter the required time offset by clicking in the Hours and Minutes fields and moving the trackball to the right. With the correct offset displayed click the Apply button. if no time offset has been applied then both UTC and local time will be the same).enables the input of a local time offset from GMT in either an East direction (offset before GMT) or a West direction (offset after GMT). • Local Offset .shows the selected time sensor used by the system to synchronize the date and time of all nodes. 2.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Time Management The Time Management facility enables the operator to select local date and time and set a time zone offset from GMT .g. The Time Management window is divided into three areas: • System Time . GPS) used as the time source. valid data is shown in green. 65900010 Appendix A . 3. The Local time is adjusted to the time offset applied and the Position tab shows the local offset time.

When the window is closed.System Radar/Chart Radar User Guide NAVTEX NAVTEX transmitting stations are used to routinely broadcast urgent coastal marine safety information to ships with a NAVTEX receiver. Appendix A . NAVTEX is only available in Standby mode. NAVTEX messages are also displayed as warnings on the Central Alarm Management (CAM) watch mode. To clear the Client window while keeping the Client application running. the application is no longer running and a temporary prompt is displayed confirming that the NAVTEX Client has closed. The PCNAVTEX application may be installed only on specific designated nodes. To close the Client window. In addition to viewing NAVTEX messages from the Client window. VisionMaster is able to access this information from the receiver by using PC NAVTEX. either minimise the window. or click anywhere on the VisionMaster screen. The PCNAVTEX Client window appears on the chart display. either click on the X button at the top of the window. PCNAVTEX is a Client/Server application running externally to the VisionMaster application. If the application is not installed on your node the sub menu will not be available in the System menu. or click the Terminate NAVTEX Client button.14-32 65900010 . NAVTEX Client To access NAVTEX information. select NAVTEX in the System menu and from the NAVTEX window click the Start NAVTEX Client button. via a serial connection on the client node.

• Settings .serial port number and Navtex device. 65900010 Appe pendix A . The NAVTEX Server window appears ap on the video circle.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System NAVTEX Server The NAVTEX Server communicates with the NAVTEX receive iver through a serial connection and stores the messages in a database on th the Server node. Start/Stop buttons contr ntrol the simulator. IP address and d Port P number. the Serverr a application starts automatically.location of database. Exiting the Server will resul ult in no NAVTEX messages being received by the Clien ient. The NAVTEX Server window enables the following communica ication settings to be changed: • Serial Port . To view and edit a NAVTEX server settings on a server node e click c the Show NAVTEX Server button. To keep the Server open minimize the Server window.maximum character message length and mes essage time out (in seconds) • Server Settings .14-33 . CAUTION: Do NOT close the NAVTEX Server window whil hile the Client is still open. If the Client is launched on the server node. The NAVTEX Server window includes a message simulator that th generates test messages to a NAVTEX monitor.

2. If the application is not installed on your node the e sub menu will not be available in the System menu. 1.14-34 65900010 . Weather Fax is only available in Standby mode. select Weather Fax in the System menu and click the Display Weather Fax button. Appendix A . Set the Day/Night Mode to a suitable setting and click the OK button. The window may be adjusted in size and moved around the active area of the screen. To access the Weather Fax web page. The FAX30 web page is opened as a separate window on the display. see Da ay and Night Modes in Chapter 15 `Brilliance’.System Radar/Chart Radar ar User Guide Weather Fax The Furuno Weather Fax (FAX30) is a device that receives weath ather images and navigational information from a built in radio receiver er and displays the information on a web page using an internet browserer installed on the VisionMaster PC. CAUTION: It is advisable to only use the Weather fax feature re when the Brilliance setting is set to a Day mode. The FAX30 device may be installed only on specific desig signated nodes. An Action Required window appears warning the user that the Weather Fax feature may not be suitable for night viewing as the web page will not be adjusted to the current brightness and color palette settings.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide System Shutdown The Shutdown facility enables the operator to shut down or restart a single node. Enter the same password as described above. To proceed enter CONFIRM (not case dependent) and click the OK button. Other nodes on the system will not be affected. or all nodes on the system. For information on fully shutting down the system. Restart System is selected if for whatever reason the operator requires to restart their particular node on the system. Shutdown All Systems is selected if for whatever reason the operator requires to shut down all the nodes on the system for a prolonged period of time. They will only be available if the current operator is logged on as a Service Engineer. In Operator mode. 65900010 Appendix A . When Restart All Systems is selected an Action Required message appears prompting to enter CONFIRM in the box below. Shutdown System is only selected when the operator requires to shut down their particular node on the system for a prolonged period of time. The node will first power down and then restart. Other nodes on the system will not be affected. All nodes on the system will first power down and then restart.14-35 . the Service Mode and Service Mode All buttons will be greyed out. see System Shutdown. When Shutdown All Systems is selected the Action Required message appears. Restart All Systems is selected if for whatever reason the operator requires to restart all the nodes on the system.

.

They will appe ppear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.6 NM.4 µsec) through the band before beginning a relative ively slow sweep (7. the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweepseps will produce a response on the radar display.5 µsec) through the band back to the starting frequen uency. When interrogated.64 0. Att some s point in the sweep. Each ch radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetetitively across the complete radar frequency band. If the SART RT is within range. sw These additional dot responses. thus a line of 12 dots equally lly spaced by about 0. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. the radar ra display may also show the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. 65900010 A-1 . Introduction A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered d by any X- Band (3cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 NM. it will NOT be seen on an n S-Band S (10cm) radar. which are also equally spaced by 0. When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 NM. it first irst sweeps rapidly (0.64 NM will be shown. the SART frequency will match that of the interrogagating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex A Search and Re Rescue Detection Annex A Search and Rescue Detection WARNING: A Search and Rescue detection will only respo pond to an X-Band (3cm) radar.

it is preferable to use either the 6 or 12 NM range scale. When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also.64 NM beyond the true position of the SART. SART Range Errors When responses from only 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART is at a range greater than about 1 NM). A-2 65900010 . Radar Bandwidth This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated pulse length. the first of these dots will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.5nm beyond the position of the SART and it is necessary to see a number of response dots to distinguish the SART from other responses. This is because the total displayed length of the SART response of 12 (or 24) dots may extend approximately 9. the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as much as 0.Annex A Search and Rescue Detection Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Radar Range Scale When looking for a SART. see Range Scales. Narrow bandwidth of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.

it is advisable to use manual control initially until the SART has been be detected. Video Gain For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for fo long range detection should be used. side lobes from the radar antenna nna may show the SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. i. In this case. The tuning shou ould be returned to normal operation as soon as possib sible. see Video Processing Controls. Radar Side Lobes As the SART is approached. with a light background noise speckle sp visible. Detuning the Radar To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter conditions.5 NM from the furthest dot back towards own ship. Anti-Clutter Sea Control For optimum range SART detection this control should be set et to the minimum. Because of the way in which the automatic sea control function tions. R Radar Fine Tuning. Care should be exercised as wanted targets in sea a clutter may be obscured. the radar may be manually detuned to reduce the clutter without reducing the SART response.e. CAUTION: Care should be taken in operating the radar in a detuned condition as other wanted navigational and ant nti-collision information may be removed.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex A Search and Re Rescue Detection A radar bandwidth of less than 5MHz will attenuate the SART T signal slightly. see Radar Transmission Pulse Length th. the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring m 9. so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensur sure optimum detection of the SART. Note that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response re may not be detectable. For information on manual tuning adjustment see Radar. TheseT can be removed by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although itt may m be operationally useful to observe the side lobes as they may be e easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the S SART is near to own ship. irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter er sea control. 65900010 A-3 .

Because of the way in which the automatic rain control functions. is not affected by the action of the anti-clutter rain circuitry. Racon responses. will be affected by the use of this control. Anti-clutter Rain Control This should be used normally (i. which are often in the form of a long flash. For information on manually adjusting rain anti-clutter control see Video Processing Controls. The effect of the auto rain control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control.e. it is advisable to use manual control initially until the SART has been detected. For information on manually adjusting sea anti-clutter control see Video Processing Controls. to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a SART response which. being a series of dots.Annex A Search and Rescue Detection Radar/Chart Radar User Guide The effect of the auto sea control on the SART response can then be compared with manual control. A-4 65900010 .

how to enter a position value manually. or automatically update to a GPS position. When configured. • Static Heading .enables an anchor watch to be assigned to a target. a Static Site system will apply to all nodes in a multi- node system. This is intended for small single node installations (for example. Any alarms that are generated for non-static site systems will not apply to Static Site systems. an oil rig) and larger multi-node. • Static Position .Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site Annex B Static Site Static Site Description Static Site is an optional facility that allows for a stationary installation. land based Vessel Traffic Services (VTS) installations.how to manually enter a static heading bearing. • Target Anchor Watch .includes a table of features specific to Static Sites and a table of features not available to Static Sites. • Target Based Range and Bearing . A Static Site may operate without a live compass or position input. The following topics are covered in this Appendix: • Static Site Features .enables a displayed target's position to be taken as the EBL/VRM position. 65900010 B-1 .

The only sensor data type available is Static Sensor Data Display Heading. Trial Manoeuvre tab unavailable in the Status Trial Manoeuvre area. but not available to a Static Site facility.0. Features not available to a Static Site The following table lists the features which are available in a standard radar/chart radar installation. Feature Additional details Verifies that vessels at anchor are not drifting by Target Anchor Watch assigning an anchor watch to a target. Speed/course and set and drift values unavailable. The following navigation tools are unavailable: • Lines Of Position Navigation Tools • History Tracks • Anchoring • Man Overboard B-2 65900010 . No unstabilised presentation mode. Feature Additional details Motion Mode Motion mode is always RM True Trails The stabilisation mode is fixed at Ground Stabilisation Mode Stabilised. North Up.Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Static Site Features Features specific to a Static Site The following table lists features specific to a Static Site facility. Target Based Range and A displayed target's position is taken as the Bearing EBL/VRM origin. Route menu and route tab unavailable in the Routes Status area. which defaults to 000. Ownship synthetics data and Next Turn EBL data Display Settings unavailable in Display Settings. or Presentation Mode a user defined Course Up presentation mode are available.

0. the static heading value defaults to 000. The manually entered heading is saved in system memory and will persist when the system is re-started. Own Ship AIS Own ship AIS data unavailable Playback Playback watch mode CID Conning Info Display watch mode Joystick Joystick Heading Control Static Heading On start up. The Heading Sensor Source window appears. in the VisionMaster Ships Manual. the current value shows as green (editable). To obtain correct orientation of a static site picture in North Up the true bearing at which the heading line is pointing needs to be entered. Right click on the HDG Sensor Data Display in the top left of the screen and tick Select HDG Source. For details see Chapter 2 `Diagnostics. Vol 2 To enter a heading bearing: 1. Target Limits and Settings Bow Crossing limits and settings unavailable. Target Autodrop or Echo Reference selection Target Display Functions unavailable.3 `Tx/Rx Settings’. the heading value is always displayed as green (valid). Any heading marker offset for a transceiver will also affect this setting and will consequently also need adjusting. As a Static Site may operate without compass input. Commissioning and Service Mode’ section 3. Move the trackball left or right to change the value. Click in the Static field.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site Own ship dead reckoning and position offset Position Data unavailable. Left click again to exit edit mode. 65900010 B-3 . 2.

the position value is always displayed as green (valid). The manually entered position is saved in system memory and will persist when the system is re-started. the static position LAT/LON values default to 00º North and 000º East. To manually enter LAT/LON values click in the Static fields. A position value may be entered manually. The text becomes editable (green) and the numeric keypad appears. 3. To update the static site position to the values defined by a GPS sensor click the Update to GPS button. 2. The values appear in the Static LAT/LON fields and the keypad is removed. Enter the required LAT/LON position from the keypad and click the keypad OK key. To enter a position bearing: 1. As a Static Site may operate without position input. if available. B-4 65900010 . 4.Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Static Position At start up. or automatically connect to a GPS sensor. The GPS LAT/LON values are entered. Navigate to the Position Sensor Data Display in the Sensors menu The Position folder appears. to obtain an initial position.

05 to 1. this folder shows additional Target Anchor Watch data at the bottom of the window. From the semi- transparent context window click Select Anchor Watch. the AIS target is made active. 65900010 B-5 . the symbol and lines stop flashing but continue to be shown in red. hold down the left key and move the trackball left to decrease the circle size. If a sleeping AIS target is selected. To change the radius for each target independently: 1. 2. Right click on the target to be selected for anchor watch.20 NM. the watch circle. To change the radius left click in the Circle Radius field. An anchor watch circle is drawn. and a small anchor symbol next to the target's symbol. The range is from 0. When Anchor Watch is enabled. Select the target and navigate to the Target Data folder of the Selected Target sub menu. An anchor watch comprises a dotted line circle centred on the target's anchor position. To create a target anchor watch. do the following: 1. Any targets may be selected for anchor watch. When the Target Drift alarm has been acknowledged. The anchor watch circle radius defaults to 0.0 NM. centred on the target's position. If a target exits its anchor watch area. anchor symbol and target bearing line change to a flashing red colour and a Target Drift alarm is raised. or right to increase.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Annex B – Static Site Target Anchor Watch Target anchor watch enables the operator to verify that vessels at anchor are not drifting by assigning an anchor watch to a target.

refer to Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) and Variable Range Marker (VRM) in Chapter 9. The target's position is then taken as the ERBL origin. Click the Remove All Selections button at the bottom of the folder to remove all anchor watch selections from the Multiple Targets list and chart display. navigate to Multiple Targets and select the Anchor tab. The values of the ERBL may be re-adjusted at the EBL/VRM readout. 2. For details. left click to select the values. The ERBL origin continues to update with the target position. An ERBL is created with its origin at the centre of the target. Right click on the required target. the ERBL reverts back to normally offset and is dropped at the last target position. both while the range & bearing adjustment is taking place and also after the range & bearing values have been selected. Target Based Range and Bearing An ERBL may be dropped on a selected target. Any Target Drift alarms associated with a target are cleared when the anchor watch selection is removed. The range & bearing values of the ERBL remain constant after they are selected. If the selected target is dropped or cancelled. the radius of the watch circle and the target drift in percentage terms. this may be a tracked target or an activated AIS target. To drop an ERBL on a target: 1. Targets showing >100% drift in orange are outside the anchor watch area. To adjust the range and bearing of the ERBL move the trackball. The anchor folder lists the ID number of all targets with an anchor watch. B-6 65900010 . and select Adjust EBL/VRM1 from the context menu. To remove all anchor watch selections.Annex B – Static Site Radar/Chart Radar User Guide To remove an individual anchor watch on a target right click on the target symbol and select Remove Anchor Watch from the semi-transparent context window.

ADP: Admiralty Digital Publications AFC: Automatic Frequency Control (fine tuning) AIS: Automatic Identification System. Antenna: Slotted waveguide array for transmitting and receiving microwave signals. AZ: Acquisition Zone Azimuth (AZ): The number of degrees from North (or other reference direction) that a line runs. sleet etc. in the HCRF data format. ARCS: Admiralty Raster Chart Service. 6 or 8 ft aperture). BCR: Bow Crossing Range 65900010 Glossary-1 . and ROT or direction of turn indication (if available) to display actually initiated course changes. measured clockwise. (see Clutter). Anti-clutter: Removal of unwanted reflections on the radar screen caused by rain. A system capability which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary Glossary A Activated Target: A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented information including: a vector (speed and course over ground). 10cm S-band (9 or 12ft aperture) or 3cm X- band (4. ATON: Aid To Navigation (AIS nav symbol). suppliers of electronic charts with world coverage. B BA: British Admiralty. the heading. A service of British Admiralty. Backup Navigator Alarm: The Backup Navigator Alarm is affected by activating a commissioned PCIO relay output by way of an active alarm. using an automated transponder.

relative speed. C UP: Course-up CCRP: The Consistent Common Reference Point is a location on own ship. CID: Conning Information Display watch mode CMAP: CMap Cartographic Service. the ENC chart database uses the S-57 format). closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA) are referenced.g. Bulkhead Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver mounted below decks with microwave or co-axial connection to the Turning Unit. Checksum: A numeric value used to verify the integrity of a block of data. bearing. Chart Database: Structured collection of chart data sufficient for safe and efficient navigation on an ECDIS or Chart Radar system. which are not fully compliant with ECDIS standards as defined by IMO. CMAP dongle: Used to represent a license for CMAP charts and the CMAP chart engine. Typically the CCRP is the conning position of the ship’s bridge. CD ROM: Compact Disk Read-Only Memory. relative course. Electronic charts based on the paper charts supplied by NOAA or CHS are available in the data format established by BSB. to which all horizontal measurements such as target range. Commercial supplier of vector-format navigational charts. A supplier of raster-format electronic charts. When data is transmitted from point to point in a packet. used for real-time streaming video to be displayed. Chart Format: The industry standard the defines the structure of a chart database (e.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide BCT: Bow Crossing Time BIST: Built-In Self-Test BITE: Built in Test Equipment BSB: BSB Electronic Charts. the sending computer counts the bytes and adds a check digit at the Glossary-2 65900010 . C CAM: Central Alarm Management watch mode CCTV: Closed Circuit TV.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary end of the packet. these charts can be used for operating in areas for which electronic charts from official or commercial sources are not available. On ships equipped to make digitized charts. CM93v3: CMAP's proprietary and unofficial chart format. CPA: Closest Point of Approach [to own ship] CRT: Constant Radius Turn CSE: CourSE [through water] D Datum: Any point. or surface used as a reference for a measurement of another quantity. Digitized charts do not conform to any standards for chart display. snow or sleet. A data format for electronic charts that are made using a digitizer device with paper navigational charts. COG: Course Over Ground COLREG: Convention of the International Regulations for the Preventing of Collisions at Sea. commonly from rain. DBK: Depth Below Keel DBT: Depth Below Transponder DBW: Depth Below Waterline DC: Digitized Chart. The receiving computer calculates the bytes received and compares the sender's count with the receiver's count to determine if there is any change that might indicate tampering with the information. line. 65900010 Glossary-3 . Course-up (C UP): Stabilised display – the ship’s bearing is shown at the top of the chart display with the North arrow pointing in the direction of true north. CHS: Canadian Hydrographic Service Clutter: Unwanted reflections on a radar screen. CP: Critical Points on a route.

ECS: Electronic Charting System. Dual Radar: A dual radar system can connect to two scanner units at the same time. quality-assurance and in-service inspection of ships and mobile offshore units with the objective of safeguarding life. DTG: Distance To Go. An EBL control is used to show the relative or true bearing of a target on the display. A standard of the International Maritime Organization (IMO). property and the environment. Display Unit: The Display Monitor. E EBL: Electronic Bearing Line. Each radar video source is known as a `Channel’. such as a turn. The EBL is moved with the cursor. Distance to next action.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide DGPS: Differential GPS (see also GPS). certification. DnV: Det norske Veritas. The DGPS employs an additional receiver for the reception of correction signals from a land-based transmitter to be applied to the satellite- based GPS position information. when plugged into a computer. Position sensor intended for precise commercial navigation in coastal waters. enabling the overlay of radar video from both scanners to form a composite display. Processing Unit and Controls. Glossary-4 65900010 . Independent maritime organization performing classification. DR: Dead Reckoning – A method of estimating the position of a ship without astronomical observations. A chart display system that does not comply fully with the ECDIS standard as defined by IMO. ECDIS: Electronic Chart Display and Information System. enables a specific program to run on that computer. either at the centre of the screen or at a operator-defined point on the display. or operates in a degraded mode if the device is not present. as by applying to a previously determined position the course and distance travelled since. while running a Route Plan. and the bearing is read of the screen in degrees. The program is disabled. One end is always anchored. Dongle: A small hardware device that. governing electronic navigational systems.

Charts complying with this specification are available from various suppliers. GMT: Greenwich Mean Time. There are two general usages of the term in radar: (a) antenna gain (or gain factor) is the ratio of the power transmitted along the beam axis to that of an isotropic radiator transmitting the same total power.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary ENC: Electronic Nautical Chart. A gain of 10 would imply that the signal power had increased by a factor of 10. The international time standard. ERBL: Electronic Range and Bearing Line ETA: Estimated Time of Arrival ETD: Estimated Time of Departure Extended Processor: This is a larger processor which houses two Radar Processors and one Display Processor. F FPD: Flat Panel Display FRTK: Real Time Kinematic Float G Gain: The ratio of the signal output of a system to the signal input of the system expressed in dB. Also called Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). England). 57 (S57). ENC (C-MAP): Official S-57 encrypted charts converted to CMAP's proprietary chart database format. based on local standard time at longitude 0º 0' 0" (in Greenwich. GLL: Geodetic position sentence. GGA: NMEA sentence which provides the GPS current fix data. and is also referred to as a Dual Channel Processor. and (b) receiver gain (or video gain) is the amplification given a signal by the receiver. GNS: Geodetic position sentence. 65900010 Glossary-5 . Chart data conforming to specification published in IHO Special Publication No.

it sends a pulse to the radar display that causes a line to show on the screen that represents the vessel's head. If the heading marker is not pointing exactly ahead. Refers to any national hydrographic office. You can refer echoes displayed on the screen to your vessel's head and get the relative bearing of the echo.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide GPS: Global Positioning System. You can quickly check for any such mistake by heading toward a small prominent visible object and see if the radar echo appears under the heading marker. A system by which receivers anywhere on earth can obtain accurate position data. The term "GPS" is also used to refer to the receiver device. Following such a circle plots the shortest distance between any two points on the surface of the Earth. Heading Line: Line that projects forward showing where own ship is headed relative to the targets seen on the video circle. Glossary-6 65900010 . HL: Heading Line HM: Heading Marker HO: Hydrographic Office. When the antenna is pointing ahead. HCRF: Hydrographic Chart Raster Format. relative bearings will be wrong. HDG: Heading Head-up (H UP): Unstabilised display – the ship’s heading marker is always shown vertically upwards indicating straight ahead movement. Electronic format used for BA- ARCS charts. Great Circle (GC): A circle drawn around the Earth such that the centre of the circle is at the centre of the Earth. Heading Marker: A heading marker on the display provides an important reference to direction. GZ: Guard Zone H H UP: Head-up Hawsepipe: A metal pipe on the ship through which an anchor rope passes.

A common example is a serial (RS-232) communications port. and formats used to communicate with an interfaced device.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary HSC: Heading-to-Steer Command.15 mph) L LAN: Local-Area Network LCD: Liquid Crystal Display Local Time Offset: Offset between local time and UTC. IMO: International Maritime Organisation Integral Transceiver: Transmitter/Receiver housed in the Turning Unit. Look-Ahead range: Controls how far in advance an alert is given before a specified range limit is reached. this will be a set of one). 57 (S-57). Interswitch Unit: Enables radar systems to be connected together so that any Display Unit may be connected to any Scanner Unit. and has published this specification in its Special Publication No. HUD: Head Up Display (widgets). K Km: Kilometre (1000 metres) Kn: Knot (one nautical mile per hour – 1. Heading order sent to an autopilot from an external electronic navigation aid. IHO has developed an ENC product specification as the standard for ECDIS data. such as the ECDIS. but functions with no cognizance of the meaning of the data involved. I/O Interface: The collection of components that define the hardware. This will include a set of I/O Ports (in most cases. 65900010 Glossary-7 . I/O Port: A logical channel through which data is transferred. protocols. which may handle protocols needed to pass the data. I IHO: International Hydrographic Office.

designed to generate coherent microwaves.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide LOPs: Lines Of Position. Master Display: A Master Display has complete control over a Transceiver. Mercator: Default chart projection. Glossary-8 65900010 . A Master Display can only have one Transceiver. used to determine the geographic location of own ship. linked by a LAN. a Flat Panel Monitor (also known as FPD or LCD). NAVTEX: A Client/Server application running externally to VisionMaster which is used to broadcast marine safety information to ships with a NAVTEX receiver. The target is displayed by a “lost target” symbol. A Transceiver can only have one Master Display. LP: Long Pulse (available from 3 NM and upwards) M m: Metre Magnetron: Device that is comprised of an electric circuit inside a strong but variable magnetic field. Multi-target Tote: A display panel showing details of multiple acquired targets.5 NM to 24 NM). MP: Medium Pulse (available in range of 0. MMSI: Maritime Mobile Service Identity MOB: Man overboard Monitor: The viewing unit. N N UP: North-up Navline Interface: Interface to Navline Maps facility. Lost Target: A target representing the last valid position of a target before its data was lost. which have been configured as specific product types. used to display geographic areas between 0 degrees and 80 degrees latitude north or south. Multi-node system: A number of workstations.

supplying navigational charts to the United States Navy. North-up (N UP): Stabilised display – the bearing scale shows 000° at the top of the chart display (assumed to be True North). NOAA: National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. January 1992. NDI: Nautical Data International. 65900010 Glossary-9 .15 standard miles). NIMA: National Imagery and Mapping Agency. An agency of the United States government. This standard is commonly referred to as simply "NMEA 0183. Parity: An error-checking procedure in which the number of 1s must always be the same – either even or odd – for each group of bits transmitted without error. An association of manufacturers that has published widely used standards for navigation and other marine sensor communication. Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices. NOAA charts are available in the BSB electronic format. NMEA: National Marine Electronics Association. P PAD: Predicted Area of Danger Parallel Index Lines (PI): A set of parallel lines placed on the video circle to aid navigation. supplying navigational charts. By international agreement.0." The ECDIS is designed to use messages from any navigation. December 1987. Agency of the US government. the nautical mile is now defined as 1852 meters (1. Their published standards include NMEA 0183. or machinery sensor that conforms to this standard. The ship’s heading marker is shown at the appropriate bearing. and Version 2.5. weather. Version 1. Licensed distributor of CHS charts in the BSB electronic format.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary NIC: Never in Control (see Station In Control). NM: Nautical mile – The nautical mile is closely related to the geographical mile which is defined as the length of one minute of arc on the earth's equator.

Proximity Limit: The proximity limit defines the safety breadth from own ship's path that the system checks for dangerous objects. PM: Performance Monitor Polar Stereographic: Chart projection used to display any region of the earth. The co-ordinates used to display past positions may be either relative or true. which does not hold data when the power is turned off. Product types: A small set of defined products.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Past Position Dots: Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or reported target and own ship. Product types apply to individual nodes. PSU: Power Supply Unit R RADAR: Radio Detection and Ranging RAIM: Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAM: Random Access Memory. Range Rings: A set of concentric circles labelled by distance from the central point. Memory used in computer systems. The pulse transmission rate is automatically lengthened for longer ranges. any one of which the VisionMaster application can function as. including the north and south poles (up to 90 degrees north or south). RAM is volatile memory. Relative Motion – Relative Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on the display (normally the centre). All target trails are shown relative Glossary-10 65900010 . PCB: Printed Circuit Board PCIO: PC Input/Output PiP: Picture in Picture video mode. useful for judging distance (especially from own ship). POS: Position PPI: Plan Position Indicator PRF: Pulse Repetition Frequency – the number of radar pulses transmitted each second.

the path taken by a ship or plane that maintains a constant compass direction RM(R): Relative Motion – Relative Trails RM(T): Relative Motion – True Trails ROT: Rate of Turn Route: A set of waypoints that define the intended path of travel. 57.2 GHz. Stationary targets do not produce trails RF: Radio Frequency Rhumb Line (RHL): A line on a sphere that cuts all meridians at the same angle.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary to own ship’s movement. ENC data is standardized according to ECDIS specifications published in IHO Special Publication No. Relative Motion – True Trails: Own ship is shown at a fixed point on the display (usually the centre). SAR: Search and Rescue craft (AIS nav symbol). Target trails show their direction. S63 permit code: A code that identifies a license for using S57 charts. Charts complying with this specification are available from various suppliers. S63 Chart permit file: A file generated by the data manufacturer that is used. S57: Internationally accepted standard for electronic charts in the ENC vector-format. S57 PIN: Is used to generate a 16-character string which represents the encrypted hardware ID portion of the S-57 User Permit. in conjunction with an S63 permit code to decrypt chart data for a particular set of ARCS charts or S57 cells. is the part of the microwave band of the electromagnetic spectrum ranging roughly from 1. This means stationary targets will have trails if own ship is moving. or 10 cm radar short-band. RR: Range Rings RTK: Real Time Kinematic S S-band: The S-band.55 to 5. 65900010 Glossary-11 . This is sometimes referred to as the S57 User Permit.

and other data added by the mariner. SOG: Speed Over the Ground. SP: Short Pulse (available in scale ratio of 1:32 and below) Glossary-12 65900010 .280 feet or 1. Sentence: a self contained line of data SevenCs: chart engine format SIC: Station in Control (for multi-node systems). including navigation equipment and its functionality.6 kilometres. It is this database that is actually accessed by ECDIS for the display generation and other navigational functions. Actual measured speed of advance of a vessel over the surface of the earth. It has limited functionality.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide SART: Search and Rescue Transponder SCAMIN: An attribute (defined by the IHO S-57 standard) that can be used to tag ENC chart features to be suppressed above a certain display scale. Distances at sea are measured in nautical miles. These conventions regulate many of the features of ships used in international trade. Sleeping Target: A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. Scanner Control Unit: A unit which switches power to the S-band Turning Unit. A set of conventions adopted by the IMO and all of its signatory countries in 1974. The SENC may also contain information from other sources. under the control of the Display. No additional information is presented until activated thus avoiding information overload. SM: Statute mile – A mile as measured on land. Slave Display: Display that is used to observe a radar image. SOLAS: Safety of Life At Sea. Scanner Unit: Comprises the Antenna and Turning Unit. SCU: Scanner Control Unit SENC: System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC) means a database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for appropriate use. and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. 5. updates to the ENC by appropriate means.

Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary Sperry security block: A dongle used to identify a VM system (through a PIN). Stationary targets do not produce trails. conspicuous landmarks. in compliance with IMO standards. Trigger PCB: A control board housed in the Transceiver. STBD: Starboard STD: Standard Display. TRP: Temporary Route Plan True Motion: Own ship moves across the video circle. Targets can be labelled (acquired) and tracked.) specified for ECDIS display. Magnetron and sends signals to the Display to indicate when the magnetron has fired a pulse. etc. as measured relative to the water. Trial Manoeuvre: Facility used to assist the operator to perform a proposed manoeuvre for navigation and collision avoidance purposes. 65900010 Glossary-13 . T T BRG: Target Bearing/True Bearing Target: Object of interest on a radar display. System PIN: Personal Identification Number that uniquely identifies a system. Ship's speed. by displaying the predicted future status of all tracked and AIS targets as a result of own ship’s simulated manoeuvres. TCPA: Time to Closest Point of Approach [to own ship] TM: True Motion TO-Waypoint: The waypoint to which the ship is approaching TO-Wheel-over: The wheel-over to which the ship is approaching Total Watch: A Total Watch system will have access to additional product types from the Watch Mode button. STW: Speed Through Water. It controls the Modulator. and identify permits for charts that are licensed on a system- by-system basis. The standard set of chart objects (buoy information.

local time at zero degrees longitude at the Greenwich Observatory. kept by atomic clocks around the world. Time to next action. UTC uses a 24-hour clock. either given as two sets of coordinates (points). Turning Unit: Contains the Antenna rotation motor. TX BIST: Transceiver Built-In Self Test TX COMMS: Transceiver Communications TxRx: Transceiver U UKHO: United Kingdom Hydrographic Office UTC: Universal Time Coordinated – the international standard of time. England. the microwave rotary joint. while running a Voyage Plan. by direction and distance from one given set of coordinates (True Vector). Vigilance Alarm: A system alarm generated when the operator fails to give evidence of fitness.Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide TTG: Time To Go. When the VRM is adjusted over the leading edge of a return with the cursor control. or a point in a vector space defined by one set of coordinates relative to the origin of a coordinate system (Relative Vector). and may contain an integral Transceiver. and which by default consists of a 500 nm track line on present heading. such as a turn. Formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). V Variable Range Marker (VRM): An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target. the distance to the object is shown on the screen. TTMG denotes a temporary plan which may be activated at any time. In the context of the ECDIS. TTMG: Track To Make Good. Vector: Direct connection between two points. VPF: Vector Product Format charts (SevenCs chart format) Glossary-14 65900010 .

The system monitors the awareness of the Officer of the Watch (OOW) and automatically alerts the Master or another qualified OOW if for any reason the OOW becomes incapable of performing the OOW's duties. etc. Weather Fax: An external device that receives weather images and navigational data from a built in radio receiver and displays the information on a web page. then to alert the Master or another qualified OOW. latitude and longitude) on a route indicating a significant event on a vessel’s planned route (for example.). Wheel-over: The geographic location. Additionally. This purpose is achieved by a series of indications and alarms to alert first the OOW and. Waypoint: A geographical location (for example. course alteration point. if he is not responding. 65900010 Glossary-15 . represented by a line where rudder movement should be activated to accomplish a planned turn. calling in point. Wobbulation: Low frequency modulation of the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) to help suppress interference. Chart datum specified in accordance with the IMO ECDIS standard. Watch Mode: See Total Watch. The watch alarm should be operational whenever the ship's heading or track control system is engaged. WGS-84: World Geodetic System 1984. The wheel-over line may be displayed perpendicular to the approaching track or parallel to the departing track of each turn. the watch alarm may provide the OOW with a means of calling for immediate assistance if required.Radar/Chart Radar User Guide Glossary W Watch Alarm: The purpose of a watch alarm system is to monitor bridge activity and detect operator disability which could lead to marine accidents. unless inhibited by the Master.

Glossary-16 65900010 .Glossary Radar/Chart Radar User Guide X X-band: The X-band (3 cm band) of the microwave band of the electromagnetic spectrum roughly ranges from 5. The distance by which the ship's actual position deviates left or right from the Route Plan track. Z Z-order: Refers to the order of objects along the Z-axis.9 GHz.2–10. The relative short wavelength at X-band frequencies makes possible high-resolution imaging radars for target identification and target discrimination. XTE: Cross-Track Error.

.V.© Northrop Grumman Sperry Marine B.